Home

Type Q80BD-J61BT11N/Q81BD-J61BT11 CC-Link

1. RXOF to RX00 RYOF to RYOO i RYOF to RYOO RX1F to RX10 RY1F to RY10 RY1F to RY10 i H i RX6F to RX60 to RY60 RY6F to RY60 RX7D to RX70 i RY7D to RY70 RY7D to 70 RX8F to RX80 RY8F to RY80 RY8F to RY80 2 RX9F to RX90 RY9F to RY90 1 RY9F to RY90 mdReceive K f MEEN mdSend RXCF to RXCO to RYCO RYCF to RYCO RXDD to RXDO RYDD to RYDO RYDD to RYDO RXEF to RXEO i RYEF to RYEO RYEF to RYEO Remote outputs RY Remote inputs RX Remote inputs RX 1 SS ee eat 1 E 1 1 RYOF to RYOO i i RXOF to RX00 RXOF to RX0O RY1F to RY10 1 to RX10 RXTF to RX10 to RY60 RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60 RY7D to RY7O RX7D to RX70 RX7D to RX70 RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 RX8F to RX80 RYOF to RY90 RX9F to RX90 4 to RX90 i mdSend gt 2 n H m 2 gt mdReceive RYCF to RYCO RXCF to RXCO RXCF to RXCO RYDD to RYDO RXDD to RXDO RXDD to RXDO RYEF to RYEO RXEF to RXEO RXEF to RXEO i MAD Remote registers RWr Rem
2. 3 2 3 2 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 sssssssseeeeeeeeeneneeenennennen 3 4 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance for 1 10 3 6 3 3 CC Link Dedicated Cable Specifications sss 3 6 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 48 RUNCUONM EIS PU HOP RE 4 1 4 2 Basic Eunctionss i iO td tb iud n bate tela dtm tuit Lt Ln E 4 3 4 2 1 Communication with remote I O stations sssssssssssssseseeeeeneenne nnne 4 3 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations c cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaeeeeaeeeseaeensaees 4 5 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations ssssssssssssssssssesesee eene 4 10 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device station essseennnm 4 16 A 11 A 11 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability ec eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeseeseesieesieesieesieeneeeee 4 22 4 3 1 Disconnecting a data link faulty station and continuing the data link with only normal stations slave station disconnect function ruseste eai ERER ANEI REAR 4 22 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal auto return f lictlor coectetuer etic 4 23 4 3 3 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty s
3. 11 12 11 8 Device Types eee nee dt deest se toe sce tre e te ie nce s te a e n Le n Le n ns 11 13 11 9 Sample Progra eee eere e cree e e e eL ERR Pee tL a 11 16 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS 12 1to 12 8 12 1 Gornfiguring a Systerm ain den ne epe pne dp d nd te RR dag 12 1 12 2 Setting up the master statidi nennen trennen nnns 12 2 12 2 1 Switch setting channel No 12 2 12 2 2 Parameter sSettiligs i iei uet setti umet itu um tii uei ei eat inst 12 3 12 3 Setting up the remote I O stations eese th natn tr nine 12 4 12 4 Creating a Program sse eene rennen nnne nnns 12 5 12 5 Executing the Data dace cien cnl a en ad e i ed ae D o id ea 12 6 12 5 1 Checking the data link status ssssssssseeeenennenneneen nennen nennen rennen 12 6 1 Checking the master station eese seen ede nra te ede ind 12 6 2 Checking remote I O stations sse nennen 12 7 12 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sessssseeeeenn 12 8 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 13 1 to 13 16 13 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode ssssssseeeeeeeen
4. 0690 eene e ous Station No 2 Station No 1 Tracking cable Station No 0 Li CC Link Terminal resistor Terminal resistor 2 Access to the Redundant CPU a Redundant CPU specify To access the Redundant CPU directly specify the station number of the CC Link module mounted on the station of the target Redundant CPU b Action to be taken at occurrence of system switching After system switching the Redundant CPU in the same system control system or standby system can also be accessed by directly specifying the 4 station number that was specified before system switching 1 When system switching occurs in the Redundant CPU system to be accessed the station number of the CC Link module mounted on the station of each Redundant CPU is also changed internally Example When the Redundant CPU in the control system is accessed Master station Standby master station Control Standby Master local im lel Before system switching system System interface board 081 1695 stie erts m Scent Desgsnesusm
5. 1 1 The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally re No error has occurred Data are being transmitted Data are being received 2 Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below re lt Board detail information Channel No 81 Sta No O Master station V er 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 156kbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status Normal Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type Q80BD J61BT11N Product information 070310000000000 B IRQ No 21 ROM version Memory FEAS0000 FEAFFFFFH 1 0 port D800 D8FFH Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 22 Min 14 Current 14 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally OFF No error has occurred 14 7 14 7 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS IBM PC AT compatible PC 2 Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 MELSEC Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether the data link is being performed normally or not by transferring data between the master station and local stations Use of the sample program allows the operation
6. 7 Appendix About Parameter backup restore 1 0 App 9 Appendix 3 1 Operation Procedure 2 cccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecneeceneeeeaeescacessneeseaeeseaeeseaeeeseaeesseesaees App 9 Appendix 3 1 1 Starting and exiting the tool sssesssssssssssesseeeeeereeneneennn App 9 Appendix 3 1 2 Backing up parameters nennen App 10 Appendix 3 1 3 Restoring parameters nnne App 11 Appendix 3 1 4 How to check the version App 13 Appendix 3 2 Precautions When Using Parameter backup restoration tool App 14 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory i a e a E a a e e a e a App 15 Appendix 4 1 Buffer memory S a a e a a A nnns App 15 Appendix 4 2 Buffer memory details sse ener App 18 Appendix 5 Mode Selection Method ssssssssssssssssesesee eene enne nnne nnns App 34 Appendix 6 Communication with the Redundant App 35 Appendix 7 Warning Message Appears on Windows ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeecaeeeeaeeeeeneeseeenseetss App 38 Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning message 2 c cccesececeeceeeceeeeeeeceaeeceaeeecaeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeieeeseneeesaees App 38 Appendix 7 2 Methods for preventing the warning message sssssssseeee App 39 Appendix 8 Combinations of Boards with Existi
7. A 19 Slave station disconnect function 4 22 Standby master station A 19 Standby master function 1 7 4 25 Standby master station number SW0073 Miseni ien ttt EE ndo deis 17 37 Station number duplicate check 4 36 Station number setting 8 26 Station information setting checklist App 47 Station Status at Error 5 17 SW aiias pn nine LR A 20 Switching a bit device on off 9 32 Switch setting status SW0O064 17 37 System configuration 2 1 System down prevention 1 6 T T branch connection 8 29 Target screen 9 18 Terminal block for data link 8 6 Terminal resistor A 20 8 27 Test screen sesssssssssssseenes 9 20 The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does not start up 17 23 The remote device station is not operating normally sse 17 24 Total number of stations SW0070 17 37 Transient transmission A 20 4 15 4 21 4 48 Transient Transmission Processing Time 5 14 Transient transmission
8. Induction Induction Filter Filter Output side device side Output side device side a The noise will induct into input side when b Separate the input and output wires the input and output wires are bundled 2 Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the control panel using as short wiring as possible about 10 cm 3 94 in Reference noise filters are shown below Noise filter Eum Rated Rated voltage V FN343 FN343 3 01 SCHAFFNER 7 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive The CC Link Ver 2 board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V AC and 75 to 1500V DC 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK This chapter explains the operating procedures required before starting the CC Link Ver 2 board operation as well as the names and settings of the CC Link Ver 2 board components the wiring method and how to perform hardware tests 8 1 Procedures Before Operating the CC Link Ver 2 Board The following flowchart explains the procedures before operating the CC Link Ver 2 board Start Y Perform CC Link Ver 2 board setup Refer to Section 8 3 Component Names and Settings Power off the IBM PC AT compatible PC if it is on y Remove the terminal block of the CC Link Ver 2
9. Consult your local Mitsubishi representative Remove other optional board s and Reinstall Operating system or call ly th Microsoft Technical Support Save Ue Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 1 2 1 The error frequency may depend on the condition of the computer or OS 17 4 17 4 17 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Is a driver message displayed on event viewer of the management tool YES Start the monitor function utility Check switch and other settings according to the error description in event viewer Did the monitor function utility start normally NO Remove other optional board s and YES leave only the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 2 Did the monitor function utility start normally YES Is the correct number of installed Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 boards displayed NO NO YES Check the following items 1 Check that other drivers such as the USB driver are operating correctly END 2 Set the I O IRQ and memory address of the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 to values different from the other drivers such as the USB driver and check whether operation is correct NO YES MELSEC Check the I O IRQ and memory address settings of other option boards and set them without duplication Reinstall other optional board s Have the operating system and Q80BD J
10. mdSend 5 9 Y18 initial data processing completion flag Y19 initial data setting request flag 1 i Remote resisters i RWw mdSend RWw0 CH 1 digital value setting area RWw8 analog output enable disable setting area 13 14 13 14 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 2 5 Executing the data link Turn ON the remote device stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote device stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station How to check the master station is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 13 1 5 1 a b Checking remote device stations How to check the remote device stations is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 13 1 5 1 b For the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN check the identical location as the LEDs on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 13 15 13 15 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 2 MELSEC Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether digital values are being output to remote device stations through normal data link Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the followi
11. RY1FCF to RY1FCO d og RX1FCF to RX1FCO 41FC 43FD RY1FDF to RY1FDO E RX4FDF to RX1FDO RX1FFF to RX1FFO 41FFu App 31 App 31 APPENDIX Example Station number 1 Station number 2 App 32 9 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw and RWr When the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of words indicated below is used a Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote 2 Master station Address 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 440 440Bu 440 440 440 440 4410 4411 4412 4413 M to 4BFC 4BFD ABFEn ABFFu Remote register RWw device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 Remote device station
12. A 9 NTRODUC TO N t tret tute beoe te idet dist A 11 iege trie iin elnino ea ea oe ee eect A 11 Manuals s tend tun cm dn dcc Dx LL d LID A 18 How to Use this Manual nennen nnne nnn tenerte nnne nensi nts n ntn ne A 19 Generic Terms and Abbreviations sesssssssssssssssesseseeeenee nennen terrens A 21 miale LUTO E ET CT EPI A 23 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 10 1 1 Features of the CC Link Ver 2 nnne nnn nnns 1 2 1 2 Features of the CC Link System ssssssssssssseseeeeeeeeeneennee nennen nennen enne nennen nennen nennen 1 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 140 2 10 2 1 Overall Config ration a a Una dea ulna ec dee 2 1 2 2 Applicable Systers ce ea e cae E e I RR REP IE e a ee 2 4 2 2 1 Applicable personal computers and number of boards that can be installed 2 4 2 2 2 Notes on the system 2 7 2 2 3 toe ete nina 2 9 22 4 CC LINK VERSION neat idle dut 2 10 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1t03 6 341 General Specifications o etr beg er ttes teme Un eee trei 3 1 3 2 Performance
13. Other station buffer memory 3 Other station RX Other station RY Other station link register Other station SB OIX Other station SW x JO K JO x JO x JO x JO x x x x3 Accesses the buffer memory of the CC Link module intelligent device station mounted to each CPU Note that access is not allowed when logical station No is used for the specification 10 2 Accessible Ranges Only the following can be accessed in the CC Link communications The master and local stations programmable controllers and intelligent device stations on the CC Link system to which the CC Link Ver 2 board is linked and PC AT compatible PCs with the CC Link Ver 2 board 10 4 10 4 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 11 This chapter explains an overview of the functions included in the MELSEC Data Link Library The screens of Windows 2000 are used in this section These screens are slightly different from other operating systems 11 1 Overview of the MELSEC Data Link Library The functions provided by the MELSEC Data Link Library are used
14. Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction Master module AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Address Description RWwO Single axis positioning start number RWw1 Single axis override RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 to to Single axis new present value Single axis new speed value Single axis JOG speed 4 FUNCTION Ss aA MELSEC Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station I 1 Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board Station number 1 occupies 4 stations RN Remote register RWr Bin data such Las present feed value Remote register RWr RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 RWr5 RWr6 RWr7 mdReceive Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module RWr0 Single axis present feed value RWTr1 RWr2 Single axis feed speed RWr3 RIVA RWIS RWI 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Communication between
15. 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station inde gt Occupies 1 station sinde 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe 0 1 singe Occupies 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station i singe Occupies 1 station Savefie Device Monitor D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd 4 Transmission rate Set the transmission rate 5 Mode Set the operation mode Make the expanded cyclic setting of the CC Link Ver 2 board This setting is allowed when Sta Type is Local station and the mode is set to other than Remote net Ver 1 mode a Sta Set the Race CRM NM stations count for the CC Link Ver 2 board For local station only Set how to handle Set how to handle inputdataintheeventofadatalinkemor data in the event of a data link error 6 Expanded cyclic 8 Input for Err Sta for Err Sta Other settings button Displays the Other settings screen Default button Sets default values to the parameters Refer to table 6 1 in Section 6 1 11 button Checks the currently set parameters for any errors Set the total number of connected modules All connect count and station 12 Station information settings information of each module 13 button pie the parameters within the Station information settings area to the default values 9 OPERATING THE UTILIT
16. 2 Why can tI get Help from this program The Help for this program was created in Windows Help format The Help for this program was created in Windows Help format which depends on a which was used in previous versions of Windows and it is not feature that isn t included in this version of Windows However you can download a program that will allow you to view Help created in the Windows Help format For more information see Windows Help program WinHIp32 exe is no longer included with Windows on the Microsoft support website For more information go to the Microsoft Help and Support website Ask someone or expand your search More support options iL Offline Help 180 Offline Help 1 Click the button 2 The screen shown above opens Click the link section 3 The Microsoft technical information page opens http support microsoft com kb 917607 As of May 2010 Follow the instruction and download the Windows Help program WinHIp32 exe 4 Install the file that has been downloaded 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 7 Verifying the version The following explains how to verify the utility s version 1 To verify the version of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Select Version information from the right click menu of the title bar with CC Link Ver 2 utility Move Minimize Close Alt F4 Shot X Sta l CC Link Ver 2 utility version informatio
17. 9 to RX 90 RY 9F to RY 90 4209 400A4 AF to RX ME ME RY AF to RY AO 420A 400B RX BF to RX BO RY BF to RYBO 4208 400C4 RXCF to RX CO i RY CF to RY CO 420 400D RXDF to RX DO ME MEE RY DF to RY DO 420D 400 RXED to RXEO RY ED to RYEO 420Es to to to to A1FCu RX1FCF to RX1FCO d RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43 41FDu RX1FDF to RX1FDO og RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FD 41FEn RX1FEF to RX1FEO to RY1FEO 43 41FFu RX1FFF to RX1FFO ME RYTFFF to RY1FFO 4 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master s
18. Local station or Local station or Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station intelligent device intelligent device or remote or remote p Y station station device station device station Eee i tation to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 1100 used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance 156kbps 1200m 3937 2 ft 625kbps 900m 2952 9 ft 2 5Mbps 20 cm 7 88 in or longer 400m 1312 4 ft 5Mbps 160m 524 96ft 10Mbps 100m 328 1 ft 3 3 CC Link Dedicated Cable Specifications Use the CC Link dedicated cable for the CC Link system If a cable other than the CC Link dedicated cable is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed If you have any questions regarding the CC Link dedicated cable or if you wish to see its specifications refer to the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org For details refer to the CC Link cable wiring manual issued by CC Link Partner Association 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board dividing them into four sections Basic Functions Functions for Improving System Reliability Useful Functions and Transient Transmission Function 4 1 Function List 1 Table 4 1 lists the basic functions
19. Random C contact Random Random C current value Random Random om Random Dg Special D SD SW Em Random e E ELE Batch T setting value sub 2 Random cem tch T setting value sub 3 Random 1 Cannot be accessed with the A2ACPU S1 T contact 10 2 10 2 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES MELSEC Access destination A0J2H A2A S1 A1S H A2U S1 Device A1SJ H A2AS S1 Personal 2 A2USH S1 computer A2NCS1 Q02 H A A2S H QO6H A C setting value main Batch O Random x C setting value sub 1 pach e Random x Batch setting value sub 2 Bandon x x x x x x Batch setting value sub 3 Random x x x x x x A Baton O O O O O x x Random 2 Baten eB olo Random Batch V index register Random x R file register x ZR file register Batch x x TE x Random ER Batch 2 extended file resister Random z 9 d z 2 i B olo Random Ww Baten O O O O O O x Random Q QnA link special relay Batch Q OnACPU Random x x Kox 9 5 Retentive timer Batch contact Random 3 amp T 2 Retentive timer Batch coil Random Q QnA link special register Batch on Q QnACPU Random Q QnA edge relay Batch on Q QnACPU Ran
20. im Action View Help e B Security Settings Name Description Account Policies Audit Policy Audit Policy gt Local Policies User Rights Assignment User Rights Assignment Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Public Key Policies Ontons aii Software Restriction Policies b amp IP Security Policies on Local Compute L To next page App 43 MELSEC 4 Select Local Security Policy When user account control is enabled in Windows Vista the following screen appears Click the Continue or Yes button lt Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 gt lt Windows 7 gt User Account Control WE Account Control s Do you want to allow the following program to make Windows needs your permission to continue V changes to this computer If you started this action continue Microsoft Management Console a Program name Microsoft Management Console Microsoft Windows Verified publisher Microsoft Windows V Show details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Y Details Change when these notifications appear 5 Select Local Policies 6 Select Security Options App 43 APPENDIX Ele Action View Eus From preceding page BB Security Settings Account Policies 4 Local
21. sss nnne nnns 13 15 1 Checking the data link status 13 15 2 Confirming the operation with a user enn 13 16 14 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode sse nnns 14 1 14 1 1 Configuring the system 4 nuin HR IHRER aie EE inet EV E EL e ce o 14 1 14 1 2 Setting the master station ssssssssseseeeeeeeneneeeneeeneeennee nennen nennen nennen 14 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting 14 2 2 settings nitent metti iret n delatae des 14 3 14 1 3 Setting the local station nennen nnne nnns 14 4 1 Switch setting channel No setting emen 14 4 2 Parameter settings A 14 4 14 1 4 Creating a program tete tec tette ig tentent tate latet tit tete 14 5 14 1 5 Executing the data link rennen trennen 14 7 1 Checking the data link status ssesssssssseeeeeeeeenenen eene renes 14 7 2 Confirming the operation with a user 14 8 14 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional 14 9 14 2 1 Configuring the system sssssssssesssesseeeeneneneneenee nennen nnne nnne nnne nnns 14 9 14 2 2 Setting the master station 2 eiiis eei 14 10 1
22. 2218 Data are being received 2 Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Channel No 81 Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 156kbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status S e Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type Q80BD JE1BT11N Product information 070310000000000 B IRQ No 21 ROM version 14 Memory FEAS0000 FEAFFFFFH 1 0 port D800 D8FFH Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 22 Min 14 Current 14 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally OFF No error has occurred 13 7 13 7 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC b Checking remote device stations Check that the LED status are as shown below AJ65VBTCU 68DAV In On o of RUN dl Module is normal e The data link is being performed normally T Irene No error has occurred 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether digital values are
23. NET 2003 vc vc Sample program to perform the digital analog processing of the Visual Studio 2005 Visual C con Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Visual Basic NET 2003 Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic 11 16 11 16 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC d RemotelO folder Programming language Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 Visual C 5 0 6 0 Visual C NET 2003 Sample program to read write the remote I Os of the remote I O Visual Studio 2005 Visual C station Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Visual Basic NET 2003 Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic e Datalink Ver 1 2 folder Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 Visual C 5 0 6 0 Visual C NET 2003 Sample program for communications between the master and Visual Studio 2005 Visual ca stations Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Visual Basic NET 2003 Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic 2 LocalStation folder a Datalink Ver 1 2 folder Programming language Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 Visual C 5 0 6 0 VC Visual C NET 2003 Sample program for communications between the master and Visual Studio 2005 Visual C ERES stations Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Visual Basic NET 2003 Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic 11 17 11 17 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC
24. DevRX Other station RX DevRY Other station RY DevRW Other station link register 1 DevSB Other station SB link special B for CC Link DevSW Other SW link special W for CC Link 1 Cannot be used with the mdRandR mdRandW mdDevSet and mdDevRst functions To access a random access buffer a different device type must be specified depending on the random access buffer setting Specify a device type shown in the following table specify an address to the device No then access the buffer Setting Device type used Accessible range Default setting DevMRB AO0H to FFFH DevMRB 00 to FFFH Extension setting DevSPB 00 to 2FFFH 11 13 11 13 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 2 Common device types The following table lists the device types common to all communication paths Device type Code designation Device name Device Decimal Hexadecimal designation M Special M SM SB link special B for MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H and CC Link F T contact T coil C contact C coil T current value C current value Special D SD SW link special W for MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H and CC Link T setting value main T setting value sub 1 DevTS3 T setting value sub 3 DevCM C setting value main DevCS C setting value sub 1 DevCS2 C setting value sub 2 4653u DevCS3 C setting value sub 3 19 13
25. ION MEC ip Remote station Programmable controller CPU Master station The station that controls the data link system Remote I O station A remote station that handles bit unit data only Remote device station A remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data Local station A station having a programmable controller CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Intelligent device station A station that can perform transient transmission When applying the program examples and sample programs explained in this manual to the actual system make sure that there is no any problem regarding control on the target system 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 1 Features of the CC Link Ver 2 Board The features of the CC Link Ver 2 board are as follows 1 Personal computers can be incorporated into the CC Link system Installing a CC Link Ver 2 board into a personal computer allows the PC to be used as a master station standby master station or local station compatible with CC Link Ver 2 By using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station Ver 2 compatible remote I O stations remote device stations intelligent device stations and local stations can be controlled from the PC Programs in the CC Link Ver 1 board can also be used in the CC Link Ver 2 board Programs developed for the CC Link Ver 1 board can be used for the CC Link Ver 2 board Parameters set for the CC Link Ve
26. This function enables the data link to continue by switching a faulty master station to a standby master station i e a backup station for the master station Note that even if the master station has been restored automatic switching from the standby master station to the master station is not performed Data link control Standby master station by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Data link ial Station number 2 Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby in progress pu 2 Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Standby master station Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 2 Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Data link control in progress 7 cofpseginication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication In this section the above system configuration will be used in the explanation Refer to Section 2 2 2 1 for the combinations when using the CC Link Ver 2 board as the standby master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 1 Overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used The following pr
27. b When installation is completed normally When the installation is completed normally the icons shown below are registered in the Windows Start menu Start Program MELSEC or Start All Programs MELSEC Utility name a CC Link Ver 2 utility Starts the CC Link Ver 2 utility Device Monitor Utility Starts Device Monitor Utility MELSEC Data Link Function HELP Starts HELP for the Data Link Function c When installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or failed reinstall the utility by the following procedure 1 If the utility can be uninstalled uninstall it Refer to Section 8 4 2 2 Restart the personal computer 3 Install the utility by following the installation procedure 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 4 Installing the driver The following explains the installation procedure of the CC Link Ver 2 board driver 1 Power OFF the personal computer and install the CC Link Ver 2 board to the personal computer 2 Power ON the personal computer and insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 3 By following the on screen instructions described below for each operating system select or enter the necessary information For instructions which are not described below and are difficult to determine refer to 5 in this section 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 1 Using Windows 2000 1 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen
28. driver response error has occurred 714 OFF No PC bus error has occured A PCI bus error has occurred 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Connects CC Link dedicated cables for data link Terminal block 2 piece terminal block for data link Master board Q81BD J61BT11 Board top Q80BD J61BT11N Local module Remote module Terminal ra DA O DA resister O DB 2 DG SLD Terminal resister Sets the board No corresponding to the channel No used for accessing the CC Link Ver 2 board from the user program Channel No Set a board Nos when installing more than one CC Link Ver 2 board setting switch Switch ich eo a Default setting 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 4 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Package This section explains how to install and uninstall the software package 8 4 1 Installation This section explains a procedure for installing the software packages 1 Overview of installation procedure START Install the utility Refer to 2 in this section E ee Power OFF the personal computer Install the CC Link Ver 2 board to the personal computer i Power ON the personal computer Install the driver Refer to 3 in this section Cmm 1 When using Windows NT the driver is installed at the same time as the utility installa
29. j RW tf 2 1 For station number1 RWw2 RWw2 RW 2 2E2 number 1 RWw3 CU RWW esd tt 2 3 1 4 RWw 4 RWr 4 2E4n 1 For station 1 5 RWw 5 RWr 5 2 5 For station number2 i RWw6 do E RW 6 7 2E6 number 2 RWw 7 E RWr7 2 7 1 8 RWw 8 RWr 8 2 8 For station 1 9 RWw 9 RWr 9 2 9 For station inumber3 1EAn Rwa Jo ro 7 2 number 3 l BWwB TP ea RWB 2EBu 1 RWw RWr 2EC Forstaion 1ED RW D 7 2ED For station jnumber4 4EE t RWwE RW E 7 2EE number4 1EFn Tf 2EFu 1 0 RWw 10 RWr 10 2 0 For station 1 1 RWw 11 RWr 11 2 1 For station number5 f aa RWwi2 TT a E RWr12 2F2 number5 4F34 TP s M cg RWr13 7 2F3 to to to to 2DCu RWw FC RWr FC 3DC For station 2DDu RWw FD RWr FD 3DD For station number 641 ope RWwFE RWFE apE f number64 2 RWwFF Of RWrFF J D Ds ac tad gate asec Aaa meatier o m E NE PERIERE E App 22 App 22 APPENDIX App 23 Master station Address 2 0 For station 2 1 number 1 2E2u 2 3 2 4 For station 2 5 number 2 2 6 2 7 i 2 8 For station 2 9 number 3 2 2 2EC For statio
30. lay lly Optimize J Additional Options CDs or other media automatical Mobile PC To next page App 39 App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC From preceding page 3 Select User Accounts User Accounts Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Change your Windows password Windows CardSpace Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services Program Mobile PC User Accounts Ease of Access Additional Options Classic View 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off Make changes to your user account Change your password Remove your password ME Ee inistrator Change your picture Password protected Change your account name Change your account type Manage another account Tum User Account Control on or off i 7 ae 5 Deselect Turn on User Account Control UAC to 188 User Accounts Turn User Account Control On or Off Search s TT make your computer more secure and click the Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that b tt you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer utton E Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer l Setting completion App 40 App 40 APPENDI
31. mewemer x Dux Dx xxx saes of rese Po fo men swwcase o 9 D DEDE A SW3D5C ACT E O SW1D5C SHEET E FI o o Ee E E x x X x x x x x x p px px p Ix x Ix x x x x x x x x px px x x px x x x x x x X px px px px x x x x x px x px x x x O O i 3 09K 3 14Q Q A 5 1 083 Pox Ce Oox x A 1 10L x x x wesceewE o x x x x x x x SW7D5C GPPW E A a E d SW8D5C GPPW E A A ToL o o lat Lesa NT 4 0 Windows NT Win 2000 Windows 2000 XP Pro Windows XP Professional XP Home Windows XP Home Edition Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Vista Windows Vista Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Win 7 Windows 7 Valid combination A Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later X Invalid combination App 47 App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 When using the CC Link Ver 2 board Q81BD J61BT11 and communication support software tools or GX Developer in the same PC SW1DNC CCBD2 B Board model Software package Support
32. o o o SWO0059 Transmission rate 10 Mbps 6594 setting p 5 Mbps gt 2 5 Mbps gt 625 kbps 156 kbps Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Forced master switching instruction result SW005D 650 Stores the details of the LED display status 0 OFF 1 ON b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bi bO eTeTeTo LINE ERROR Cable is disconnected or the transmission path is affected by noise TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being disconnected or the transmission path being affected by noise PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value M S ERROR Duplicate station on the same line I SW ERROR Setting Error LOCAL Operating as a local station C SMST Operating as the standby master station MST Operating as the master station gt ERR Error occurrence RUN The module is operating normally 3 Can be used for the standby master station only 17 35 17 35 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 3 7 Availability Available Not available Number Description Online station station Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration SWOOS5F _ initialization instruc
33. 12 7 2 Checking remote I O stations Be sure that the LED display shows the following status AJ65SBTC1 32D1 w o AJ65SBTC1 32T Off PW LRUN LERR Ne e oN oN No error has occurred The data link is being executed normally 12 7 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link is being executed normally Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to Section 11 9 With the sample program the following operations can be checked When the input RXO in 1 is turned on the output YO RY20 in 2 turns on When the input RXO in 1 is turned off the output YO RY20 in 2 turns off Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Remote I O station station No 1 Remote I O station station No 2 AJ65SBTC1 32D1 AJ65SBTC1 32T 0000 OO OO Input module Output module xoo 1 yoo 2 12 8 12 8 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION This section gives a system configuration example to explain t
34. 2 Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX18 3 With the initial data processing request flag RX18 T ON writes data to the analog output enable disable setting area RWw8 5 Turns ON the initial data processing completion flag RY18 8 Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX18 9 With the initial data processing request flag RX18 7 gt OFF turns OFF the initial data processing completion flag RY 18 11 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY19 14 Reads out the initial data setting completion flag RX19 15 With the initial data setting completion flag RX19 r ON turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY19 18 Reads out the initial data setting completion flag RX19 and the remote READY RX1B 19 With the initial data setting completion flag RX19 OFF and the remote READY RX1B ON perform the following Writing digital values to the CH1 digital value setting area RWwO Turning ON the analog output enable flag RYOO of the channel 13 6 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Turns ON the initial data processing request flag RX18 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV after turning on the AJOBVBTCU 68DAV 4 Writes data to the analog output enable disable setting area RWw8 on the AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAV 6 Turns ON the initial data processing completion flag RY18 on the AJeSVBTCU 68DAV 7 The initial data processing requ
35. AJ65BT R2 PW x i The module is normally RUN SY The data link is being L RUN executed normally SD RD e LERR O EN UE gt Receiving data No error has occurred Sending data 15 10 15 10 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link is being executed normally Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to Section 11 9 With the sample program initialization transmission and reception are available Sending Sending data ABCD Master station J Receiving Receiving data Q80BD J61BT11N ABCD Q81BD J61BT11 Occupies 1 station Remote device station station No 1 AJ65BT R2 000 Receiving Receiving data RS 232C module ABCD Terminal resistor h External device Sending Sending data ABCD 15 11 15 11 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC MEMO 15 12 15 12 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 COMMUNICAT
36. to 1FH CC Link version lower A80BD classification 0 fixed 5 Communication with Intelligent device station AJ65BT R2 CC Link Ver 2 Board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link Ver 1Board A80BDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 Communication function using the buffer on the host station CC Link Ver 1 Board CC Link Not available Available Ver 2 Board that can send receive data App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 1 2 Functional comparisons with CC Link module The main functional comparisons between the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N and CC Link Module QJ61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 are shown here For details of the functions refer to Chapter 4 Q80BD J61BT11N Function Q81BD QJ61BT11N e Compatbity win Remotenetver2mode _ taste s n compel with Remote net additional mode Transient Other station access by GX Developer o o transmission Other station access by dedicated instructions x nein Other station access by MELSEC datalinklibrary Oo x Standby master function function Reserved station function Cyclic Communication in Error invalid station setting function Hardware Test function al Automatic return function o RAS function Slave station cut off function o Temporary error invalid station setting function 5 Slave station refresh forced clear setting function
37. x error parameter PAR range from 1 to 40 station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu The total number of occupied stations Total number of stations set with a station information Boe error parameter parameter addresses 20 to 5 Set avatus 2 exceed 64 Number of occupied The number of all occupied stations SA DOM Set the occupied station number B386 stations setting error was set to 0 with a station information N O x between 1 and 4 parameter parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu m A write operation was performed to a Do not write to any of the use Use prohibited area as 4 B387 use prohibited area not used in the prohibited areas not used in the write error buffer memory buffer memory The station type was set to a value B388 Station Rips sening erro other than O to 2 with a station Set the parameter within the 9 information parameter addresses 20H range from to 2 x to 5Fx ae A write operation was performed to a Do not write to any of the use Use prohibited area ee 3 B389 use prohibited area not used in the prohibited areas not used in the write error buffer memory buffer memory The number of remote device stations Remote device station was set to 43 stations or more with Set the number of remote device B38B wee h t setting error parameter station information parameter stations
38. 1 Round up decimals When performing a transient transmission using the md functions the transient transmission is executed in several runs by dividing the number of request data into sizes inside the md functions that can be received by the opposite station In addition after the communication line is opened the first md function performs extra transient transmission in order to obtain detailed information of the programmable controller 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES 5 4 Station Status at Error 5 4 1 Status of the master station and remote I O station at error This section explains the status of each station at error MELSEC Table 5 1 lists the status of the master station and remote I O stations when an error occurs Table 5 1 Status of the master station and remote I O station at error Master station Data link status When the local station s programmable controller CPU is stopped data link continues Remote station Remote input RX All points are set to off for only the receive area from the stopped local station 1 Remote output RY Continue Remote register RWw Continue Remote register RWr Continue Input Continue Output Continue When data link for the entire System is Input data Master Clear setting ofthe station Latch Latch CC Link Ver 2 Local stopped utility at error station All poi
39. 176u to 177H 178u to 179H 2 L9 Mud EM App 19 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address to FBH to FDH to FFH 100 to 101H 102 to 103H 104 to 105 106 to 107H 108 to 109H 10 to 10BH 10Cu to 100 10 to10FH 110 to 111 112 to 113 Local station Station Buffer memory address 114 to 115u 116 to 1174 118 to 119H 11 to 11BH 11 to 11DH 11 to 11FH 120 to 121 122 123 124 to 125 126 127 128 to 129 12 to 12 12 120 Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12FH 130 to 131H 132u to 133H 134 to 135H 136u to 137H 138 to 139H 13Au to 13BH 13Cu to 13DH 13Ex to 13FH 140 to 141 142 to 143 144 to 145 146 to 147 number Station Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14BH 14Cu to 14Du 14 to 14FH 150H to 151H 152 to 153H 154 to 155u 156u to 157u 158 to 159H 15 to 15BH 15Cu to 15Du 15 to 15FH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 17Au to 17BH 17CH to 17DH 17 to 17FH 180 to 181H 182u to 183H 184 to 185u 186 to 187H 188 to 189H 18Au
40. 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board settina Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Operational settings 2 Other settings Sta No Type 0 Masterson ue ating Transmission rate 10Mbps 2 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Default Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 Input for Err Sta Station information settings All connect count Clear C Hold Clear Check Intelligent device station Remote 1 0 station single v Occupies 1 station Remote 1 0 station ing w Occupies 1 station Device Monitor Load file Save file New 2 Set the Standby master station with the Other settings button Setting range 1 to 64 No standby master station specified for blank Default 0 No standby master station specified Other settings Retry count 32d Automatic reconnection station count 1 a Cancel Standby master station No 0 H Default Delay information setting 0 E 50 micro sec WDT setting 1001 8 ms 3 Select the Ver 1 Intelligent device station or Ver 2 Intelligent device station for Type of the station information Make a selection according to the mode set in Mode setting 4 FUNCTION abcd MELSEC Setting the standby master station Set the same Standb
41. 3 MDFunction folder a Vb folder for Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 A sample program for reading writing DO from to the master station b Vc folder for Visual C 5 0 6 0 Visual NET 2003 2005 2008 1 Mtest folder Mtest1 c Sample program of the general MELSEC data link library Netsmp1 c Sample program to read device D of station number 0 c NET folder Visual Basic NET 2003 2005 2008 1 2003 folder A sample program for reading writing DO from to the master station 2 2005 folder A sample program for reading writing DO from to the master station 11 18 11 18 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and remote I O station setting parameter setting programming and operation check 12 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and two remote I O stations as shown below is used Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Remote I O station station No 1 AJ65SBTC1 32D1 000 O Remote I O station station No 2 AJ65SBTC1 32T 0000 O Output module 12 1 12 1 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 Setting up the master station
42. 5DC1H to SEBFH DevLW11 to DevLW255 Direct link register 25001 to 25255 61 9 to 62A7H DevLSB1 to DevLSB255 Direct link special relay network module side 28001 to 28255 29000 to 29255 6D61H to 6E5FH 7148 to 7247H DevLSW 1 to DevLSW255 DevSPGO to DevSPG255 Direct link special register network module side Special direct buffer register 31000 to 31255 7918 to 7A17H DevEMO to DevEM255 EM shared device 32000 to 32255 7000 to 7DFFH DevEDO to DevED255 ED shared device 1 Devices dedicated to buffer memory access on the CC Link Ver 2 board own station x2 Access is allowed only to a remote station s PC only if the communication destination is a running MX Link SW2D5F CSKP E or later on Windows NT 11 15 11 15 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 9 Sample Programs When SW1DNC CCBD2 B is installed in a PC sample programs are registered lt User specified folder gt lt CCBD2 gt lt Sample gt Sample programs are provided as a reference for creating user application programs The user is solely responsible for the use of the sample programs provided 1 MasterStation folder This folder contains sample programs for the master board these sample programs cannot be used for the local board a PositioningSystem folder Programming language Sample program to perform the initialization positioning origin E ov
43. 6 2 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 Station Station number 1 number 3 Master station Local station Ver 1 compatible Remote I O Remote I O Q80BD QJ61BT11 t J61BT11N remote device station occupies station occupies occupies 4 stations occupies 2 stations 1 station 1 station Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Operational settings ste 0 x 50 micro sec settings Station information setting items Setting item Setting value No Sta No Remote device Intelligent device Station type Remote station Remote I O station Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Remote station points 64 points 32 points 128 points 32 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting Send rm Sees Se Receive _ select Automatic _ Setting not required 6 5 6 5 PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC 6 2 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 Station
44. Alt Tab keys to bring it to the front Click the button Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software this time only es and ever time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue For operating system of Windows XP Service Pack2 or later the confirmation screen for connection to Windows Update may be displayed Select No not this time and click the button 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC b Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 User Account Control 255 An unidentified program wants access to your computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before RET Seupan Setup exe J Unidentified Publisher d Ca Cance Idon t know where this program is from or what it s for Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer y User Account Control EJ ry Do you want to allow the following program from an 7 unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown Fi
45. Generic term for AZACPU A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 R21 AZACPUP21 R21 S1 ASACPUP21 R21 and A3ACPU AnUCPU Generic term for A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 A2USHCPU S1 ASUCPU and A4UCPU QnACPU Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q8ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU ACPU Generic term for ANNCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU QCPU A mode Generic term for QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A and QO6HCPU A QCPU Q mode Generic term for Q00JCPU Q00UJCPU Q00CPU QOOUCPU Q01CPU Q01UCPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU Q02UCPU QO03UDCPU QOSUDECPU Q04UDHCPU QO4UDEHCPU Q06HCPU QO6UDHCPU QOGUDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q12HCPU Q12PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q25HCPU Q25PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU Process CPU Generic term for Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU LCPU Generic term for LO2CPU and L26CPU BT Master station The station controlling the remote station local station and intelligent device station Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Standby master station Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected due to a programmable controller CPU Master board or power supply problem Local station A station that has a CPU and can communication with the master
46. IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 1 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section 1 1 RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF Gy 2 FF 4 E Z mo Ba dr v2 1 rd 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt T CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel 81 Other settings 7 Operational settings m st ier settings 2 Sta 029 5 3 Transmission rate 156kbps Occupied Sta Default 6 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode m I
47. Local station parameters CC Link Ver 2 board SW1DNC CCBD2 B Master standby master station parameters Local station parameters App 14 Additio nal mode Master standby master station parameters Local station parameters be restored x Cannot be restored 3 File name and file path entered when backing up parameters The following table shows the maximum number of characters that can be entered and the characters not to be used when entering file names and file paths File Name Length Path Length Illegal Characters App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Buffer memory is a memory area used for data transfer between the user program and the CC Link Ver 2 board The data of the buffer memory return to their defaults when the CC Link Ver 2 board is reset by powering OFF the PC or resetting the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Appendix 4 1 Buffer memory list The buffer memory list is shown Buffer memory list 1 3 Read write _ Availability Reference Item Description Master Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section station station 00004 to Use prohibited 1 OODFu Remote input RX For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby master stations For the local station Stores the status the master station For the master station Stores the output sta
48. i 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 2 Reads out the reception normal read request 1 When the AJ65BT R2 receives data from external signal RX2 and the reception error read request equipment the reception normal read request signal signal RX3 RX2 or reception error read request signal RX3 is turned ON 3 With the reception normal read request signal RX2 ON reads out the received data 4 Turns ON the reception read complete signal 5 Turns ON the reception read complete signal RY2 of the AJ65BT R2 6 The AJ65BT R2 turns OFF the reception normal 7 Reads out the reception normal read request read complete signal RX2 or reception error read signal RX2 complete signal RX3 8 Turns OFF the reception read complete signal RY2 15 8 15 8 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the intelligent device station and then the master station 15 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and intelligent device stations under normal data link condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operating
49. point return and JOG operation of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Meu Base 9 Sample program to initialize the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 mea em to perform the JOG operation of the AJ65BT Visual 5 0 6 0 Visual NET 2003 Sample program to perform the positioning of the AJ65BT Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Em T Visual Studio 2008 Visual C ample program to perform the origin point return of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 2003 S itioni men Visual Basic NET 2003 ample program for initialization positioning zero point return NETVB 5005 and jog operation of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic b R2 folder Programming language Sample program to perform the initialization transmission and CS reception of the AJ65BT R2 Rs2testB Sample program to initialize the AJ65BT R2 Visual 5 0 6 0 pe Sample program to perform the reception of the AJ65BT R2 Visual NET 2003 Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Sample program to perform the transmission of the AJ65BT R2 Visual Studio 2008 Visual C 2003 hou Visual Basic NET 2003 Sample program for the AJ65BT R2 to perform initialization Tm NETVB p Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic 2005 transmission and reception a Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic c RemoteDevice 68DAV Ver 1 2 folder Programming language WB Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 Visual C 5 0 6 0 Visual C
50. to CFFF Errors detected by the Ethernet interface module Refer to the CC Link system master local module user s manual Errors detected in the CC Link system Refer to the QJ61BT11N User s Manual for whether the cyclic data can be transmitted to from stations compatible with CC Link Ver 2 20480 to 16385 B0001 to BFFFu 18558 Request destination station number specification error B782 The local station number was specified as the station Review the correct request destination station number number of the processing request destination station ator A transient request was issued to a remote I O station Check the request destination station 18575 Other station s dedicated device was accessed to own Check ihe device type B77 1H station ype 17 14 17 14 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Return value Le 24957 9 83 24958 9 82 24959 9E81 25056 9 20 26334 99221 Number of device points error The number of points set for the request destination station is out of device range When a bit device was designated the number of points was not a multiple of 8 This is checked by the request destination s link module Device number error The device number designated for the request destination station is out of device range When a bit device was designated the device number was not a multiple of 8 This is checked by the request destination s link module Device type er
51. 1 1 The master station only sends data to stations where datalink has been started The master station does not send any data to stations where datalink has not been started 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system automatically starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility On off information from a local station to the master station or another local station 2 The on off information of the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of a local station The remote output RY is used as the output information to be used by the local station system 3 The information in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station and the remote output RY buffer memory of another local station 4 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory The remote input RX is used as the input information to be used by the local station systems 5 The input status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Programmable CC
52. 127 128 129 12 12 12 120 Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12FH 130H to 131H 132u to 133H 134 to 135 136 to 137 138 to 139 1 13 13CH to 130 13Eu to 13FH 140 to 141 142 to 143H 1444 to 145 146u to 147H Station Buffer memory address 148 to 149 14 to 14 14 140 14 to 14 150 to 151 152 to 153 154 to 155 156 157 158 to 159 15 to 15 15 150 15 to 15 21 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Remote registers RWw and RWr When the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of words indicated below is used a Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received e Four words are used per station Remote device station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Address 1 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 2 For station 1E 1 RWw1
53. 17 33 Other station data link status SW0080 17 38 Other station monitor screen 9 13 Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status 0084 17 38 Other station watchdog timer error status SB0081 secet 17 33 Parameter backup restore tool App 9 Parameter receive status SB0077 17 32 Parameter Settings 6 1 Parameter setting checklist App 46 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 6 5 Remote Net Ver 2 6 7 Remote Net Additional Mode 6 9 Parameter Setting Items 6 1 Parameter settings 9 16 Parameter setting status SBOO6D 17 32 Parameter setting test result SWOOAF 17 35 Index 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 Precautions for installing other optional board R S dg pe TU M 17 49 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 board Metabo AE E ien nid ipa 8 2 Procedure Before Starting The Data Link 8 1 Programming 11 9 Remote device A 19 Remote device station communication 1 3 Remot
54. Buffer memory mdReceive Transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 5 System down prevention Slave station disconnect function Even if a module system fails because of power failure or power off it will not affect the communication with other normal modules since the system employs the bus connection method Also for a module using a 2 piece terminal block the module can be replaced during data link Replace the module after turning its power off Also check that the switch setting on the replaced module is same as the one set on the module before replacement However if the cable is disconnected the data link to all stations is disabled Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station occupying occupying Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station occupying 2 stations Master station Remote station occupying 2 stations Remote station occupying 1 station V Data link continues Station number 4 Station number 7 Faulty station Local station Local station Master occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupyin occupying occupying sta ion 1 station 2 stations n 6 Auto return function When a module that has been disconnected from the l
55. DB00 DBFFH Status Device Monitor Load file Save file New 1 Channel No Select the channel to be diagnosed Displays the addresses of the 2 port memory and I O port being diagnosed the number of 2 Diagnoses nes p H P A diagnoses and the status 3 button Starts the 2 port memory and I O port diagnosis on the selected channel 4 button Stops the currently executing 2 port memory and I O port diagnosis and updates the count and status 5 Reset board button Resets the CC Link Ver 2 board 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 8 Operating the Test screen The Test screen is used to test the installed CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Depending on the station type and operation mode parameters written to the CC Link Ver 2 board test availability varies The following table shows each test can be selected or not Selectable x Not selectable Station type Master station Other than master station Mode Other than offline Other than offline Offline 2 When an error occurs in the Test refer to the following items to check the error description and action to take Section 17 2 1 Errors that may occur when executing functions Section 17 3 5 Error codes stored in the special link registers CC Link Ver 2 utility Channel No ChannelNo 81 Self station information Sta No Master station Ver 2 mode Test item Network test Device Monitor L
56. Handshaking signals RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 4 such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag RYOF to RYOO RYTF to RY10 nin econ nn ni nn ed Remote output RY when the AJ65BT 64DAV is set to station number 1 RY05 to Not used RY17 RY18 Initial data processing complete flag RY19 Initial data setting request flag RY1A Error reset request flag RY1B to Not used RY1F 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the transmission data to the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device station Remote device station Remote device station IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Station number 1 Station number 3 CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote device RWw Numerical data such as digital value setting areas 2 i Program RWwO Remote device RWw Numerical data such vas digital value setting 6 Rww 7 i areas RWw7 dSend mdSend RNC Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT 64DAV is set to station number 1 Signal direction master module AJ65BT 64 Not used 4 FUNCTIONS Reading from the remote register RWr IBM P
57. Local station No 1 User program WW mdReceive Remote outputs RY RYOF to RYOO i A i Remote registers i i Remote registers RWr RWw 6 i 5 gt Remote registers i Remote registers RWw RWr Di 8 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Master station User Program 2 Reads out the remote input of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 3 Turnr ON the remote output RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station with the read out remote input ON Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x0 6 Reads out the remote register RWr0 of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x25 own station RWr Device No 0x0 7 Writes OxAAAA to the remote register RWwO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station if the read out remote register RWr0 is 0x5555 Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x24 own station RWw Device No 0x0 14 6 CC Link 2 CC Link Ver 2 MELSEC Local station User Program 1 Turn ON the remote out
58. No 0 Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 156kbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type JB0BD J51BT11N Product information 070310000000000 B IRQ No 21 ROM version 14 Memory FEAS0000 FEAFFFFFH 1 0 port D800 D8FFH Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 22 Min 14 Current 14 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally OFF No error has occurred 16 13 16 13 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 2 LED displays of the Intelligent device station Be sure that the LED displays show the following status 24 V DC is being supplied AJ65BT D75P2 S3 PW e e S el The module is normally RUN e amp Ne The data link is being executed normally SD gt SSS Be ee RD e Sending data LERR O e Receiving data No error has occurred on OO Off 16 14 16 14 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link i
59. Output processing time LS x 32 Output processing time LS x 3 Output processing time Input transmission delay time LS x 4 Input processing time LS x 8 Input processing time 3 CC Link Board Functions Cyclic points increase function Remote station points setting CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 LS x 16 Input processing time LS x 32 Input processing time CC Link Ver 1 board A80BDE J61BT11 AS0BDE J61BT13 Available Unavailable Available Unavailable 25 LS x 3 Input processing time Reference section App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 MELSEC Data Link Library CC Link Ver 2 Board CC Link Ver 1 Board Q80BD J61BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 Offset value Q81BD J61BT11 S W version A to ZZ Date year month day Exp 2005 April 1st 0 5 0 4 0 1 07 0000 fixed ER Eu name a REA Je1BT11 5 Date mdBdVerRead 10s to 17H to 17H HIW format name format name QB0BD 61BTMN J61BT11N AB0BD J61BT13 A80BD J61BT11 J61BT13 A80BD J61BT11 Version information to be EN Sport memory 02004 512k bytes 40004 16k bytes possession size read by functions 2potatribue attribute 0080 fixed Useable offset 0000 fixed Function version CC Link version higher Machine 1
60. Remote register RWw Link scan Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Link scan 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 3 Local station communication The communication between the master station and the local station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission a Cyclic transmission Data communication between stations can be performed in N N mode using bit data remote input RX and remote output RY and word data remote registers RWw RWr IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Programmable Program CC Link Ver 2 board Local station controller CPU Remote input Remote output Read RA Link scan aid Automatic refi ea utomatic refres mdReceive ae Remote output Remote input RX Write Link scan Automatic refres mdSend Remote Remote register register Write Link scan Aut tic ref mdSend Remote Remote register register Read Link scan Automatic refres mdReceive im a D b Transient transmission Read and write operations can be performed for the local station buffer memory and CPU device at an arbitrary timing using the mdReceive and mdSend functions respectively IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Programmable CC Link Ver 2 board Local station Transient S E Ne te ai controller CPU dS
61. Remote net ver 1 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode x5 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 6 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 17 40 17 40 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC The update timing of the data in a link special register SW differs depending on the link register number Table 17 8 lists the update timings of the link special registers Table 17 8 Update timings of the link special registers Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing SW0041 SW0071 Updated individually regardless of the SB Updated individually regardless of the SB Updated after each station reaches a SW0045 stable condition SW0060 When the SB0074 changes SW0061 When the SB0075 changes SW0062 When the SB0080 changes SW0067 Updated individually regardless of the SB SW0068 When the SB0090 changes SWO06A Updated individually regardless of the SB SWOO06D Updated individually regardless of the SB SW0070 17 41 17 41 17 TROUBLESHOOTING 17 3 5 Error codes stored in the link special registers MELSEC Table 17 9 lists the error codes that are stored in the link special registers SWs Error code hexadecimal Error description Table 17 9 Error code list Cause of error details Corrective action Detectabili
62. Single X 96 c2 160 c4 320 c8 x 640 X 128 d2 x 224 d4 x 448 d8 896 lt 8192 82 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that Ha X 4 a2 X 8 a4 X 16 a8 X 32 occupy 4 stations which are set to Double b X 8 b2 X 16 b4 X 32 b8 X 64 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that c X 12 c2 X 24 c4 X 48 c8 X 96 occupy 1 station which are set to Quadruple d X 16 d2 X 32 d4 X 64 d8 X 128 lt 2048 Condition 3 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set
63. Station information setting items o SoN Station MU Expanded cyctic EN M MM send CENE 7 u 1 Setting not required PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC 6 4 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Additional Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station 4 Ver 2 compatible slave station number 3 added to the existing system Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station QJ61BT11N occupies 4 stations Master station Q80BD Remote I O Remote I O Ver 2 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station J61BT11N station station occupies occupies 1 station 1 station sw 2 Station information setting items station station device station device station Remote station points 32 points 32 points 224 points 128 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting Send 9 fJ Intelligent buffer Reeve select word Automatic a Setting not required 6 9 6 9 PARAMETER SETTIN i gt
64. Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic setting single Local station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Remote register RWr to Address 4 00 4 02 4 03 4C04u 4 05 4C06n 4 07 4 08 4 09 4 4COBu 4COCu 4C0Du 4C0En 4 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 to 53FCu 53FDu 5 5 Station number 1 Station number 2 App 32 MELSEC APPENDIX b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing itin the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received e When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 MELSEC Example Remote devi
65. Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 double quadruple 4 FUNCTION MELSEC x2 When the master station is the Q80BD J61BT11N the remote net additional mode and the local station is the QJ61BT11N in the remote net ver 2 mode data in other stations can be checked as shown below Master station additional mode 1 compatible remote output RY Ver 2 compatible Station number 2 remote output RY Local station Ver 1 mode Station number 1 Occupies 1 station r r Station number 1 Local station Ver 2 mode Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 6 Station number 7 Local station additional mode Station number 3 Occupies 4 stations Remote input RX 1 Station number 1 to Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 6 Station number 7 Standby master station additional mode Station number 7 Station number 2 Station number 5 Station number 6 to to 3 When the CC Link Ver 1 board or the CC Link Ver 2 board is set as the standby master station set the CC Link Ver 1 board or the CC Link Ver 2 board respectively as the master station Refer to Section 2 2 2 1 for combinations of the master station and the standb
66. Station number 3 earn number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 2 Station number 2 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 3 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 eee Target areas for clear latch Station number 4 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 P Areas retained regardless of the setting The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output RY in the local stations will either clear or retain the data from faulty stations according to the setting The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote registers RWw and RWr in the local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of the setting When a data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station the input data remote input RX and remote output RY from that station is retained regardless of the setting 2 Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details on the setting refer to Section 9 2 3 4 FUNCTION ss MELSEC 4 3 4 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty standby master function
67. Switch setting channel No setting 14 10 2 Parameter salinos erunt iret dep etd nip etin nip n d reni 14 11 14 2 3 Setting the local StatiOn pente teet tiet etii tme tete ite intet etti ede 14 12 1 Switch setting channel No setting mnes 14 12 2 Parameter settings ou one un ates en atten a ere t en irte em d e I D REUTERS 14 12 14 2 4 Creating a program sereme 14 13 14 2 5 Executing the data link ioc ceteris ce itn ee Leine te UE me ea De nac 14 14 1 Checking the data link status ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeneen nennen 14 14 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sseseeeeenennem nn 14 14 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 15 1 to 15 12 15 1 Configuring a System inta deni bash tie cni be a ie n ive aa ie i ua e ci dus 15 1 15 2 Setting the Master Station 15 2 15 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting sssseneenennennennennneenemennnnnnnns 15 2 15 2 2 Parameter settings ei en eH ee ee e t b ete e eei ees 15 3 15 3 Setting up the intelligent device station ssssseneneeneenen nemen 15 4 15 4 Creating Program n caet ee eie pe ne ten e ne e nce e te a te e b nc age dene 15 5 15 4 1 Initializ
68. communication error power off etc occurs in a remote I O station Input data setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Master station Local station Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Clears the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Continue Continue When a communication error power off etc occurs ina remote device station When a communication error power off etc occurs ina local station Input data setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Input data setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Master station Local station Master station Local station Continue Continue Continue 1 This is because YnO refresh direction is turned off Continue Continue Clears the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Continue Continue Clears the receive area from the local station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the local station having a communication error Retains the receive area
69. from the local station having a communication error PARAMETER SETTIN I MELSEC 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link in the CC Link system 6 1 Parameter Setting Items The parameter setting items and their descriptions are shown in Table 6 1 Each parameter is set using the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Refer to Appendix 9 Parameter Setting Sheet to record the set parameters For the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 1 Parameter setting items list Parameters to be set are listed on the next page Table 6 1 S CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 Other settings Operational settings Oth T Other settings 1 Sta No Type 0 5 Master station iem 4 7 Retry count 2 Transmission ate 10Mbps c Occupied sta 5 8 Automatic reconnection station count 3 Remote net Ver 2 mode Input for En Sta Hol Steer 6 Default Station information settings 9 Standby master station No i 1 2 All connect count B4 10 Delay information setting 0 5 50 micro sec No Sta No Station type Expanded
70. gt RY37F gt o RY39F gt RY3BF gt o RY3DF gt o gt o RY41F gt o RY43F gt o RY45F gt o RY47F gt o RY49F gt o RY4BF gt o RY4DF gt o RY4FF gt RYS1F gt o RYS3F gt o RY55F gt RWwC to RWwF RWw10 to RWw13 RWw14 to RWw17 RWw18 to RWw1B gt RWw1C to RWw1F gt RWw20 to RWw23 RWw24 to RWw27 RWw28 to RWw2B to RWw2F gt o RWw33 gt o RWw37 gt o RWw3B gt to RWw3F gt o RWw43 gt o RWw47 gt o RWw4B gt to RWw4F RWw50 to RWw53 RWw54 to RWw57 gt RWw58 to RWw5B gt RWw5C to RWw5F RWw60 to RWw63 RWw64 to RWw67 gt RWw68 to RWw6B gt RWw6C to RWw6F RWw70 to RWw73 RWw74 to RWw77 RWw78 to RWw7B gt RWw7C to RWw7F RWw80 to RWw83 RWw84 to RWw87 RWw88 to RWw8B RWw8C to RWw8F gt RWw90 to RWw93 RWw94 to RWw97 RWw98 to RWw9B MELSEC RWrC to RWrF gt to RWr2F gt o RWr37 gt RWr3B gt RWr40 to RWr43 gt RWr44 to RWr47 gt RWr48 to RWr4B gt RWr4C to RWr4F gt RWr50 to RWr53 gt RWr54 to RWr57 gt RWr70 to RWr73 gt RWr74 to RWr77 gt RWr78 to RWr7B gt RWw9C to RWw9F gt to RWr9F gt RWwAO to RWwA3 gt RWrA0 to RWrA3 gt RWwA4 to RWwA7 gt RWrA4 to RWrA7 gt RWwAe to RWwAB gt RWrA8 to RWrAB gt RY560 to RYS7F RWwAC to RWwAF gt to RWrAF gt App 54 APPENDIX MELSEC RX580 to RX59F gt RY580 to RYS9F gt RWwBO to RWwB3
71. shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned tr
72. 123 Failed to map the Dual Port Memory Remove other option boards H oe Failed to connect the Interrupt Remove other option boards H 294 The I O of the I F board conflicts with the other Remove other option boards 1 1264 hardware s one The request which was not able to be processed was received from remote station The retry transmission was generated by the transmission processing 17 6 17 6 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Event ID Error message Corrective action HEX 9 295 The Board WDT error had occurred 1271 296 The CLOCK STOP error had occurred i 1284 It might be failed CC Link Ver 2 board 297 Consult your local Mitsubishi representative 129s The Target Abort error had occurred on the PCI bus H 298 12A The Data Parity error had occurred on the PCI bus H 305 Change the setting of Power Options to Shift to the sleep or the hibernate was detected prevent the system from transitioning to sleep or hibernate DUMP Error description details oooO O value There was no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board 1281 Initialization of the EJ Duplicate IRQ or memory assignment Remove other option boards 5014 CC Link board There was no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board has failed 04h Handshaking with the shared memory area Restart If the error persists replace the 21h has failed board There was no
73. 6 Operating the Target settings screen sssssssssseseeneenenne nennen nnne nnns 9 18 9 2 7 Operating the Memory I O test screen sssssssssseseneenennenneneennennn nennen nennen 9 19 9 2 8 Operating the Test slosita ettet stint nihit nineteenth eene 9 20 9 3 Device Monitor Utility 2 2 ote ue t e o em oda eti RR 9 25 9 3 1 Operating procedure 2 nr e red Ut e o EI Eo e vae e EYE RES deteriora 9 25 9 3 2 Setting the batch monitoring ssssssseeeeeeeeeennnenneenneeneennnne nennen nnne enne nennen 9 26 9 3 3 Setting the 16 point register monitor ssssssseseeeneeneenenneeneeeneeneenene nene 9 27 9 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination sssseeeeneeneeeeneeeeeneee nennen 9 28 9 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored ssssssssssseseeeeeneneeeneeeneeennee eee 9 29 9 3 6 Changing word device values ssssssssseseseeeenenenneenneenneenene nennen nnne nnne nennen 9 30 9 3 7 Changing word device values continuously sssseeeeeeeneeeeeennee nee 9 31 9 3 8 Switching a bit device on off nnn 9 32 9 3 9 Switching the data 9 32 9 3710 Numerical Dad i e en e e t n ett d ne rt sedato aate own dtd 9 33 9 3 11 Other operations cecccceecccee
74. 7 16 4 3 POsitioning CONtrOl ne peu e net epe en ped Ue Deed e ee een 16 9 16 4 4 JOG operation control nennen nennen tent nenne nnns nennt nnn nennt nnne 16 11 16 5 Executing the Dat Llnk n ee e d ende eee adn eene attese 16 13 16 5 1 Checking the data link status sssssseeeneenennenene nennen nnnm 16 13 16 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program 16 15 17 1 Hardware Troubleshooting sssesssseeeeeneeneeeeneen nennen enne nnns 17 1 17 1 1 Verification of problem nnne entrent nnns 17 1 17 1 2 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing 17 3 17 1 3 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is not 17 4 17 1 4 List of messages of error events that may occur when starting the driver 17 6 17 2 Programming Troubleshooting esses eene 17 8 17 2 1 Error codes when executing functions ssssssseeeneeeneemeen enemies 17 8 17 3 CC Link System Troubleshooting sssssseseeeeeeeeeeeneen eene 17 18 17 3 1 Verification of problem 17 18 17 3 2 Troubleshooting flow when the
75. Build Directories Platform Show directories for Win32 M Library files Directories D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio WC98 LIB D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio WC98 MFC LIB D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 SDK v1 1 Lib isual C t Project Build Tools Window Help 2 Set Active Project KRIE To Project Source Control Dependencies Settings Alt F7 Export Makefile Insert Project into Workspace Project Settings Settings For wWin32 Debug 11 5 General Debug C C Link Resourci Category General Reset Output file name Debug Samplel exe Object library modules MdFunc32 lib Generate debug info all default libraries Link incrementally Generate mapfile Enable profiling Project Options MdFunc32 lib nologo subsystem windows incremental yes pdb Debug S ample pdb debug machine 385 out Debug Sample1 exe MELSEC 1 Start Visual C 5 0 or Visual C 6 0 and select Tools Options menu 2 Select the Directories tab set Show directories for to Library files and reference the folder containing the library file as in step 1 above MDFUNC32 LIB is stored in lt User specified folder gt lt COMMON gt lt LIB gt during installation 3 Open the workspace to create and select Project Settings menu EN Select the Link
76. Device Type Set the type and block network number of the device for which data is to be changed Set the head address of the device number to change data 2 Device No gt Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 3 Setting Data Set the data to be continuously changed HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal 4 Points Set the number of points to perform continuos change of data HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal WARNIN G Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 8 Switching a bit device on off The designated bit device can be switched on off as follows 1 Menu selection Select Device Write Bit device setting resetting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box Bit Device Set Device Type Device Type y output Block Network No DeviceNo HEX CDEC 0017 ES 1 Device Type Sets the type and block network number of the bit device to be turned on off Sets the number of the bit device to be turned on off 2 Device No Pee HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a seq
77. Do not dismantle or rebuild the board Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the board e Do not touch the terminal while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Not doing so may cause damage to the product e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Under tightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Over tightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any
78. ERR LED on the master station is flashing 17 25 17 3 3 List of link special SBS nennen 17 29 17 3 4 List of link special registers SWS eceecceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesieesieesieesieesieeteees 17 34 17 3 5 Error codes stored in the link special registers ssssseeeeee 17 42 17 4 Measures for WDT error 17 48 17 5 Precautions for installing other Optional DOA eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeas 17 49 17 6 Required Items when Making an Inquiry senem emen 17 50 Appendix 1 Comparisons with CC Link Ver 1 board and CC Link module App 1 Appendix 1 1 Differences from the CC Link Ver 1 Board App 1 Appendix 1 2 Functional comparisons with CC Link module sss App 4 Appendix 2 Replacing the CC Link Board eene nennen nnns App 5 Appendix 2 1 Replacing a CC Link Ver 1 Board with a CC Link Ver 2 App 5 Appendix 2 2 Replacing a CC Link Ver 2 Board with a CC Link Ver 1 Board or a CC Link Board with Another of the Same App 6 Appendix 2 3 Precautions
79. Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista Windows Server Visual Basic Visual C are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCBD2 B Q80BD BT11N SW1 U E MODEL 13JR77 SH NA 080527ENG N 1105 KWIX s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transa
80. Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 1X 2X2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 2 2 2 1 1 10 31 ms 1 When reading RX from the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors Refer to POINT in Section 5 2 for the processing time 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Local station programmable controller RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment
81. I 4 IRX40 to RX4F arc CI CT 00 YOF NANI ef ROO j 700 to YOE RX50 to RX5F Y10 to The data sent to the remote output RY of the standby master station by a sequence program is sent to the remote I O stations as output information d Standby master station input when the master station is down and the standby master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote output RY In at Remote I O station input RX Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 1 1 xoo to XOF YOOto Yor vm d idest LL Number of occupied stations 1 x10 to x1F i SCH SESE SS SSS oC seas IEEE 1 x00 to XOF YOOto YOF LOT e to T TECTUM JI Tr OUS To TO x10 to X1F The data shown in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or retained according to the Data link faulty station setting in network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Setting method The setting is performed at lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for details a Setting the master station 1 Set the Sta No and Type in lt lt Parameter settings gt gt Sta No 0 Type Master station 2 CC Link
82. Install the software package by following the installation procedure 5 Uninstall the software package 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 8 5 Checking the Board Status Hardware Test MELSEC The hardware test checks whether or not board works properly by itself Always perform this hardware test before configuring the system Execute the hardware test according to the following procedure Connect the terminal resistor supplied with the CC Link Ver 2 board between the DA and DB terminals of the CC Link Ver 2 board Perform the hardware test on the test screen of CC Link Ver 2 Utility Refer to Section 9 2 8 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 6 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cable This section explains the cable connection in the CC Link system IMPORTANT 1 Be sure to turn off the power to the corresponding station before attaching and removing a terminal block If the terminal block is attached or removed without turning off the power to the corresponding station normal data transfer will not be guaranteed 2 The CC Link dedicated cables the high performance CC Link dedicated cables and Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables cannot be used together If they are used together normal data transfer will not be guaranteed 3 Always ground the SLD terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board and the personal computer to the protective ground
83. Link Ver 2 board i occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations controller CPU 1 Remote inputRX Remote output RY RXOF to RX00 RYOF to RYOO gt Program RX1D to RX10 RY1D to RY10 RY2F to RY20 to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RX3F to RX30 m Recsive RX4E to RA RX5F to RX50 RY5F to RY50 RX6F to RX60 1 RY6F to RY60 RX7F to RX70 RY7F to RY70 RX8F to RX80 i RY8F to RY80 Nd i The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master station and the local stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC On off information from the master station to the local stations 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory of the master station 7 The information in the remote output RY buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of each of the local stations 8 The input status stored in the buffer memory remote input RX is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters IBM PC AT compatible PC Program RYSF to RY50 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX1D to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 R
84. MELSEC 6 4 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station 14 Ver 2 compatible slave station number 3 Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station Master station QJ61BT11N Remote I O Remote I O Q80BD Ver 2 compatible station station occupies occupies occupies station 1 station 1 station 4 stations 1 J61BT11N remote device i Standby mastersiaionNe 7 Delay information setting WDT setting 250 x 8 ms Station information All connect count en eee settings Station information eee Station information setting items Setting item Setting value No Sta No ee qo Station type Intelligent buffer select word 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to dec
85. MODE Mode select switch N 0 Nomal mode CON P CON MITSUBISHI Cun 13 4 13 4 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 13 1 4 Creating a Program MELSEC Create the digital value setting program for performing the initial setting and outputting analog values for remote device stations The following illustrates the relation between the remote device station s I O operations and the user program when controlling the remote device station and how the digital value settings for the initial setting and analog outputs controls the system The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Default values are used for the initial settings except the analog output Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC User program mdReceive 13 5 enable disable setting Remote device station station No 1 X18 initial data processing request flag X19 initial data setting completion flag X1B remote READY Y00 CH1 analogue output enable flag Y18 initial data processing completion flag Remote registers RWw Y19 initial data setting request flag RWw0 CH1 digital value setting area RWw 8 analogue output enable disable setting area po 13 5 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION User Program
86. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Display Resolution 800 X 600 dot or higher Recommended 1024 X 768 dot Available hard disk space 80MB or more Disk drive CD ROM disk drive Microsoft Visual Basic 5 0 Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual Basic NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Programming language Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic English version Microsoft Visual 5 0 Microsoft Visual C 6 0 Microsoft Visual NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 1 64 bit version is not supported 2 User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment a Applicable operating system and the corresponding required personal computer performance Required memory Windows NT Pentium 133MHz or higher 32MB or more Windows 2000 Pentium 133MHz or higher 64MB or more Operating system Windows XP Pentium 550 2 or higher b Instructions for personal computer 1 PCI standard Using a personal computer not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express standard may result in a problem due to poor electrical contact erroneous operation etc For details on the number of boards that can be installed installati
87. Not requested ON Requested Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008 580008 Line test request The execution result of the request is stored to SWO004D 5E0n b8 OFF Not requested ON Requested Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system Parameter configuration information read The execution result of the request is stored to SW004F request OFF Normal ON Abnormal Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in case the standby master station becomes faulty OFF Not requested ON Requested x2 Can be used for the standby master station only SB0002 bEOn b2 580004 Temporary error 5E0u b4 invalid request SB0005 bEOn b5 SB0009 bEOn b9 SBOO0C Forced master 5E0n b12 switching 17 29 17 29 17 TROUBLESHOOTING SBOO0D 5E0n b13 SB0020 5E2n B0040 5E4n SB0041 5E4n b1 SB0042 5E4n b2 SB0043 5E4n b3 580045 5 4 b5 580046 5 4 06 580048 5E4n b8 580049 5E4n b9 SB004A bE4u b10 SB004B BE4u b11 SB004C 5 4 b12 MELSEC Table 17 6 List of link special relays SBs 2 5 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction Board status Data link restart acceptance Data link restart complete Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at
88. OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been acknowledged OFF Not acknowledged ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure OFF Not executed ON Being executed Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure execution OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates the mode setting status of the host OFF Online ON Other than online Indicates the station type of the host OFF Master station station number 0 ON Local station station numbers 1 to 64 Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for the host OFF No setting ON Setting exists Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the host OFF Clear ON Hold 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only 17 31 17 31 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 6 List of link special relays SBs 4 5 cel ERE x Not available Number Name Description Online station station Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations Number of occupied station 580066 580067 gt Number of host occupied stations SB0067 5E6n b7 Indicates the setting status of the host
89. Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold Automatic reconnection 10 master station No ooo wo 0 5 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms pa se 13 All connect count 1 Modules Table 13 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 55 cyclic Sta station points station select Other settings Occupies dq T S 7 eu uuu 13 3 13 3 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 1 3 Setting up the remote device station The following shows the remote device station s switch settings AJ6SVBTCU 68DAV CON A IL 1 con K B SEL _ FOAER set 2 UP E j 8 L RUNI 3 Ls DOWN L ERRI Station number setting switch sw1 O Transmission speed setting switch m TEST 4 1 g 0 19 HE 5 70 20 2 0 40 Station Eg number 1 l lt 9 6 0 ZI 0 9 7 156kbps E Ge 8 2 J
90. Policies Audit Policy T User Rights Assigr Security Options 08 Windows Firewall wit 1 Public Key Policies 7 Software Restriction F B P Security Policies or Policy E Network security LDAP client signing requirements E Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC clients Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC servers Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives and all folders E Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to log on Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile E System cryptography Force strong key protection for user keys stored on the computer System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption hashing and signing System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows subsystems System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal system objects e g Symbolic Links System settings Optional subsystems E System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executables for Software Restriction Policies User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built in Administrator account O User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for _ Prompt for credentials E User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for standard users Security Setti
91. RWAF RWw20 RWr20 i RWr20 4 n LES Se 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 2 5 Executing the data link 14 14 Turn ON the local stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status Refer to Section 14 1 5 1 a Checking the master station and local stations for how to check the operation status of the master station and local stations Ver 1 intelligent device stations Ver 2 intelligent device stations under normal data link condition Confirming the operation with a user program With a user program check whether the data link is performed correctly or not by transferring data between the master station and the local stations Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the system configuration shown on the next page Execute user program of the local station Sta No 1 and 5 within 10 minutes after an user program of the master station has been loaded When the remote output RY80 3 is turned ON the remote input RX80 1 and the remote output RY80 2 turns ON When the remote output RYO 4 is turned ON the remote input 5 and 6 turn ON When a value is set to the remote register RWw10 9 the value is written to the remote regist
92. Read points 16 1 ej X 1 067 SL ms LS Link scan time Refer to Section 5 1 BC Constant 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 8c ee 0 SL Local station s sequence program scan time 1 Round up decimals 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC b Write OT LS X BC Write points 16 72 X 1 067 SL ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium Il 233MHz Batch read mdReceive Batch write mdSend LS Link scan time Refer to Section 5 1 BC Constant Transmission speed 10Mbps ppm pese pope SL Local station s sequence program scan time x1 Round up decimals When performing a transient transmission using the md functions the transient transmission is executed in several runs by dividing the number of request data into sizes inside the md functions that can be received by the opposite station In addition after the communication line is opened the first md function performs extra transient transmission in order to obtain detailed information of the programmable controller 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 3 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device station 1 Master station CC Link
93. SB0095 tect iiie laret uitis 17 33 Max link scan time SW006D 17 37 Maximum number of link points 3 2 Maximum overall cable distance 3 4 Index 2 Measures for WDT error occurrence N O P MELSEC Data Link Library Memory I O Test Mode Selection Method Mode selection according to the system 1 7 Mode settings eene 8 32 Mode setting status SWO0060 17 36 Mounting and removing the terminal block 8 4 Multiple CPU system support 4 37 Multiple temporary error invalid station specification 5 0003 17 34 Network test sssseeeeee 9 24 Notes on the system configuration 2 7 Number of occupied stations 3 2 Number of connected stations 3 2 Number of link points per link 3 2 No of retries information SW0064 17 36 Numerical pad metes 9 33 Online operation screen 9 15 Operation indicator LED 8 5 Operating the Utility Software Starting a utility sessesess 9 1 Quitting a utility sss 9 3 Other station data link status 580080
94. Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as positioning complete RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 Remote input RX RYOF to RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 i to RY30 mdSend NENNEN RY4E to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY6O RY7F to RY70 RY8F to RY80 Program to RY7FF to RY7FO Remote output RY when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name RYO1 to RYOF Use prohibited RY10 Single axis positioning start RY11 Dual axis positioning start RY12 Use prohibited RY13 Single axis stop RY14 Dual axis stop 4 FUNCTION Ss aA MELSEC Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the sending data to the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device station FCAT compatible PC aa M aster station pe Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board i Station number 1 occupies 4 stations O Remote register RWw ss postion stat i as positioning start number RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 Remote register RWw A Program mdSend RWw4 RWw5 i RWw6 n RWw7
95. Switch setting status OFF Normal Setting error exists the error code is stored in SW006A Indicates the parameter setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored SW0068 Indicates the host data link operation status OFF Being executed ON Not executed Indicates the data link status OFF Data link control by the master station ON Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present OFF Not present ON Present Indicates the scan mode setting information OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when the CPU is down OFF Stop ON Continue Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0074 to SWO0077 Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0078 to SWO007B Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting OFF No setting ON Setting exists information is stored in SW007C to SWO007F Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station OFF Reception complete ON Reception not complete Master station etm Indicates whether the Type setting of the host operates is set to SB0079 specification Master station or Master st
96. System Windows XP Generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System and Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Windows Vista Generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Windows 7 Generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Windows Server 2003 R2 Abbreviation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Operating System Windows Server 2008 Abbreviation for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System Windows Server Generic term of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Operating System and Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System Windows Generic term for Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows Server Generic term for A0J2HCPU A1SCPU A1SCPU S1 ATSCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 ATSJHCPU A1SJHCPU S8 ATNCPU A2CCPU A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 AS3NCPU and A1FX AnACPU
97. Table 4 1 List of the basic functions I O station I O station device station numeric data with remote device station Communication with local Performs the communication of on off information and Section 4 2 3 station numeric data with local station E Communication with Performs communication with intelligent device station via intelligent device station cyclic transmission and transient transmission Section 4 2 4 2 Table 4 2 lists the functions for improving system reliability Table 4 2 List of the functions for improving system reliability Item Description Reference section Disconnects modules that cannot continue data link because Slave station disconnect Rincon of power off etc and continues the data link with only the Section 4 3 1 normal modules When a module which has been disconnected from data link Auto return function because of power off etc returns to the normal status it Section 4 3 2 automatically joins the data link Sets the status clear latch of the input reception data from Input data status setting i a station that became data link faulty because of power off Section 4 3 3 from data link faulty station etc Continues data link by switching to the standby master station Standby master function i 9 y Section 4 3 4 when a problem occurs in the master station 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 3 Table 4 3 lists the useful functions Table 4 3 List of the useful funct
98. This section explains the master station setting 12 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section 1 1 RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF IOF 2 OFF LEES i Ba qr 1 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 Other settings 5 Operational settings y Sta No Type 0 Master station Expanded cycle Retry count i 3 Transmission rate 156kbps Occupied Sta mu 4 Mode Remote nat Ver 1 mode c Input for En Sta E Automatic reconnection station count FEE ENS Default lation information settings Standby master station No 0 1 faul 1 3 All connect count 2 Delay information setin 0 5 50 ec No Sta No i 7 y g 3 50 micros 14
99. UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC c Line test Software This test is used to check the connection with all modules of station No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected station with parameters set and the data link being performed 1 The Line test Software is executable only when the data link status of the CC Link Ver 2 board is In data link or During Auto Returning 2 Use Station Specification on the Circuit test screen for any of the error stations detected in the All stations 1 to 64 test Operation Procedure After selecting Line test Software in the Test item click the Start button The line test screen appears Line test screen Line test C Selected station Description 1 All stations 1 64 Select this when performing the line test on all stations 2 Selected station Select this when performing the line test on a single station Setting range 1 to 64 3 button Executes the test 4 button Cancels the test Line test result screen For All stations 1 64 only 5 Each station information nang 6 gt Test result Normal It completed successfully Error code Ox W Eror 7 Display when 4 stations are connected Displays the information of each station SEACA White Normal station Red Error station 6 Test result Displays the status of each station In the event of an error the error code is displayed 7 button Cl
100. Ver 2 board Intelligent device station The following formula indicates the time taken from instruction execution at the master station CC Link Ver 2 board to receive processing result from the intelligent device station Formula Maximum value a Read OT LS X BC Read points 16 16 1 1 067 ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium II 233MHz 8888 zoe sues 1024 tyes Balch read mdRecelve Batch write mdSend LS Link scan time Refer to Section 5 1 BC Constant Transmission speed 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps sace ar ze pow urge dee 1 Round up decimals b Write i OT LS X BC Write points 16 72 11 1 13 ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium II 233MHz md function 2bytes 512 bytes 1024 bytes Batch read mdReceive Batch write mdSend LS Link scan time Refer to Section 5 1 BC Constant HEC ee ee ee CIE
101. Visual C 6 0 do not define the buffer to be used by mdReceive in static The mdClose function must be executed at the end process of the user program Ending the user program without executing the mdClose function may have effects on the user program which uses other MELSEC data link library CC Link Ver 2 utility device monitor utility and Mitsubishi software packages MX Component The execution speed and the execution interval of the MELSEC data link function may be extended temporarily by Windows processes or other applications Create programs considering these conditions 11 11 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 5 Channels The MELSEC Data Link Library uses the following channels These channels are used when communicating via the CC Link Ver 2 board They are set with the BD No DIP switches on the back of 81 to 84 the CC Link Ver 2 board 1st to 4th boards The channels are set as follows according to the SW1 SW2 settings 81 Off Off 82 On Off 83 Off On 84 On On 11 6 Station Number Settings The following is a list of station numbers that are designated by the functions Station number designation Own station 255 FFn CC Link Other station 1 2 Network No 0 When CC Link is used 1 Station No or group No 0 to 63 3F x other station lt How to specify the logical station number gt Set 0 to the upper byte network No of
102. all station TON specification and group number specification and group number specification 18 Remote designation error 49 SEND RECV channel number error FFED The channel number designated with the SEND RECV Check the designated channel number function is out of range An error occurred in the gethostbyname function HOSTS file FFE8u A timeout error occurred in the select function the server machine Error occurred in sendto FFE7H An error occurred in the sendto function FFE6x An error occurred in the recvfrom function Check if normal Ethernet communication can be 4 An abnormal response was received FFE3x Too much data was received 2 The received sequence number is abnormal performed with the server machine 31 DLL load error 1 fe to load a DLL required to execute functions has Set up the utility software again ailed Retry Memory may be insufficient Close all other 32 Another task thread is occupying the resource and the applications that are currently running FFEOn resource is not released within 30 seconds Check if the system is operating normally Restart the system Exit the program and restart the personal computer FFDFu The setting for the communication destination is invalid Check if the communication destination is correctly set FFDEH An attempt to open the registry has failed by the utility FFDDu An attempt to
103. automatic update buffer size settings refer to Section 6 1 Communication example using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 first module CPU Buffer memory 1 Automatic RIFR Automatic Automatic update update 2 update buffer buffer for memory the first module 1 Data are written to the automatic update buffer of the 1st module 2 The automatic update buffer data are transferred between the AJ65BT R2 and CC Link Ver 2 board by the link scan 3 The data is read from the automatic update buffer for the 1st module For details on the automatic update timing refer to AUJ65BT R2 Type RS 232C Interface Module User s Manual App 29 App 29 APPENDIX 8 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY When the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of points indicated below is used a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address co
104. being output to remote device stations through normal data link Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For the sample program refer to Section 11 9 On the sample program setting a digital value of 300 enables analog voltages to be output from remote device stations Analogue output of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV CH1 Digital output value Digital value 300 Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor The analog value corresponding to AJ65VBTCU 68DAV Lj e the digital value of 300 is output Remote device station station No 1 Occupies 3 stations Analog output 13 9 13 9 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 2 mode or in the remote net additional mode 13 2 1 Configuring the system In this system 2 remote device stations shall be connected Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1 compatible remote device station station No 1 Occupies 3 stations Ver 2 compatible remote device st
105. board Restart the personal computer Take the measures for WDT error occurrence Refer to Section 17 4 17 15 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 1 Procedures and sample program for increasing the minimum working set area of the PC The following provides measures for increasing the minimum working set area of the PC when an error of error code 77 occurs due to MD function execution and its sample program The PC board driver runs using the minimum working set area in the memory area reserved in the user program Some user program may use a large area of the minimum working set area In such a case when the minimum working set area for the PC board driver cannot be reserved an error code 77 is returned If this situation occurs increase the minimum working set area in the user program before executing the MD function See the following sample program The minimum working set area of 200KB is reserved at startup of the personal computer Sample program This section gives a processing overview for setting a greater size to the minimum working set and provides sample programs a Processing overview of sample program 1 Obtain the user program ID by the GetCurrentProcessld function 2 Using the ID obtained in step 1 obtain the user program handle by the OpenProcess function 3 The current minimum and maximum working set sizes can be obtained by executing the GetProcessWorkingSetSize function 4 Seta size greater than the mini
106. bus slot 1 or 4 stations A1SJ61BT11 Master local module for Q series AJ61BT11 Master local module for AnS series Master local module A1SJ61QBT11 Master local module for A series Master stanon 1 to 4 stations or local station AJ61QBT11 Master local module for Q2AS series QJ61BT11 N Master local module for QnA series x1 For the versions other than below only one station or four stations can be set QJ61BT11 Functional version B or later A1SJ61BT11 Hardware version G or later AJ61BT11 Hardware version F or later A1SJ61QBT11 Hardware version G or later AJ61QBT11 Hardware version F or later Refer to the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org for the partner manufacturer product 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 2 4 CC Link version Du fig SLD qc There are two types of CC Link version i e Ver 1 and Ver 2 1 Definition of Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 A product with a cable length of 20cm or longer between stations which has been achieved by improving the restriction on the conventional cable distance between the stations is defined as Ver 1 10 Whereas the conventional product is defined as Ver 1 00 For the maximum total cable length for the Ver 1 10 products refer to Section 3 2 2 The conditions requiring the cable length to be 20cm or longer between stations are as follows 1 All the stations co
107. cable First loosen the screws where the cable is connected to the board and then remove the cable Pulling the cable that is connected to the board may cause damage to the board and cable or malfunction due to bad cable contacts e Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube e Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed e Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure e Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws within a tightening torque range 0 59 to 0 88N m Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal START UP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e
108. cannot be set for 8 remote station points Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station 1 station 1 station Occupies 1 station Cannot be set to 8 point output module 8 point output modul 1 1 1 i l 17 4 c Refer to Section 9 2 5 for parameter setting Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for setting details 1 Precautions for remote I O station points setting Set the points not less than I O points of the actually installed remote I O station with the parameter Otherwise the I O operations corresponding to the exceeded points will not function normally 4 38 4 38 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 7 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode This function increases the number of cyclic points in the CC Link system When increasing the number of cyclic points select one from the following two modes Remote net ver 2 Mode used for configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Mode used for incorporating an additional Ver 2 compatible slave station into the existing Ver 1 system The number of cyclic points per
109. check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 16 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item Channel No 812 Channel No 82 1 Channel No ChannetNo 83 Channel No 84 Sta No Type Local station Standby master station Ci56kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net a mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic cyclic singe double quadruple octuple double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Input for Err Sta Hold KClear gt s Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection 3 station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 11 Delay information setting 12 WDT setting 250 X 8 ms ei la 13 All connect count 1 Modules Table 16 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station tyoe Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word b yp cyclic Sta station points station select Other settings Occupies 14 1 Intelligent device station 128 points No setting Eo o E LLL LLL LLL 16 3 16 3 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 3 Setting up the intelligent device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The settings of the intelligen
110. each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 2 stations Master station Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as initial data processing request flag RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as initial data processing request flag RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 Signal direction AJ6E5BT 64DAV Master module Device No RX1A 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Remote output 4 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RX buffer memory 5 The remote output RY is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations terre ey Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 2 stations X m Remote input RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station i Program Remote output Remote input RY
111. explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and intelligent device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on the intelligent device stations refer to the RS 232C Interface Module type AJ65BT R2 User s Manual 15 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and one intelligent device station AJ65BT R2 as shown below is used Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 1 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJ65BT R2 c ooo co RS 232C module Terminal resistor External device 15 1 15 1 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 2 Setting the Master Station The following shows the master station setting 15 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section di OO S0 RD Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF 2 OFF 2 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other
112. for programmable HEN OU CPU STOP Automatic CC Link Automatic CC Linkstartup rat ns So 9 Remote VO staton poins seirg lon o seting to tre reserved saron os o O Supported X Not supported x1 This function is newly provided to the CC Link Ver 2 board in addition to the CC Link Ver 1 board functions App 4 App 4 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 2 Replacing the CC Link Board This appendix describes the CC Link board replacement procedure and precautions Appendix 2 1 Replacing a CC Link Ver 1 Board with a CC Link Ver 2 Board This section describes how to replace the CC Link Ver 1 board currently mounted to the PC with a CC Link Ver 2 board and precautions to be observed Step numbers 1 to 5 in the chart correspond to 1 to 5 in the figure below START Backing up parameters 1 Insert the SWnDNC CCDB2 B into the CD ROM drive on the PC 2 Activate the Parameter backup restoration tool and back up the current parameters Refer to Appendix 3 1 1 1 Save to file Refer to Appendix 3 1 2 Uninstall the software package for the CC Link Ver 1 board Refer to section 8 4 4 Removing the CC Link Ver 1 board currently in use 3 Turn OFF the PC and remove the CC Link Ver 1 board from the PC Mounting the new CC Link Ver 2 board 4 Set the CC Link Ver 2 board switches and mount the CC Link Ver 2 board to the PC Refer to section 8 3 R
113. i i i i to 1 to 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX 6 7 7 8 Send area to Receive area Linkscan gt Receive area froi X local station No Link scan master station master station Automatic refresp 6 Im E 111 1 8 1 4 Send area to 7 Receive area froi 7 Receive area froi x V local station No Link scan master station master station Automatic refresh 1 to to 1 to 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 i 1 1 Remote register Remote register Remote register RWw RWr i RWr i 10 10 1 1 dSend Send area to Receive area froi Receive area froi rare local station No master station master station Automatic refres 9 BH I 11 11 1 dSend Send area to 10 Receive area fro Receive area fro masen write gt local station No Link scan_ gt master station Linkscan gt master station LAutomatic refres D i i i to to 1 to 1 1 1 Remote register Remote register 44 l RYE RWW i 15 dRecei focal sation No Kink scan station number Jf Link scar ccr stes No dic ddl 14 local station No Ny Number local station f Automatic refres p a 1 12 LL cecar Jason mis mdReceive local station No K Linkscan station number JXAutomatic refres D j ON i send area f to i to 1 1 1
114. input RX output RY input RX output RY Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 J X00 to XOF YOOto YOF Pen PIT L Number of occupied stations 1 X10 to X1F YIQtoYIF 1 opo 4 1 1 RX40to RX4F RY40to RY4F RX40ioRX4F RY40 to RY4F 55 5 x00 to XOF YOOto YOF pM boue ERELCSCUVCIO _____________________________ ee C x10 to x1F Y10to Y1F The remote I O station data sent to the remote output RY of the standby master station is being used by the standby master station as the input information when the standby station operates as a local station thus it does not need to be transferred to another device 4 FUNCTIONS Master station Remote Master station Remote MELSEC c Standby master station output when the master station is down and the standby master station is controlling the data link tandby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote i output RY 1 1 input RX RX00 to RXOF IRX10 to RX1F IRX20 to RX2F Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 1 1 YOOtoYOF cue oe 917 4 Number of occupied stations 1 RX30to RX3F i yit yir NR IE SD
115. is displayed Install Hardware Device Drivers ae i p p software program that enables a hardware device to work with ey Select Search for a suitable driver for my device This wizard will complete the installation for this device recommended and click the button 2 Network Controller device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that choose a specific cae 1 2 Select Specify a location and click the button Locate Driver Files So Where do you want Windows to search for driver files e Search for driver files for the following hardware device Network Controller The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations T Floppy disk drives CD ROM drives 3 Specify Drivers Win2000 of the CD ROM drive to be used Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive for Copy manufacturer s files from selected and then click OK pesar Example D Drivers Win2000 Clic
116. is performed at lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 4 2 Powering off a station in operation without detecting an error error invalid station setting function By setting network parameter this function prevents any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that is powered off in the system configuration from being treated as a data link faulty station by the master and local stations Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station problems occurring in that station can no longer be detected In addition the error invalid station settings cannot be changed while online because they are set with network parameters Stations to be set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station Station number 1 Remote station occupies 2 stations Station number 3 Remote station occupies 1 station This station does not become data link faulty Station number 4 Local station occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations Station number 5 Remote station occupies 2 stations Master Local station Local station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remo
117. is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 4 RY size 1 18H The higher 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 4 RY however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 1 RWw offset 4400H Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RWw 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 3 RWw offset Station No 3 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory size of station No 3 RWw Station No 4 RWw offset 4440H Head buffer memory address of station No 4 RWw Station No 4 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory size of station No 4 RWw Station No 1 RWr offset 4CO00H Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RWr Station No 1 RWr size 64 40H 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 4 RWr size 0 Default Buffer memory size of station No 4 RWr App 28 App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC 6 Random access buffer The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission 7 Automatic update buffer The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing transient transmission communication using the automatic update buffer with the AJ65BT R2 Set the automatic update buffer size for the AJ65BT R2 in the Parameter settings of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility For more details on the
118. modified 11 2 2006 9 54 11 2 2006 9 53 PM 11 2 2006 9 54 PM 9 4 2007 11 45 AM 11 2 2006 9 54 PM 11 2 2006 9 56 11 2 2006 9 53 PM 11 2 2006 9 55 PM 11 2 2006 9 53 PM 11 2 2006 9 53 PM 11 2 2006 9 53 PM 11 2 2006 9 54 PM 11 2 2006 9 53 PM MH computer Management Me fj Data Sources ODBC Pictures fll Event Viewer B Music Internet Information Services US Manager More F iSCSI Initiator Folders Local Security Policy fxg Memory Diagnostics Tool fam Print Management B Reliability and Performance Monitor Public Computer amp Network Bi Control Panel y Administrative Tools fs AutoPlay Vp Backup and Restore Default Programs Ease of Access Cente 1A Fonts ah Services System Configuration amp Task Scheduler P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 13 items I File Action View Help B Security Settings Name Description Account Policies gt Local Policies 1 Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec gt E Public Key Policies 1 Software Restriction Policies IP Security Policies on Local Compute Account Policies Password and account lockout policies 7 Windows Firewall with Adv Windows Firewall with Advanced Security J Public Key Policies 1 Software Restriction Policies WP Security Policies on Local Internet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio core Py
119. oiea Il Station No 0 I Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 CC Link Terminal resistor Terminal resistor Standby master station Master station Control Standby Control Standby Master local Pile ey stenting L System E 5 system interface board Standby E Control system EI fell E BI system Station No 1 N Tracking cable Station No 0 2 CC Link Terminal resistor Terminal resistor App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Create a program to monitor which system in the redundant CPU system is accessed from the CC Link Ver 2 board Control system judgment flag sytem 6120 occurence Sym ttem Standby system system 6120 occurrence System not determined system judgment flag e Indicates the CPU module operation status e Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system is running 3 Retry processing for error that will occur during system switching pr
120. read from the registry has failed 17 13 17 13 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Retur value Error description Corrective action HEX 36 Registry write error FFDCu An attempt to write to the registry has failed Retry Communication initialization setting error Memory may be insufficient Close all other An attempt to perform initial setting for communication has applications that are currently running failed Check if the system is operating normally Restart the system 38 Ethernet communication error Retry FFDAn An attempt to set an Ethernet communication has failed Check if the communication destination is correctly set by the utility Memory may be insufficient Close all other applications that are currently running Check if the system is operating normally Restart the system 37 39 COM communication setting error FFD9n An attempt to set a COM communication has failed COM control error Control cannot be performed properly in COM Retry FFD7u DUE communication Check if the system is operating normally 42 Close error Restart the system FFD6x Communication cannot be closed ROM operation error A TC setting value was written to the CPU during ROM Change the TC setting value during RAM operation operation A 5 Retry Check if the communication destination is correctly set by the utility Memory may be insufficient Close all other applic
121. remote I O station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of all stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Ch
122. response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board DUMP value Value of the first 1 byte in the detailed data description area 1 When this event error occurs on the event viewer of the operating system refer to Section 2 2 1 change the BIOS Setup setting as follows and reboot the PC BIOS Setup items Plug amp Play O S YES No Reset Configuration Data No YES 2 This event error may occur when the PCI bus controller is not functioning correctly This error may also occur if the USB driver is not functioning correctly In this case reinstall the USB driver and make sure that it functions correctly 17 7 17 7 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 2 Programming Troubleshooting 17 2 1 Error codes when executing functions When an error occurs during the execution of a function the error code that is returned will be used as a return value The table 17 4 lists the error description and corrective actions to take for each of the return values Table 17 4 List of error codes when executing functions Return ae ee not started The driver has not been started Correct the error occurred when starting the driver The same interrupt number and I O address as those of Check the board settings another board are used Board response error Review the operation status and board loading A timeout has occurred while waiting for a response to the conditions of the access station co
123. set by Regional and Language Options Windows Touch Windows XP Mode Windows Touch ndby hibernate mode is set the dialog box appears and automatically changes the settings When exiting 2 Number A maximu the operating system always shut down the computer of boards that can be used in one system m of 4 boards can be used Using the CC Link Ver 2 board and the CC Link Ver 1 board in the same computer is not allowed 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration 1 Combinations of master and standby master stations The following table shows the combination availability for the master station and standby master station in the system configuration QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 M Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 mode Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 aster station Mode mode Mode mode Mode Mode ver2moce o x x x x x x x Standby master station Q80BD J61BT11N A80BD J61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 A80BD J61BT13 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 O Available x Not available 2 Incorporating the CC Link Ver 1 board into the CC Link Ver 2 network system Use any of the following software versions to utilize the CC Link Ver 1 board at a local station when the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode e ABOBDE J61BT141 Version or later e ABOBDE J61BT 13 Version Y or later Refer to
124. size designation 2H reception area head address designation 1 i i 3H reception area size designation 102H word byte unit designation 111H reception end data size designation 112H reception timeout time designation 11AH transmission timeout time designation 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 15 5 15 5 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Writes the initial setting values for transmission reception to the buffer memory on the AJ65BT R2 Arguments to be set Word byte unit designation 0 Transmission area head address designation 200H Transmission area size designation 200H Reception area head address designation 400H Reception area size designation 200H Transmission timeout time designation 0 2 Turns ON the initialization request signal RY4 3 Turns ON the initialization request signal RY4 of the AJ65BT R2 4 If the initialization of the AJ65BT R2 is normal 5 Reads out the initialization normal complete signal the initialization normal complete signal RX4 RX4 turns ON If not the initialization error complete signal RX5 turns ON 6 With the initialization normal complete signal RX4 7 Turns OFF the initialization requ
125. standby master switching Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching Data link stop acceptance Data link stop complete Forced master switching executable status Temporary error invalid acceptance status Temporary error invalid complete status Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status Temporary error invalid canceling complete status Line test acceptance status Availability O Available x Not available Master Local Offline station station oe Description Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the initialization procedure registration While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and remote registers stops OFF Not instructed ON _ Instructed Indicates the buffer access status OFF Normal ON Abnormal Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Startup instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Startup complete Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master switching have been acknowledged OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master switching is complete OFF Not executed ON Switching complete Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowl
126. station and local station Remote station A remote station that can only handle bit information AJ65BTBO OO AJ65BTCO O0 Remote device station Remote station that can use bit data and word data Performs input and output with external devices and analog data conversion AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Remote station Generic term for the remote I O station and remote device station Intelligent device station A slave station such as the AJ65BT R2 in the CC Link system that can perform transient transmission Slave station Generic term for remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Ver 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 2 mode Master and local modules Generic term for the AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11 Master module Generic term when the AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11 are used as master stations Local module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations Remote module Generic term for AJOBBTBLI LILI AJeSBTC A852GOT etc 10 AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Intelligent module Generic term fo
127. station s 1 m 3 28 ft or longer 2 m 6 56 ft or longer Transmission Maximum length of main line Terminal 1 The cable length of 1 m 3 28 ft or longer is for a system configured only with remote I O stations and remote device stations 2 The cable length of 2 m 6 56 ft or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent device stations Maximum length of main line not including the branch line length Terminal resistor Distance between T branches resistor Lenght of branch line 8 m 26 25 ft or shorter Lenght of branch line 8 m 26 25 ft or shorter Indicates a remote I O station or a remote device station Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 8 Utility Software Settings This section explains the settings required for the CC Link Ver 2 board 8 8 1 Station number setting The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station local station standby master station remote station and intelligent device station For details on the station number settings refer to Section 9 2 3 Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions 1 Assign sequential station numbers Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are connected For a module occupying
128. status SB0094 17 33 Transient transmission status SW0094 17 39 Transmission delay time 5 1 Transmission rate 3 4 Transmission rate settings 8 32 Troubleshooting 17 1 17 18 U Uninstalling the software package 8 22 V Verification of problem occurrence 17 1 17 18 Ver 1 compatible slave station A 19 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX App 30 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY App 30 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw and met tmi IDA App 32 Ver 2 compatible slave station A 19 IW Weight nettement Um md 3 2 Whether send receive of cyclic data is enabled Of NOt r 4 45 Warning Message Appears on Windows PPE Pee bsc torr tere Mou eerie Ore ter er App 38 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses
129. status of the master station a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows ON 1 if The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally re O No error has occurred gt 0 lt Data are being transmitted Data are being received b Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information on the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Channel No 81 Sta No DU Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 156kbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status Noma E Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type Q80BDJ61BT11N Product information 070310000000000 B IRQ No 21 ROM version 14 Memory FEAS0000 FEAFFFFFH 1 0 port D800 D8FFH Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 22 Min 14 Current 14 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally OFF No error has occurred 15 9 15 9 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 2 LED displays of the intelligent device station Be sure that the LED displays show the following status 24 V DC is being supplied
130. the RD LED lit YES Is the communication cable wired correctly Is the supplied NO voltage within the specified range YES Set the supplied voltage within the specified range Corresponding module failure NO Correct the communication cable wiring YES Corresponding module failure 2 3 x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 17 25 17 25 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the L RUN LED lit NO MELSEC 3 Is the SD LED lit flashing Is the SD LED lit YES Corresponding module failure Are the station No switches set correctly Isnt the station No duplicated Corresponding module failure Station No switch y Is the transmission rate set correctly YES Set the correct transmission rate y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Is the communication cable wired correctly 1 YES y Wire the communication cable ren Corresponding module failure Transmission speed switch Set the correct station No Y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Complete x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance be
131. the file register capacity setting error B815 Module mode setting error B901 EPROM error Data link startup error B902 with E PPROM parameters B903 Transient request error B904 Communication buffer Size setting error B905 Transient data length error BA19 Corresponding station error 17 46 A transient transmission was executed even though the target station was set in the I O mode When a parameter registration request YnA to E7PROM was executed the E PROM was faulty or the write limit 10 000 times was exceeded A data link startup request Yn8 using an E PROM parameter was executed even though the parameter has not been registered in the E7PROM A transient request was issued to a station that has not allocated a communication buffer area The communication buffer size of the corresponding station was out of range when a dedicated instruction was executed The transient data was longer than the communication buffer size of the corresponding station when a dedicated instruction was executed The corresponding station that is being tested stopped communication during line test Change it to the intelligent mode Replace the module Register the parameter to E PROM with a parameter registration request YnA Allocate a communication buffer area with a parameter Set the communication buffer size of the corresponding station within the range Make the communication buffer size of the cor
132. the master station and the intelligent device station by transient transmission The transient transmission is a transmission method that sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by designating an opposite station at an arbitrary timing When writing data to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station using the mdSend function 1 The program uses the mdSend function to write data from the master station to the designated buffer memory of the intelligent device station 2 When writing is completed 0 is stored as a return value IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Program 1 mdSend 7 Buffer memory Return value When reading data from the buffer memory of the intelligent device station using the mdReceive function 1 The program uses the mdReceive function to read data from the designated buffer memory of the intelligent device station to the variables of the program in the master station 2 When reading is completed 0 is stored as a return value IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Buffer memory Program mdReceive Value return value 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability This section explains how to use the functions for improving the reliability of the CC Link system 4 3 1 Di
133. the word device to be changed 2 When the following Data Changing dialog box appears set a desired value and then click the button Data Changing Device Ww 0017 C HEX amp DEC 123 When the display format is 32 bit Data changing 32 bit is displayed on the title 3 Select in the dialog box shown below to change the word device Select to cancel the change operation Device Monitor Utility Change the device Ww 0017 to 123 All right Yes NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 2 Bit device The following explains how to switch the bit device on off Note that this operation is enabled only when the data format is Vertical Indication 1 Double click the number of the bit device to be changed 2 Select in the dialog box shown below to change the bit device status Select to cancel the change operation Device Monitor Utility Change the device Y 0017 to ON t All right Yes NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when co
134. to 2 300H to 303H 304 to 307H 308H to 30BH 30CH to 30FH 310H to 313H number N Station Buffer memory address 1E0u to 1 1E4 to 1E7H 1 8 to 1EBH 1 to 1 1FOH to 1 1 4 to 1F7H 1 8 to 1FBH 1FCu to 1FFH 200 to 203H 204 to 207H 208u to 20BH 20 to 20FH 210 to 213H 2 Lug Md o App 24 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 314u to 317H 318H to 31BH 31CH to 31FH 320H to 323H 324H to 327H 328H to 32BH 32CH to 32FH 330H to 333H 334H to 337H 338H to 33BH 33CH to 33FH 340H to 343H 344H to 347H Local station Station Buffer memory address 348 to 34 34Cu to 34 350H to 353H 354 to 357H 358H to 35BH 35Cu to 35FH 360H to 363H 364 to 367H 368H to 36BH 36CH to 36FH 370H to 373H 374 to 377H number 378H to 37BH Station Buffer memory address 37CH to 37FH 380H to 383H 384H to 387H 388 to 38BH 38CH to 38FH 390H to 393H 394 to 397H 398H to 39Bu 39CH to 39FH 3A0H to 3A3H 4 to 3A7H 3A8H to 3ABH number 3ACH to 3AFH Station Buffer memory address 3BO0 to 3B3H 3B4nu to 3B7H to to 3BFH 3CO0H to 3C3H 3C4H to 3C7H 3C8H to 3CBH 3CCH to 3D0 to 3D3H 3D4nu to 3D7H 3D8H
135. to 3DBH 3DCn to 3DFH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 214u to 217H 218u to 21BH 21 to 21FH 220 to 223H 224 to 227H 228u to 22BH 22CH to 22FH 230H to 233H 234 to 237H 238u to 23BH 23CH to 23FH 240 to 243 244 247 Station Buffer memory address 248 to 24 24 24 250 253 254 to 257 258 to 25 25 25 260 263 264 to 267 268 to 26BH 26 to 26FH 270H to 273H 274 to 277H 278 to 27BH Station Buffer memory address 27 to 27FH 280 to 283H 284 to 287H 288u to 28BH 28 to 28FH 290 to 293H 294 to 297H 298u to 29BH 29 to 29 2 0 to 2A3H 2 4 to 2A7H 2 8 to 2 2 to 2AFH Station Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2B3H 2 4 to 2B7H 2B8u to 2BBH 2BCn to 2BFH 2 0 to 2C3H 2 4 to 2C7H 2 8 to 2CBH 2CCu to 2CFH 200 to 2D3H 204 to 2D7H 208 to 2DBH 2DCu to 2DFH number App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC 3 Link special relays SB The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON OFF data Buffer memory addresses 5EO0n to 5FFH correspond to link special relays 5 0000 to SBO1FF For details on the link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF refer to Section 17 3 3 The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5E0H to SFFH and link sp
136. turning the power off while the master station is controlling the data link both the master and standby master stations will attempt to operate as master stations and an error will occur The ERR LED will be flicker When a programmable controller is set as the master station a CC Link Ver 2 board cannot be specified as a standby master station 4 FUNCTION se MELSEC 4 Special link relays registers SB and SW related to the standby master function The following explains the special link relays and registers related to the standby master function They are stored in the buffer memory a Special link relays SB The special link relays SB relating to the standby master function are as follows The numeric values in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses and bit locations Example When the buffer memory address is 5 and the bit location is 0 5EOH bO Table 4 5 List of special link relays related to the standby master function Applicability Number Description O Applicable lt Not applicable Master Standby master station station Master stati n Switches the output information from the standby master station SB0001 switching and data link to the master station and starts up the data link 5E0n b1 startup Off Without switching direction On With switching direction Acknowledge status of Shows the acknowledge status of the data link startup switching SB0042 master station
137. two or more stations specify the first station number 2 Specify unused station numbers as reserved stations If unused station numbers are not specified as reserved stations they will be handled as data link faulty stations can be checked with special link registers SW0080 to SW0083 3 Specify unique station numbers If duplicate station numbers are specified an installation error occurs Error codes are stored in SWO0069 Setting example One station was skipped when station numbers were specified Station number 0 Master station Station number 5 3 Standby master station es number 2 Station number 1 1 Remote 1 0 station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations Remote device station 2 stations Station number 9 4 Intelligent device station occupies 1 station Station number 10 5 Local station St No 1 St No 2 St No 3 St No 4 St 5 St No 6 St No 7 St No 8 St No 9 st No 10 1 Remote 2 Remote device station station 3 Standby master station Data link faulty station If this station was specified as a reserve station it would not have been treated as a faulty station 4 Intelligent 5 Local station device station 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 8 2 Transmission rate and mode settings The transmission rate and m
138. version of the ABOBD J61BT 13 mode or remote net additional mode 17 24 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 17 3 2 Troubleshooting flow when the ERR LED on the master station is flashing 1 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as the master board The ERR LED of the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 is flashing Do the parameter settings and installed system configuration match correctly NO YES Are the master station link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 data link status of other stations turned on NO YES Are the master station link special registers 51 0098 to SWO009B duplicate station number status turned on NO YES Check the module for which SW0098 to SW009B are on Check the module for which SW0080 to SW0083 on Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Correct the parameter settings or installed system configuration Check the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 side Check the slave station side Turn on the power Are the station number NO I NO switches set correctly SE powercone YES Set the station number YES switches correctly Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch NO Is there Y a POWER LED on the Reset the master station module YES NO NO Doesn t it work normally Is the POWER LED YES YES Corresponding module failure NO Is
139. when creating a user program that communicates with a programmable controller CPU With these functions the user can perform communications without worrying about the hardware type of the destination device or the communication protocol v IBM PC AT compatible PC Communications with a designated programmable controller are easy without specific attention to the communication protocol MELSEC Data Link Library CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link CC Link module CC Link module 11 1 11 1 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 2 Function List The following table lists the functions that are provided by the MELSEC Data Link Library that comes with the utility software mdReceiveEx Batch reads devices Extended function mdRandWEx Writes devices randomly Extended function mdRandREx Reads devices randomly Extended function mdDevSetEx Sets a bit device Extended function mdDevRstEx Resets a bit device Extended function mdTypeRead Reads the programmable controller CPU type mdControl Remote RUN STOP PAUSE m BdRst mdRandR mdDevSet mdDevRst For details of the functions refer to HELP for the MELSEC Data Link Functions provided with the utility software 11 2 11 2 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 3 Settings for Using Functions This section describes the setting operation in order to use f
140. write bytes error The designated number of bytes to be written was out of Set the number of bytes to be written within the range range Link parameter error The link parameters are corrupted The total number of slave stations is 0 in a link parameter Reset the link parameters Link parameter s fixed pattern is corrupted Link parameter s sum check is corrupted 88H A value other than 0 to 2 was designated for random read 215 Receiving data length or byte length exceeds the range Check the cable D7 The request data buffer length exceeded the limit Correct the station number 0 The request destination is not found Processing mode error 225 A processing code that could not be processed by the Review the request destination s ACPU and processing 1 request destination s ACPU was set codes This is checked by the request destination s ACPU Other data error Data such as the address head step or number of shifts of Correct the request data the request data was incorrect Link designation error 102 Data sending error 66x Data sending has failed Check the device number Check the size 132 84 133 85x 227 E34 A processing code that could not be processed by the Check the request destination s station number and request destination station was set processing codes This is checked by the request destination s link module Check the switch settings of the own board and move
141. 0 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWO009F s the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on 17 20 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot write data to the remote register RWw of a remote device station Cannot communicate from the master station remote output RY to a local station remote input RX 17 21 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default Check the parameter informati
142. 0 No change 1 Change occurred Other station b15 b14 b13 b12 switch change SWO008C status SWOO08D SWO008bE SWO08D 68D SWOOBE 68 SWO008F 68Fu SWOO08F Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 5 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 17 38 17 38 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 6 7 Eee x Not available Number Name Description Onie station station SWO090 Stores the line status 6904 Line status 0 Normal 1 Data link cannot be Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error SW0094 0 No transient transmission error 6944 1 Transient transmission error occurrence 510095 b15 b14 b13 to b3 6954 Transient 51 0094 transmission SW0096 status SW0095 696v SWo096 SW0097 SW0097 6974 Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each SW0098 module is not overlapped 698 0 Normal 1 Overlap station number first station number only b15 b14 b13 612 to b3 5 0098 16 13 to 4 5 0099 32 29 to 20 SWO009A 48 45 to 36 SW0099 6994 Station number SWOO9A overlap status 69 SW009B 69 SW009B Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the paramete
143. 0 000 DU mmm n E 2 Remote inputs RX 1 RX2F to RX20 RX3FtoRX30 T RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 Remote outputs RY RYOF to RYOO Remote I O station station No 2 RYSFtoRYSO 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 The input data X of the remote I O station are 2 The remote input data RX of the CC Link Ver 2 stored into the remote input RX on the CC Link board are read out Ver 2 board by the link scan Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 3 Data are written to the remote output RY of the CC Link Ver 2 board 4 remote output data RY of the CC Link Ver 2 Arguments to be set board are output to the remote I O station Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x20 12 5 12 5 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the remote I O stations and then the master station 12 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote I O stations under normal data li
144. 1 13 Transient transmission functions of the CC Link board Transient transmission is not allowed to slave station No 64 on the CC Link system 14 Performance The system performance using the CC Link Ver 2 board differs according to the performance loaded condition of the personal computer the processing contents of the application software and the type of the interface board Use the product after reviewing the system configuration and processing contents of the software in advance For details of the CC Link Ver 2 board performance refer to Chapter 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIMES 15 Combination of ROM version and S W version When using CC Link Ver 2 board ROM version 2B or later use S W package version 1 06G or later INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Please read this manual thoroughly to fully understand the functions and performances of the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board in order to use the product properly Please be sure to deliver this manual to the end users CONTENTS SAFEPY PRECAUTIONS EIN dni NUI A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT inscia 5 REVISIONS cn Ate te ere de eee Aten A cee Meth ed E idisse 6 Precautions for Use ui eoe e o th de e ea de d e t de ea Lr cL e
145. 1 3 58 99 3 90 121 4 76 BD808C 182651 hy 19 0 75 Unit mm inch App 49 App 49 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 9 2 Q81BD J61BT11 153 6 02 147 5 79 91 3 58 121 4 76 103 5 4 07 0 75 Unit mm inch App 50 App 50 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 10 Setting Checklists Some kinds of sheets are provided in this section for setting the parameters required for the CC Link system configuration Make photocopies and use them as needed Appendix 10 1 Parameter setting checklist Parameter Setting Check List Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Remote net Additional mode Off line Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Automatic reconnection station count Other Settings Standby master station No Noo Delay information setting WDT setting Station information All connect count settings App 51 App 51 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 10 2 Station information setting checklist Station information setting checklist EST Station type Expanded Occupied Sta Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word E cyclic points station select App 52 App 52 APPENDIX MELSEC i i id Intelligent buffer select word Sta No Station type Expanded Occupied Sta Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cyclic points station select Send Receive Automatic App 53 App
146. 1 BUSY flag RX04 OFF turns OFF the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 With the Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 OFF turns OFF the Axis 2 positioning start flag RY11 13 Reads out the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 and Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 14 With the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 OFF turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 With the Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 OFF turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 Parameters set in the sample program MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 andthe Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw8 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts zero point return operation The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts positioning operations for axes 1 and 2 and turns ON the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 and Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 When positioning of Axis 1 or 2 is completed the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 or Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 respectively 11 Turns OFF the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 12 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 tur
147. 141 140 5F5u 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 5F6u 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 5F7H 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 5 8 18 18 18D 18C 18 18 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 5 9 19F 19 19D 19 19B 19 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 5 1AF 1 1 1 1AB 1AA 1 9 1 8 1A7 1A6 1 5 1 4 1A3 1 2 1 1 1A0 5 1 1BE 1BD 1BC 1 1BA 1 9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1 4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 5 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1 4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1CO SFDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 108 1D7 1D6 105 104 1D3 102 1D1 1DO 5 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1 6 1E5 1 4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1EO SFFH 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1 5 1 4 1F3 1 2 1 1 1 0 25 25 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 Link special registers SW The link special registers store the data link status using word data Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond
148. 1QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 User s Manual This Manual explains the system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting for the AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 Sold separately IB 66722 13873 MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080895 This Manual explains the system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring 13741 and troubleshooting for the L series master local module Sold separately Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the table above How to Use this Manual The following lists the key items that represent the main usage of the CC Link Ver 2 board by the purpose Please use the following key items to refer to the appropriate section of this manual 1 2 3 To learn about the features of the CC Link Ver 2 board Section 1 1 The features are described in Section 1 1 To learn about the system configuration Chapter 2 The system configuration using the CC Link Ver 2 board is described in Chapter 2 To learn about the operating environment of the CC Link Ver 2 board Section 2 2 1 The operating environment of the CC Link Ver 2 board is described in Section 2 2 1 To learn about specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 3 The specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board are described in Chapter 3 To learn about t
149. 2 Communication with the local stations 4 10 Communication between the Master station and G Local stations sss 14 1 General Specifications 3 1 Communication with the intelligent device station Generic Terms and Abbreviations A 19 Haines veneto a dem eT eme 4 16 Communication between the Master station and H Intelligent device station 15 1 16 1 Hardware 8 26 Communication with the Redundant CPU Help SCIeen 9 7 SORORE UC UK App 35 Host line status 5 0090 17 33 Component Names and Settings 8 5 Host master standby master operation status Connection 3 2 SB007B ee ie eee nates 17 32 Index 1 Index 1 Host mode 5 0060 17 31 I L M Host parameter status SW0068 17 36 Host standby master station setting status 580062 17 31 Host station number SW0061 17 36 Host station operation status SBOOGE 17 32 Host type 5 0061 17 31 How to Use this Manual A 17 Icons to be 8 23 Increasing the number of cyclic points 4 39 Input data status setting fro
150. 2 8 Line test Software link correctly Checks whether or not the data link on the own station starts stops Network test BST Savefle file Writes Writes preset parameters into a file parameters into a file Section 9 1 4 Load file Reads out saved parameters Section 9 1 5 Displays the Help of the CC Link Ver 2 utility Section 9 1 6 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 2 Operating the Board information screen This screen displays the various information of the CC Link Ver 2 board currently mounted on the PC 1 Board information screen CC Link Ver 2 utility 5101 Channel No 81 LED information Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN Data link status In data link Error status Normal Device Monitor Load file Save file 15 2 2 1 Slot1 board Displays the information of the Slot1 CC Link Ver 2 board Displays the station No station type and operation mode of the CC Link Ver 2 board Example 0 Master station Ver 2 mode Station No Operation mode Station type Displays the Board detail information screen where the details of the CC Link Ver 2 7 button board can be verified For more information about the Board detail information screen refer to 2 Board detail information screen Displays the information of the Slot2 to Slot4 CC Link Ver 2 boards lot2 to Slot4 b A Se e
151. 3 output RY output RY Station number 4 Station number 7 Station number 8 4 FUNCTION _ MELSEC 1 Set Ver 1 compatible slave stations to the smaller station numbers and Ver 2 compatible slave stations to greater station numbers In the previous page example the Ver 2 compatible slave stations are added to after station No 4 since the existing CC Link Ver 1 system uses up to No 3 2 The remote net additional mode assumes that the Ver 2 compatible slave stations are added to the existing CC Link Ver 1 system When changing the station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station or adding a Ver 2 compatible slave station between stations configure them in the remote net ver 2 mode 3 In the remote net additional mode I O station points setting and reserved station 0 point setting are not available 4 When there is a possibility of adding some Ver 1 compatible slave stations in the future in the remote net additional mode set reserved stations after the Ver 1 compatible slave station settings to make the system extension easy 5 The following operations are required to change the mode of the CC Link Ver 1 system including the standby master station to the remote net additional mode Changing the master station to a board or a module applicable to Ver 2 As a new standby master station add a board or a module applicable to Ver 2 Setting the new standby master station number to l
152. 3 1 3 Restoring parameters The following describes the procedure for restoring parameters 1 Activate the Parameter backup restore tool Refer to Type the name of program folder document or Ap pe nd ix 3 2 E 1 Internet resource Windows will open it For you Open G Tool US Prmbkup exe OK Cancel Browse HEATET Eel a 2 Select the Parameter restore tab in the Parameter Pace ese eas backup restore tool dialog box Refer to Appendix Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them 3 3 2 Parameter file setting UU mem Click the Browse button in the Parameter file setting ile path Fossil field The Browse dialog box is displayed 3 Select parameter file to be restored and click the Lookin button File name Param bdp Files of type Backup Parameter File bdp Cancel lis Parameter backup restore tool 4 The information of the selected file is displayed in the 2000 Parameter file information field under the Parameter Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them fil ttin Parameter file setting se 9 Set parameter file path 1 2 CANELSEDPERIMPaanbde TC Click the Restore button The confirmation dialog box is Parameter file information d i S pl a y e d CC Link SwnDNC CCBD2 B Ver 1 amp Ver 2 Local amp Master Click the b
153. 4 The condition setting switch for the station number not specified with a parameter is designated for the standby master station All stations were set as reserved stations with a parameter A station number specified as a standby master station is set to a station other than an intelligent device station A parameter change was executed during a transient request A response from the requesting station was not returned within the monitor time period A transient request was issued to a remote I O station or remote device station A request was issued without turning RY on RY off before the response is completed MELSEC Detectability Master Local station station Corrective action Set the total size of the communication buffer to 4 k words or less Set the total size of the automatic update buffer to 4 k words or less Set the standby master station to a value within the range from 1 to 64 Set a value within the range from 4 to 7 Set a value within the range from 4 to 10 Set the parameter so that station numbers are not duplicated Set the parameter so that it satisfies the condition shown at the left Set a value within the range from 1 to 4 Set a value within the range from 1 to 64 Check the parameter or condition setting switch Check the parameter s reserved station setting Specify the standby master station as an intelligent device station Change th
154. 53 APPENDIX Appendix 10 3 Device assignment checklist Device assignment checklist RX60 to RX7F gt RY60 to RY7F gt RY80 to RY9F gt RXAQtoRXBF gt RYAOtoRYBF RYCO to RYDF gt 8 RXEQtoRXFF gt RYEOtoRYFF RX100 toRX11F gt RY100 to RY11F gt 10 RX120to RX13F gt RY120 to RY13F gt EUNT to RX15F gt RY140 to RY15F gt RX160 to RX17F gt o RY17F gt EHT to RX19F gt RY180 to RY19F gt 14 RX1A0 to RX1BF gt RY1A0 to RY1BF gt 15 RX1C0 to RX1DF gt RY1C0 to RY1DF gt 16 RX1E0 to RXtFF RY1E0 to RYTFF RX200 to RX21F RY200 to RY21F gt RX220 to RX23F gt RY220 to RY23F gt RX240 to RX25F gt RY240 to RY25F RX260 to RX27F gt RY260 to RY27F gt 21 RX280 to RX29F RY280 to RY29F gt RX2A0 to RX2BF gt RY2A0 to RY2BF gt EN RX2C0 to RX2DF gt RY2CO RX2E0 to RX2FF gt RY2EO RX300 to RX31F gt RY300 RX320 to RX33F gt RY320 RX340 to RX35F RY340 RX360 to RX37F gt RY360 RX380 to RX39F gt RY380 RX3A0 to RX3BF gt RY3A0 RX3C0 to RX3DF RY3CO RX3EO to RX3FF gt RY3E0 RX400 to RX41F RY400 RX420 to RX43F gt RY420 RX440 to RX45F gt RY440 RX460 to RXA7F gt RY460 RX480 to RX49F gt RY480 RX4A0 to RX4BF RY4A0 RX4CO to RX4DF gt RY4CO RX4E0 to RX4FF gt RY4E0 RX500 to RX51F gt RY500 RX520 to RX53F gt RY520 RX540 to RX55F gt RY540 RX560 to RX57F gt App 54 o RY2DF gt o RY2FF gt o RY31F gt o RY33F gt o RY35F
155. 61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable 26 42 64 1 m Intelligent device station RS 232 interface module AJ65BT R2 Remote device station Lo A 00 OOO Analog digital converter AJ65BT 64AD CC Link dedicated cable Total 64 Remote I O module m Remote I O station OO onog AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTC1 32D 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 Remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode a2 a4 a8 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave b b2 b4 b8 2 MA pnt and is T Condition 1 C c2 o4 08 X 3 compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Single d d2 d4 d8 X 4 lt 64 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave 32 a2 32 a4 X 64 a8 x 128 stations that occupy 2 stations and ver 2 b X 64 b2 X 96 b4 x 192 b8 x 384 compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations Condition 2 which are set to Single The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Single The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to
156. 61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 operated normally YES Consult your local Mitsubishi representative END END 1 Changing the installation slot positions for each board 2 Install other optional board s only reinstall drivers of the installed board s Have the operating system and Is the operation available on another PC Consult your local Mitsubishi representative 17 5 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT 11 operated normally YES END 17 5 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 1 4 List of messages of error events that may occur when starting the driver Table 17 3 lists the error messages that are displayed in event viewer Table 17 3 List of error displayed in event viewer Event ID Error message Corrective action HEX 9 256 Because the error had occurred in the during starting of the Reinstall the driver software If the error persists reinstall 1004 device the device was not able to be executed Operating System 01 The I F board was not found Uninstall and reinstall the CC Link Ver 2 board H There is no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board 259 The board more than the maximum number of sheets Retadvedhebostis exceed the maximum 103 which was able to be installed was detected g 262 Failed to link the device name Check that the CC Link Ver 1 board is not installed 106 d Reinstall Operating System 268 10C An error occu
157. 64 b2 SB0065 5E6x b5 MELSEC Table 17 6 List of link special relays SBs 3 5 cel Re x Not available Number Name Description Online station station Line test complete status Parameter information read acknowledgment status Parameter information read completion status Offline test status Master switching request acknowledgment Master switching request complete Forced master Switching request acknowledgment Forced master Switching request complete Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure Host mode Host type Host standby master station setting status Input data status of host data link faulty station Indicates the line test completion status OFF Not executed x ON Test complete Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read request OFF Not executed ON Test complete Indicates the offline test execution status OFF Not executed ON In progress Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station when it has received a master switching request from the line OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master station to master station is complete
158. 9 ec Device Monitor Utility 9 25 CO LINE VERSION quieti vis HA ife ZN Device 11 12 CC Link Ver 1 A 19 Differences from the CC Link Ver T Board Ver2 board eip nut E eee App 1 CC Link Ver 2 Utility esses 9 9 Channel No setting switch 8 6 E Checking the Board 8 26 EMC 7 1 Changing word device values 9 30 Edguiprentliss ot lana Rat toti boe 2 9 Combinations of Boards with Existing Software Eor codes cete tete 17 42 audi 45 Error invalid station function 1 8 Communication with remote I O stations 4 3 Error invalid station setting function 4 35 Communication between the Master station and External App 44 Remote I O stations 12 1 Communication with the remote device stations F TS 4 5 Faulty stations are generated depending on the Communication between the Master station and transmission 17 23 Remote device stations 13 1 aereis 4 1 11
159. ARES 3 Transmission rate 156kbps x Occupied Sta 6 4 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Input for En Sta vid 7 9 Automatic reconnection station count Station information settings 1 0 Standby master station No 0 Default 13 All connect count 2 rj Clear Delay information settin 025 No Sta No Station Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta 11 5 zzi so mota toc 14 AA Ver Inteligent device station v singe x Occupies 4 stations 15 275 Ver2 Inteligent device station z single gt Occupies 2 stations 12 WDT setting 250 2 8 ms Device Monitor Loadfie Save file D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 14 4 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 2 SmNompe noo cHesterstaioz Local station Standby master staton 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode 7 Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection oth 9 station count 1 Modules 12 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms 13 All connect count 2 Mod
160. B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to Cannot receive inputs from a remote I O station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 17 18 17 18 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot output data from a remote I O station Cannot receive the remote input RX of a remote device station 17 19 Is the corresponding remote I O station performing data link 15 data written to the correct address of the remote output RY buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote I O station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Check the LED displays on the corresponding
161. BLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 1 2 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing The following table shows how to identify the error according to the ERR SD or RD LED status when the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing Table 17 2 Troubleshooting for each lit LED Corrective Action OS startup error Driver response error PCI bus error 17 3 Breakdown or malfunction of the computer in use x CC Link Ver 2 board failure CC Link Ver 2 board driver is not installed Competition or fault with other optional board s CC Link Ver 2 board driver is not installed The watchdog timer error has occurred CC Link Ver 2 board failure Poor contact on the CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link Ver 2 board failure Malfunction of the PC in use Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board driver is installed Remove the CC Link Ver 2 board and check if the OS starts up normally Replace other optional board s or change installation positions for board s Reinstall other optional board driver s or reset the IRQ and memory addresses Reinstall the OS or replace the computer Consult your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board driver is installed Adjust the watchdog timer setting Refer to Section 9 2 5 and 17 4 Consult your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board is firmly inserted into the PCI slot Consult your local Mitsubi
162. C AT compatible PC MELSEC 8 The remote register RWr data of each of the remote device stations is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the remote register RWr data of the remote device stations stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory Master station r Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 2 stations P EAEE E EEEE A Remote register RWr Numerical data such as set value check codes Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations rom RWO RWr1 Progam gt E RW2 2 RW3 8 RWr4 Remote register RWr RWr5 Numerical data RWIG Such as set value i RWi7 check codes EM EM o A RWO T MM 2 PM RWrt Neato RWA ____ LLLLOW2 RWrB 9 j RWr3 Waste RWC ____ RWD L RWS RWE ____ PME ___ RWrF L RWr7 to d RWFF 7 Remote register RWr when the AJ65BT 64DAV is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT 64DAV Master module CH1 set value check code CH2 set value check code CH3 set value check code CH4 set value check code Not used 4 9 4 9 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations The following explains an overview of the communication
163. CC Link Ver 2 board RY gt Remote station output The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote I O station output turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 3 1 1 5 4 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 3 2 1 5 7 5 ms 2 When writing RY to the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 2 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote device station RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote device station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 1 LS Link scan time ref
164. FB RX7EO to RX7FF gt RY7E0 to RY7FF gt RWWwFC to RWwFF gt RWIFC to RWrFF App 55 App 55 INDEX 0 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link 16 point entry 9 27 Dedicated Cable 8 27 Current link scan time SWOOGE 17 37 A Cyclic transmission A 20 Accessible Devices 10 1 Cyclic Transmission Processing Time 9 3 Accessible 10 4 Addition settings 9 17 D Applicable Systems ennt 2 4 Data link restart 580000 17 29 Auto return 1 6 4 23 Data link restart acceptance 580040 17 30 Data link restart complete SB00441 17 30 B Data link restart result SW0041 17 34 Backing up parameters App 10 e He i MM IU memory tals Appts Data ink stop acceptance SB0044 17 30 Buffer memory 115 App 15 Pata IMK stop complete 8 10 30 Data link 4 36 Detailed LED display status SW0058 17 35 Device assignment checklist App 4
165. GENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 Other settings Operational settings oth 2 Sta No Type 0 5 Master station Other settings Expanded cyclic de 33 3 Transmission rate 156kbps Occupied Sta M Default ETE 1 4 Mode Remote 1 mode Input for En Sta Hoi tear Automatic reconnection station count 19 Lancel Station information settings Standby master station No o Default 1 3 All connect count 2 mr Clear 2 5 Delay information settin 0 50 1 4 No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta A ant 1 1 Remote 1 0 station i x ccupies 1 station 1 5 2 2 Remote 1 0 station i y Occupies 1 station x WDT setting 250 31 B ms Device Monitor Load file Save fie ID MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting
166. Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 4 2 3 Chapter 7 Section 8 4 1 Section 9 1 Section 11 3 Section 17 1 4 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 3 1 Appendix 3 2 Section 8 4 2 to 8 4 3 changed to Section 8 4 3 to 8 4 4 Addition Section 8 4 2 Appendix 7 Correction Precautions for use Generic Terms and Abbreviations Chapter 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 3 1 Section 4 2 1 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 2 3 Section 4 2 4 Section 4 4 5 Section 5 2 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 2 3 Section 5 2 4 Section 5 3 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 2 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 6 Section 9 3 6 Section 9 3 7 Section 9 3 8 Section 9 3 11 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 12 2 1 Section 12 5 1 Section 13 1 2 Section 13 2 2 Section 14 1 2 Section 14 2 2 Section 15 2 1 Section 16 2 1 Section 17 1 4 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 6 Appendix 3 1 2 Appendix 3 1 3 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number May 2008 SH NA 080527ENG G Model addition Q81BD J61BT11 Correction Precautions for use Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product List Section 1 1 Section 1 3 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 4 7 Section 5 2 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 3 Secti
167. H DevA A 20 14H DevZ Z 21 15H DevV V index register 22 16H DevR R file register 220 DCH DevZR ZR file register 22000 to 22256 55FO0u to 56F0H DevERO to DevER256 ER extension file register 23 17H DevB B 24 18H DevW W 25 19H DevQSB Q QnA link special relay on Q QnACPU 26 1AH DevSTT Retentive timer contact 27 1 DevSTC Retentive timer coil 28 1CH DevQSW Q QnA link special register on Q QnACPU 30 1 DevQV Q QnA edge relay on Q QnACPU 2 J 11 14 11 14 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY Device type Code designation Decimal 33 Hexadecimal 21H Device name designation DevMRB MELSEC Own station random access buffer s 35 23H DevSTN Retentive timer current value 36 24H DevWw Own station link register for send 37 25H DevWr Own station link register for receive x 50 32H DevSPB Own station buffer memory 101 65u DevMAIL Q QnA SEND function with arrival acknowledgment and RECV function 102 66H DevMAILNC Q QnA SEND function without arrival acknowledgment 1001 to 1255 9 to 4E7H DevLX1 to DevLX255 Direct link input 2001 to 2255 7D1H to 8CFH DevLY1 to DevLY255 Direct link output 23001 to 23255 59 9 to SAD7H DevLB1 to DevLB255 Direct link relay 24001 to 24255
168. ICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable distance is described below 1 For a system consisting of only remote I O stations and remote device stations Remote I O station Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station or remote or remote or remote or remote device station device station device station device station 2 1 x1 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Q cable aries 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 360 9 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 5 Mbps 59 cm 23 23 in 110 m 360 9 ft 60 cm 23 62 in or more 1 m 3 28 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 59 cm 23 23 in 50 m 164 1 ft 10 Mbps 60 cm 23 62 in to 99 cm 38 98 in 80 m 262 5 ft 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 MOTIF Geis 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 900 m 2952 9 ft 2 5 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 400m 19124 0 5 Mbps 160 m 524 96 ft Number of conne
169. ICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 2 3 Setting the remote device station The following shows the remote device station switch settings J65 CU 68 PELSE AU65VBTCU 68DAV CON A JL 1 con K B SEL H set 2 UB RON 8 LRUN 3 Ll DOWN ERR Station number setting switch Swi Transmission speed setting switch 0 A 0 OFF ffo amp 20 OFF 5 120 2 Shol OFF 40 amp s orr V Station IPS number 1 0 xS 6 5122 OFF 0 197 1 ON 4 zl B JL 4 OFF 8 s g 2 OFF gt 156kbps r vm oe m 1 OFF J 8 J E MODE Mode select switch p 0 Nomal mode CON P S jo CON MITSUBISHI CCunk 3 J65 CU 68 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CON A JL 1 con K B SEL H FOMER set 2 UB RUN LRUN 3 EN DOWN ERR Station number setting switch A Transmissio
170. ION MELSEC Word information from a local station to the master station and another local station 12 The word information set with automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of a local station However it can only be stored in the area corresponding to the station number of the own station 13 The information in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote register RWr of the master station and the remote register RWw of another local station 14 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the word information stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 15 The word information stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station _ Station number 1 Station number 2 Programmable occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations controller CPU i Program 14 rarene 10 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Communication between the master station and the local station by transient transmission The transient transmission is a transmission method that sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by designating the opposite station at an arbitrary timing When writing data to the buffer memory of the local station and the CPU device using the mdSend function 1 The pr
171. ION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and intelligent device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on intelligent device stations refer to the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Positioning Module User s Manual 16 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and one intelligent device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 as shown below is used Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Occupies 4 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJ65BT D75P2 S3 cooo Co Positioning module Terminal resistor Servo amplifier we 03 MR ce amplifier 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 2 Setting the Master Station The following shows the master station setting 16 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section 1 1 RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF IOF 2 OFF LEES i Ba qr 1 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLI
172. J61QBT11 is used as the master station When the QJ61BT11 is used as the master station connect the 110 resistor that is supplied with the module For the connection method refer to Section 8 6 100 5 1 2W X 4 Connect between DA and DG DB and DG both ends Connection CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Use a commercially available terminal resistor of 110 5 1 2 W resistance 110 and 130 resistors that are supplied with the CC Link Ver 2 board master local modules cannot be used Master module A 1S J61BT1 QBT11 Terminal resistor T branch terminal block connector Terminal block Off the shelf terminal block Connector Connector NECA4202 for the FA sensor ICE947 5 2 comparable product is recommended When wiring cables for the main line side try not to remove the covering as much as possible Maximum length of main line distance between T branches and length of cable between stations The CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 110 used Distance Length of cable between between remote I O stations or M 1 T branches remote device stations 625 kbps 100 m 328 1 1 No limit 30 cm 11 8 in or longer 156 kbps 500 m 1640 5 ft Length of cable between the master local station or intelligent device station and the adjacent
173. MELSEC CC LINK Controller CC Link Ver 2 driver PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller When both of the above drive names are displayed concurrently it means the CC Link Ver 1 board and CC Link Ver 2 board have been mounted Perform the following Click Start Settings Control Panel js System lt lt Hardware gt gt tab button Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 only On the Device Manager screen click MELSEC CC LINK Device Select the driver of the unnecessary CC Link board version right click and select Delete Remove the CC Link board of the version not to be used 1 When using Windows Vista select Classic View on the control panel Screen 2 For details on how to check the CC Link Ver 2 board version refer to section 2 2 4 3 App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 3 About Parameter backup restore tool This section describes the Parameter backup restore tool that is used for re using existing parameters The Parameter backup restore tool is a dedicated tool for backing up and restoring CC Link board parameters and is stored in the SW1DNC CCBD2 B CD ROM Backup Stores parameters of the CC Link board that is currently mounted to the PC into files Restore Reads the backed up parameters and stores them into a CC Link board By using this dedicated tool the user can re use existing parameters without being aware of the version of the CC Link board Appendix 3 1 Operatio
174. MITSUBISHI Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCBD2 B S Mitsubishi Programmable Controller e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Be sure to read these instructions before using the product Before using this product read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of the CPU module for safety precautions on programmable controller systems In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as N WARNING and CAUTION 4 N Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions AN WARNING resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage M N Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results depending on the circumstances Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING e For details on the operat
175. No A link Remote RX RY 32points 32points 64points 128points 32points points par station Remote register RWw 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remote register RWr 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remote I O RXRY 8points 32points 64points 128points 32points Occupies Remote 7 1 station register RWw 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remote register RWr 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remo tO 64points 96points 192points 384points 64points RXRY Occupies Remote 1 2 stations register RWw 8points 16points 32points 64points 8points Number of Remote link points register RWr 8points 16points 32points 64points 8points par number R te lO of occupied R 96points 160points 320points 640points 96points station count Remote register RWw Occupies 3 stations 12points 24points 48points 96points 12points Remote register RWr 12points 24points 48points 96points 12points Remote I O RX RY 128points 224points 448points 896points 128points Remote register RWw Occupies 4 stations 16points 32points 64points 128points 16points Remote register RWr 16points 32points 64points 128points 16points Transmission delay time Output transmission delay time LS x 4 Output processing time LS x 8 Output processing time LS x 16
176. Occupies 4 stations Occupies 2 stations Local station station No 1 Local station station No 5 IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 14 9 14 9 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 2 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section I RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch 1 2 cap Lt na qr 1 d o 14 10 14 10 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 Other settings 1 Operational settings 2 Sta No Type 0 2 Master station Edoardo joe 5 8
177. P2 S3 and starts JOG operation 14 Turn OFF the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 to stop the JOG operation 16 Turn OFF the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY 18 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 to stop JOG operation 18 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 20 Turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 16 12 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the intelligent device station and then the master station 16 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and intelligent device stations under normal data link condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operation status of the master station a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows ON 1 if The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally re No error has occurred Data are being transmitted Data are being received b Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information on the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below re lt Board detail information Channel No 81 Sta
178. RTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 7 2 T Branch communication specifications list Transmission rate The following explains the communication specifications for T branch connection For communication specifications not listed below refer to Section 4 2 Performance Specifications Remarks 10 M 5 M 2 5 Mbps are not allowed to use Specification 625 kbps 156 kbps Maximum length of the main line Indicates the length of the cable between terminal resistors The length of the T branch cable branch line length is not included 100 328 1 ft 500 1640 5 ft Maximum length of the main line 8 m 26 25 ft Indicates the overall cable length per branch Overall branch line length 50 m 164 05 ft 200 m 656 2 ft Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable Maximum number of connected stations on the branch line The total number of connected stations depends on G stationispet branch the CC Link specifications Connected cable The CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used example FANC SBH Mixed use of the CC Link dedicated cables made by different manufacturers is not allowed Mixed use of the Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables made by different manufacturers is not allowed CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 corresponding CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor connection method Only when the I F board A 1S J61BT11 or A 1S
179. RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the local station s CPU device turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 9 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 1X 2X2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 2 2 2 1 1 10 31 ms 2 When writing RY to the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RWr Local station programmable controller RWw The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment data is set in a local station s CPU device until RWr of the master station CC Link Ver 2 boa
180. Remote 1 0 station x Occupies 1 station 250 4 8 ms 1 272 Remote 1 0 station i Occupies 1 station WDT setting Device Monitor Load file Save file ID MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 12 1 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 emote net Additional mode Off line va Automatic reconnection Oth t 9 station count 1 Modules 12 WDT setting 250 X 8 ms All connect count 2 Modules Table 12 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word rd cyclic Sta station points station select 1 station 15 2 Remote I O station 32 points No setting fff fe 12 3 12 3 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS 12 3 Setting up the remote I O stations The settings of the remote I O station switches are shown below Station No setting switch Transmission speed setting switch m Ne oftens Noorus _0 156 ops 55 1 32 1 AJGESBTCT32T Setting Setting switch status Transmission value speed 0 OFF OFF OFF 156 kbps I x
181. Section 9 1 7 for how to check the software version 3 System design to prevent erroneous inputs from the remote I O modules a When powering on and off Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I O modules Turn off the power to the remote I O modules after stopping the data link Data link start Data link stop Executing CC Link Ver 2 board data link status Stopped Remote I O module ON power status OFF _ 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC During momentary power failure of the remote I O modules When a momentary power failure occurs in the power being supplied to the remote I O modules 24 V DC an erroneous input may occur Cause for erroneous inputs due to a momentary power failure The remote I O module hardware uses the power by internally converting the module power 24 V DC to 5 V DC When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I O module the following situation occurs Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I O module to turn off gt Response time for input module on off Thus an erroneous input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time indicated by 1 in the figure below 1 im Remote I O module module power supply and input external supply power Remote I O module internal 5 V DC Input Xn 1 1 b N When the input external power supply turns off the input Xn turns off after the response time fo
182. Station number 1 number 3 Local station Remote I O Q80BD Remote I O station J61BT11N station occupies occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations 1 station Master station QJ61BT11 Ver 1 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station Stano o 0 Type Local station Occupied Sta Input for Err Sta Operational Retry count settings din Automatic reconnection station count Sy er Standby master station No i CINES settings Delay information setting Po WDT setting 250 x 8 ms Station information All connect count aaa eS settings Station information Station information setting items o SoN Station MU Expanded cyctic EN M MM send CENE 7 u 1 Setting not required PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC 6 3 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 2 Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station Remote I O QJ61BT11N Remote I O Master station Q80BD Ver 2 compatible remote device J61BT11N station occupies station station occu
183. T setting 20 8 me Device Monitor Load file Save file ID AMELSECYCCBD2lParamiParam cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 14 3 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupie ations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations 4 oa 4 stations Retrycount count MER Automatic reconnection Modules station count Standby master staton No master station master station No 8 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms Other settings 14 4 14 4 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 1 4 Creating a program Create the program for reading the remote input RX writing the remote output RY reading the remote registers RWr and writing remote registers RWw from to the local station The following illustrates the relation between the I O operations and the user program when sending receiving data between the master station and local station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used IBM PC AT IBM PC AT compatible PC compatible PC Master station No 0
184. UBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 3 4 List of link special registers SWs The data link status can be checked by the word information link special registers SWs When the standby master station is controlling the data link availability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station availability is identical to that of a local station Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 1 7 unido m d Available Not available Number Description station station Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are specified 00 Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to SW0007 01 to 64 Specifies a single station from 1 to 64 The specified number indicates the station number of a temporary error invalid station Specifies a temporary error invalid station SWO0004 0 Not specified as a temporary error invalid station 6044 1 Specified as a temporary error invalid station 0005 b15 b14 b12 to b3 b2 605m Temporary error swoo04 invalid station SW0006 specification 1 SW0005 606 SWO006 SWO0007 5100007 607 Multiple temporary SWO0003 error invalid 6034 station specification Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the station for which line tests are executed SWO008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed for all stations 6081
185. Wr buffer memory of the local Check the user program station Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 17 22 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot communicate from a local station remote register RWw to the master station remote register RWr The local station does not operate with the specified number of occupied stations Cannot stop data link Cannot restart data link The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does not start up The local station or standby master station does not start up and the ERR LED turns on Faulty stations cannot be detected Faulty statio
186. Ww size to Station No 64 RWw offset Station No 64 RWw size Station No 1 RWr offset Station No 1 RWr size to Station No 64 RWr offset Station No 64 RWr size App 27 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Example When a local station with the expanded cyclic setting and a remote I O station with the points setting are connected Local station Station No 1 occupies 2 stations expanded cyclic Master station setting octuple setting Remote O station Remote I O station Station No 3 occupies 1 Station No 4 occupies 1 station remote I O points station remote I O points setting 8 point setting setting 8 point setting 384 points of RX 16 24 words Station No 3 RX size The lower 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 3 RX however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 4 RX size The higher 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 4 RX however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 1 RY offset Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RY Station No 1 RY size 24 18H 384 points of RY 16 24 words Station No 3 RY size The lower 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018 is the corresponding size for station No 3 RY however because a value less than one word
187. X Getting Started n Connect to a Projector MX Calculator Documents Sticky Notes Paint Q Snipping Tool 4 XPS Viewer Pictures Computer Control Panel 890 Windows Fax and Scan Devices and Printers K Remote Desktop Connection Default Programs amp Magnifier Help and Support gt AllPrograms gor Control Panel _ E Adjust your computer s settings Category User Accounts and Family Safety Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems Ga ee Ae ES Appear nd Personalization op background Adjust sereen cezelution View networkstatus and tasks Choose homegioup and sharing options Hardware and Sound Clock Larinae are Rea View devices and printers Adda device Ease of Access Connect to a projector Lt Windom suggest Adjust commonly used mobily setings Optimise Ti Programs Uninstall s program Change keyboards or other input methods EE Sptemantsecly Te orn Cont Parl Control Pane Home VETE Review your status and resolve cues Change L 2 System and Security Netwerk end Internet Hardware and Sound Restore your computer to eatiertime d Windows Firewall Progrems Checkfirewall status Alowa program through Windows Firewall Ucar sey gl System Vi
188. X5F to RX50 Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX5F to RX50 RY6F to RY60 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 RX6F to RX60 Programmable controller CPU eeeeeee The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master station and the local stations 4 FUNCTION ee MELSEC Word information from the master station to all local stations 9 The program uses the mdSend function to write the word information to the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station The remote register RWw is used as the word information for writing to be used by local station systems 10 The information in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote registers RWr of all local stations The remote register RWr is used as the word information for reading to be used by local station systems 11 The word information stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station PC AT compatible PC Master station _ Station number 1 Station number 2 Programmable CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations controller CPU LL RWwi 10 9 i mdSend P RwwB 10 4 FUNCT
189. Y MELSEC Replace Directory D MELSEC Common INCLUDE 3 Reference the folder containing the include Lookin INCLUDE file Mdfunc h has been saved in the following directory during installation User specified folder COMMON INCLUDE Ge Folder name E Open My Network 3 Places Cancel 4 Add include lt mdfunc h gt at the beginning of your program 11 8 11 8 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 2 Library file setting 1 Start Visual C NET 2003 2005 2008 Window AE Debug Processes Ctri Alt P and select Tools Options gt Connect to Device Connect to Database Connect to Server Add Remove Toolbox Items Add in Manager Build Comment Web Pages Macros Activex Control Test Container Create GUID Dotfuscator Community Edition Error Lookup ATLIMFC Trace Tool OLE COM Object Viewer 5 External Tools Customize Options 2 Inthe folder area of the Options dialog box L rA For Visual NET 2003 C3 Source Control library files Text Editor Database Tools v xi select Projects VC Directories an For Visual 2005 2008 Device Tools TEENA HTML Designer vCInstallbir atlmfcVib H i Projects VCInstalDir PlatformSDK ibiprerelease select lt Projects a
190. Y PW LRUNLERR X012345 67 X89ABCDEF STATIONNOZ TERME a p o 0 402010842142 1 X10111213141516 17 X1819 1A1B1C1D1E 1F 6 ON EREREREREH MITSUBISHI 121980 AJessBTC1 32D1 X10 X1F C DA DG 424V 24G X4 X8 XC X10 X14 X18 X1C x1 X5 X9 XD X11 X15 X19 X1D COM x2 X6 XA XE X12 X16 X1A 1 DB SLD D FG X3 X7 XB XF X13 X17 X1B X1F COM 00 6969 9 9 12 4 12 4 MELSEC 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 12 4 Creating a Program This section explains how the created program reads data from the remote input RX and writes them to the remote output RY in communications with remote I O stations The following illustrates the relation between the remote I O stations I O operations and the user program when controlling the remote I O stations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC i User progam 000
191. Y SOFTWARE MELSEC 2 Other settings screen Other settings Retry count Automatic reconnection station count a Cancel Default Standby master station No Delay information setting 0 41 50 micro sec WDT setting 2 502 8 ms Set the retry count for the case of a communication error when a transient 1 Retry count NA transmission error occurs 2 Automatic reconnection station Set the number of modules that can be automatically returned in one link scan Set 0 to Delay information setting 6 button Saves the settings and closes the Other settings screen 7 button Closes the Other settings screen without saving the settings 8 Default button Set default values as parameters in the Other settings Refer to Table 6 1 in Section 6 1 For details of the parameter settings refer to Chapter 6 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 6 Operating the Target settings screen Set the logical station number to access a multiple CPU system CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Channel No Channel No 81 v Logical Sta No 65 Sta No 0 Target CPU PLC No 1 X Target setting list Logical Sta No Target CPU Device Monitor Load file Save file New 1 ChameiNo No Select the channel for setting the Select he channel for setting the Target 2 L
192. administrator authority Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display driver Or update the Windows operating system The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed 2 Uninstallation procedure 1 Uninstall the software package from the control panel of Windows If the dialog box confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation make the setting to keep all common files If deleting common files other applications may not operate normally 3 When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally the icons registered in the Windows Start menu are deleted 4 When uninstallation is failed When the uninstallation is failed perform the following procedure 1 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Display the Run screen from the Windows Start menu 3 Append A and execute Setup exe of the CD ROM Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you D Disk1 Setup exe A OK Cancel Browse 4
193. ae For the display details refer to the Slot1 board above 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 2 Board detail information screen Board detail information 1 Channel No 81 15 2 Sta No D Master station er 2 mode Save SB SW 16 3 Transmission rate 156kbps 4 Data link status In data link 5 Error status Normal 6 Board type J80BD J61BT11N 7 Product information 070310000000000 B 8 IRG No 21 9 ROM version 10 11 1 0 port D800 D8FFH 12 Present Error No Error 13 Link scan time ms Max 22 Min 14 Current 14 14 LED information RUN MST LOCAL ERR Sw PRM TIME 1 Channel No Displays the channel number 2 Sta No Displays the station No station type and operation mode 3 Transmission rate Displays the transmission rate Displays the data link status in the CC Link system There is no polling from the master station and Disconnecting no request polling the data link is in the cut off status 4 Data link status Disconnecting link error Data link is in the cut off status due to a line error Data link is in the cut off status due to any other Disconnecting other During line test The line test is being conducted During parameter setting test The parameter setting test is being performed from the master station The disconnected station is b
194. al ems Help D MELSECICCBD2 PARAM Ver2 M cbd 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 3 Quitting a utility The following explains how to exit each utility 1 Exiting CC Link Ver 2 Utility To exit the utility click the button at the bottom of the utility screen 7 CC Link Ver 2 utility nj Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test r 5101 Channel No 81 LED information Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN ERR Data link status In data link Error status Normal Device Monitor D AMELSECYCCBDZTPARAMYVer2 M cbd 2 Exiting the Device Monitor Utility To quite the Device Monitor Utility click Menu Exit on the menu bar When a dialog box is displayed click the button to quite the Device Monitor Utility Device Monitor Utility Setting Device Write DataF Batc monitor 16 point register monitor 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 4 Saving parameters into file The following describes how to save set parameters into a file The parameters to be saved are those set on the Parameter Setting screen refer to Section 9 2 5 and the Target Setting screen refer to Section 9 2 6 All parameters for channels No 81 to 84 are saved 1 Click the button on the utility screen 7 CC Link Ver 2 utility nj Other station
195. ansportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Jun 2005 SH NA 080527ENG A First Printing Nov 2005 Jun 2006 Mar 2007 Oct 2007 Jan 2008 SH NA 080527ENG B SH NA 080527ENG C SH NA 080527ENG D SH NA 080527ENG E SH NA 080527ENG F Correction Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 3 Chapter 9 Section 17 1 1 Correction Section 2 2 4 Section 3 2 Section 8 6 Section 17 2 1 Correction Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 11 2 Section 11 4 Section 11 8 Addition Section 11 3 5 Section 11 3 6 Section 11 7 Correction
196. arameters of the master station Check the parameters Check the station number setting Check the switch settings for the faulty station Check that the cable is properly wired Check that the shield of the cable is grounded Connect the terminal resistors that match the cable type used to the terminal stations at both ends of the CC Link system 17 23 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure The remote device station is not Are there any errors in the initial settings of the Check the parameters operating normally remote device station Check the user program When multiple remote stations are powered off at the same time at 156 kbps the L RUN LED goes off temporarily The A80BD J61BT11 set to the local station does not operate The A80BD J61BT 13 does not operate 17 24 What is the setting for the number of retries ME rate Reduce the number of retries Is the CC Link Ver 2 compatible ABOBD J61BT11 ROM version or later used for the network Check the mode of the master station where the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 Check the ROM version of the ABOBD J61BT11 mode or remote net additional mode Is the CC Link Ver 2 compatible ABOBD J61BT13 ROM version Q or later used for the network Check the mode of the master station where the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 Check the ROM
197. arger station number than the slave station applicable to Ver 1 Changing the conventional standby master station to local station set at the parameter CC Link system before change Standby Remote I O Remote I O Master station master station station station No 0 No 1 No 2 No 4 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible CC Link system after change Remote net additional mode Master station Local station Remote I O Remote I O Standby Remote device station station master station station No 0 No 1 No 2 No 4 No 5 No 6 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 2 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible ee itional mode mode Changed from standby master Remote device station to local station station added Changed to Ver 2 Standby master station compatible board module added Setting method The setting is performed at lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 Precautions for cyclic points increase setting a Whether system can be configured or not The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not in each station A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 Q80BD J61BT11N QJ61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 AJ61BT11 Remote station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61BT11 Intelligent device AJ61QBT11 station A1SJ61QBT11 Local Standby Local st
198. aster staton 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 model Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Offline 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection Oth 9 station count 1 Modules 12 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms 3 E d 13 All connect count 1 Modules Table 15 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station type Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word yp cyclic Sta station points station select 14 1 Intelligent device station poss 32 points No setting gt _ opo o p o opo op op 15 3 15 3 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 15 3 Setting up the intelligent device station The settings of the intelligent device station switches are shown below Transmission rate setting switch Station No setting switch moe sens Module 10 x1 AJ65BT R2 0 1 C Y N MITSUBISHI MELSEGAuesBT R2 RS 232 C 04 04 904 wo mo Qs L RUNO ERR O YvcO 024 654 654 YO wopE SW cara RESET L ERR O 07 o De iita 681 Mode setting switch RS 232C transmission specification setti
199. ated device type does not exist Check the designated device type 16433 _ r 40311 The designated device number is out of range Check the designated device number 16448 Do not issue the request that generated the error to the A module does not exist 2 40404 designated special module 16449 Thehumbetordevespolntsds out ot rinde Check the head address and number of access points 4041 P ge and access the devices within the existing range ae Corresponding module is abnormal Check if the designated module is operating normally ree A module does not exist at the designated location Check the start I O number of the designated module 28672 to 32767 Errors detected by intelligent function modules such as the Refer to the user s manual of the access target 7000 to 7FFFH serial communication module intelligent function module Device type error 40577 The device type designated for the request destination 9 81 station is invalid This is checked by the request destination s link module Device number error The device number designated for the request destination 40578 station is out of range 9 82 A device number other than multiple of 8 was designated for bit device designation This is checked by the request destination s link module Error in the number of devices points The number of points set for the destination station is out of 40579 range 9E83u A device number other than a multiple of 8 wa
200. ation station No 4 Occupies 1 station 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 13 2 2 Setting the master station 13 11 The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting MELSEC The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section 1 1 RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF rer 2 FF 4 pa ea qe 1 rd 13 11 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 v Other settings perational settings Oth Other settings 2 Sta No Type 0 5 Master station a al Retry count 3 Transmission rate 156kbps 21 Occupied Sta 4 Mode Remote nel Ver 2 mode v Input for Err Sta t e
201. ation Default occupies 2 stations occupies 3 stations occupies 4 stations Set how to handle the input data in the event of a data 6 Input for Err Sta link error Setting item Hold Clear Default Section 4 4 7 5 Occupied Sta Other settings Set the number of retries to be performed when a 7 Retry count communication error occurs Setting range 1 to 7 Default 3 8 Automatic Set the number of slave stations that can be returned to reconnection the network within 1 link scan station count Setting range 1 to 10 Default 1 Section 0 Delay information Set 0 to Delay information setting setting Set the watchdog timer monitoring time Unit 8 ms Setting range 0 to 32767 Default 250 x1 Refer to Section 4 3 4 for the standby master function 11 WDT setting PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC Setting required X Setting not required Master Local station Reference station section master station Setting item Description Station information Settings Set the number of slave stations connected to the 12 All connect count master station Including reserved stations Setting range 1 to 64 Default 64 Station information Set the type of the relevant station Setting range Ver 1 remote I O station Default 13 Station Ver 1 remote device station type Ver 1 intelligent device station Ver 2 remote device station Ver 2 intelligent device stat
202. ation Duplex function 7 b9 information OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master station OFF Operates as the master station controlling data link ON Operates as the standby master station standby SB006A 5 6 b10 SB006D Parameter setting bE6u b13 status SBOOGE Host station 6 b14 operation status SB0070 Master station 7 bO information SB0071 Standby master 7 b1 station information SB0072 Scan mode setting bE7u b2 information Operation specification when CPU is down status SB0073 BE74 b3 SB0074 Reserved station bE7u b4 specified status SB0075 Error invalid station 7 b5 specified status Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 E74 b6 SB0077 Parameter receive 7 b7 status Host master standby master operation status SB007B BE7u b11 17 32 17 32 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 6 List of link special relays SBs 5 5 cel ERE x Not available Number Name Description Online station station Slave station retreshrioreed clear Indicates the parameter set slave station refresh forced clear setting status in SB007C Gace of setting status in case of programmable controller CPU STOP 5 7 b12 OFF Refresh programmable controller CPU ON Clears com
203. ation Standby master station master Slave station Remote device Remote station station station station Master station Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 QJ61BT11 O Cyclic transmission enabled A Cyclic transmission enabled on condition lt Cyclic transmission disabled x1 When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode of the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 and the local station is in the remote net ver 1 mode of the QJ61BT11N or is the QJ61BT11 the local station can communicate with the master station but cannot confirm the data of the ver 2 compatible station Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station Ver 2 mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 Station Occupies 1 station Remote input RX Os Station number 12 Station number 3p Station number 4 Remote output Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 compatible remote output RY remote inputRX Station number 3 Remote output Station number 1
204. ation does not support transient transmission Attribute definition error Specification error of the transmission was executed although B804 station not supported transit transmission B805 Number of data error B80D Setting range error The number of data is out of rage The combination of the set address and number of points exceeded the valid processing range MELSEC Detectability Master Local station station Corrective action Check if the target station is an intelligent device station Check the requested module and cables Set the target station in the intelligent mode Access code setting An access code attribute that does not Set the correct access code error exist was set attribute 9 Use the correct access code Set the number of data points to a value in the range from 1 to 960 bytes Review the attribute definition Review the specified content of the target station number Or check the function version and Software version of the target local station Set the number of data to a value in the range from 1 to 100 when writing and 1 to 160 when reading B807 Address demnitiam arr The address was not a multiple of 16 Set the address to a multiple of when a bit device was accessed 16 when accessing a bit device Set so that the number of processing points does not exceed the device range B814 File register capacity The file register capacity was not set Set
205. ation of the AJ65BT R2 sssssssssessseeeenennenenen een rennen nen rentre trennen nnns 15 5 19 4 2 Data transmlisslOH 192 a rei neige sui id eite sud do tu cte te t dp a Rt 15 7 15 4 3 Data receptionis i e eae utet aleae aetas 15 8 15 5 Executing the Data perde nd opp eed dne ip ned lo peintres 15 9 15 5 1 Checking the data inkstai serorea raen a eterne nte tnt nnt tet tente 15 9 15 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program ssseeeeenn 15 11 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 16 1to 16 16 16 1 Configuring a 61 1 eene rennen rennen 16 1 16 2 Setting the Master Station ssssssssssssseseeeeeneneeneen rennen retener enne nennen nnns 16 2 16 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting ssssseeeneeeneennen enne 16 2 16 2 2 Parameter Settings i iet quie eiii be tiae tite iudi iie 16 3 16 3 Setting up the intelligent device station 65 075 2 53 16 4 16 4 Creating a Program 2 tace ttai ee ae te te ese nce ge ne d tco E n e d 16 5 16 4 1 Initial Lect oan tust ea beu 16 5 16 4 2 Zero point return Control intret tette totes teinte eto Feet oe dao re Pe Toe oe de uo 16
206. ation status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the user program Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Set the number of occupied stations to 1 or 4 Check the cable connection visually or with a line test Check the parameters for local station Check the operation status of the programmable controller CPU in the corresponding station Check the parameters Are there any duplicate station numbers Check the station number setting Is 65 or larger station No set to the local station Check the station No setting and parameters of including the number of occupied stations the local station or standby master station Does the mode of the master station match that of Check the parameters of the master station and the local station or standby master station local station or standby master station Check the p
207. ations that are currently running 44 LLT communication setting error FFD4u An attempt to set an LLT communication has failed 45 Ethernet control error Retry FFD3u Control cannot be porormedpropeny in Etnginet Check if the system is operating normally communication Memory may be insufficient Close all other 46 USB open error applications that are currently running FFD2u Initialization and opening of the USB port failed Check if the system is operating normally Restart the system Conditioned random read is set from a software such as GX Developer Wait until the conditions are satisfied Clear the condition settings Exit the program and restart the PC TEL error Setup the package again Consult with the dealer regarding the problem Random read condition unsatisfied error Random read cannot be performed because the random 1 read condition is not satisfied A 48 0 Maximum open path value error ices The number of open paths exceeds the maximum value Close several paths 32 51 Exclusive control error Retry FFCDu An exclusive control error occurred Check if the system is operating normally MELSECNET 10 network system 4096 to 257 Errors detected in the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Refer to the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network 000 to FEFFu network system System reference manual 16384 to 12289 Refer to the user s manual of the Ethernet interface 000
208. be monitored Refer to Section 9 3 5 Monitor the device Monitor the specified devices Batch monitoring Monitor multiple devices at the same time 16 point entry monitoring Change the specified device values When word devices are specified When bit devices are specified Switch the display format during monitoring Other operations T Refer to Section 9 3 2 te n nnn Refer to Section 9 3 3 E Refer to Section 9 3 6 and 9 3 7 PE Refer to Section 9 3 8 T Refer to Section 9 3 9 T Refer to Section 9 3 10 and 9 3 11 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 2 Setting the batch monitoring Set the Device Monitor Utility so that it monitors only a single designated device 1 Menu selection Select Menu Batch monitoring on the menu bar Selectable for 16 point register monitor only 2 Display screen Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help ccoccccococcocococcoccococococococococsc 81 CC Link 1 slot Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Bit device Network No 0 Station No 255 Vertical indication Displays the current device status 1 Device Information To change the data format refer to Section 9 3 9 Displays the status of the network
209. between the master station and the local stations 1 Communication between the master station and the local stations by cyclic transmission The data communication between programmable controller CPUs and personal computers can be performed in n n mode using the remote input RX and remote output RY bit information used in local station systems as well as the remote register RWw and remote register RWr word information for writing and reading used in local station systems Programmable IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Local station station number 1 Local station station number 2 controller CPU CC Link Ver 2 board Network Network parameters parameters 1 Network Automatic refres Automatic refresh parameters parameters parameters Program Buffer memory Buffer memory Buffer memory jacere nci pecie 1 Pane SSeS 1 poop seco 1 i i Remote input Remote output Remote output Ri 4 1 3 1 3 1 5 Own station mdReceive BEEN fo Tink station number Receive area front Automatic refres Y local station No fl X send area local station No 4 3 A 3 Own station 2 mdReceive deer Receive from Link scan _ station number 2X Automatic refres _ local station No local station No P send area
210. board r z d os ERR OO 2 QQ 3 gt Description Shows the CC Link Ver 2 board status or communication status There are two different kinds of LED indications for normal and error 1 Normal status LED rame Sats When the RUN LED is COH OFF AWDT error has occurred or the board OFF or ON the LED RUN is being reset display becomes as shown Operating normally in the table at the right PN N No communication error has occurred or error has occurredinthe ERR Operation normal status identify the Flicker here is a faulty station or station No is CC Link Ver 2 utility SD board is being reset Refer to Section 9 2 2 Data are being transmitted RUN ERR Operating the Information No data have been received or the Q OFF screen for the Board board is being reset detail information screen Data are being received 2 2 Error status ple When the RUN LED is flashing the LED display Indicates the board is in the error status RUN table at the right OFF status Refer to 1 When an error has occurred OFF No OS start error has occured in the error status check the ON An OS start error has occurred a OFF Nediverresponse occured Ea refer to Section
211. board v Mount the CC Link Ver 2 board in the IBM PC AT compatible PC v Fix the CC Link Ver 2 board with the fastening screws of the IBM PC AT compatible PC v Attach the terminal block of the CC Link Ver 2 board Perform the wiring between the CC Link Ver 2 board and modules Refer to Section 8 6 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cable Power on the power of the PC AT compatible PC and install the Refer to Section 8 4 Installing and Uninstalling utility software the Software Package Test the CC Link Ver 2 board Refer to Section 9 2 8 Operating the Network Test screen v Set parameters for the CC Link Ver 2 board e Refer to Chapter 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Refer to Section 9 2 CC Link Ver 2 Utility v Start up the CC Link system y Run the program of the IBM PC AT compatible PC y Complete CAUTION When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a local board the setting on the master station side is required to operate the CC Link system For the master station setting refer to the user s manual of the board module which is used as the master station 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 2 Installation This section explains the handling precautions and installation environment of the CC Link Ver 2 board 8 2 1 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 board The following explains the handl
212. bytes own station access processing time Reading data from own station Writing data to own station mdReceive mdSend Personal computer CPU specification prias Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Pentium II 233MHz Pentium III 633MHz Pentium4 3GHz PentiumD 2 8GHz Intel Core2Duo 1 86GHz 5 2 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt remote I O station 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote I O station input The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote I O station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 3X14 1 5 4 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 3 2 1 5 7 5 ms 1 When reading RX from the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 3 5 3 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 2 Master station
213. ce station Local station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple eat PER ROREM ionic deua di ur OMNE ce E S sociae Lc ues diu NR Aadress Remote register RWw Address 4 00 RWw 0 4400 Stations REC eS Sp EE a ees RWw 2 4402 number 1 4 Rwa Rwa f RWw3 44031 4 4 04 RWw 4 4404n i aco RWrS 2 4C06 RWr6 B RWw6 44064 4acom l tt RR RWw7 4407 4 08 RWw 8 4408 RWr9 ooa ees RWwA 440 Station _ COB RWw B 440B Station number 2 4C0C RWw C 440 number 2 VN RWwD 440Du s RWwE 440 4 RWF 440 4 10 RWw 10 44101 aoe RWwit 4411n 4C12 RWw12 44126 RWw13 44134 i to to 53 RWw7FC __ 4BFCu RWED Pt RWw7FD RWw7FE s 11 o RWw FF 33 33 APPENDIX Appendix 5 Mode Selection Method MELSEC Three different modes are available for CC Link system to be applicable to various systems The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection Do you use CC Link YES for the first time Does the system compl
214. check in the following system configuration Execute user program of the local station within 10 minutes after an user program of the master station has been loaded When the remote output RYO 2 turns ON the remote input 1 turns ON When the remote output RYO 3 turns ON the remote input RXO 4 turns ON When data are set to the remote register RWw0 6 values are written to the remote register RWr0 5 When data are set to the remote register RWw0 7 values are written to the remote register RWr0 8 1 Master station Receive RXO RX 2 Local station RYO 3 Master station Local station station No 1 14 8 IBM PC AT compatible PC Send RYO RY 4 Local station RXO Occupies 4 stations 5 Master station n2 5555 Receive RWr0 RWr 6 Local station n1 XxX 55554 RWwO 7 Master station m2 x 55554 Send RWwO 2 RWw 8 Local station m1 xX 5555H RWrO Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 14 8 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 2 mode or the remote net additional mode 14 2 1 Configuring the system In this system 2 local stations shall be connected Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11
215. conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction 1 CC Link cables can be connected from any station number 2 Be sure to connect the terminal resistors supplied with the board module between the DA and DB terminals of both end stations in the CC Link system 3 Terminal resistors to be connected are different depending on the cable used by the CC Link system Cable type CC Link dedicated cable 110 Q 1 2 W brown brown brown Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable 130 Q 1 2 W brown orange brown 4 M3 screws are used for terminal block screws The type of applicable solderless terminal is 1 25 3 Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used b The master station can be connected at points other than both ends 6 A star connection is not allowed For the T branch connection refer to Section 8 7 T branch Connection Using the CC Link Dedicated Cable 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 7 The connection method is shown below QJ61BT11 9 Terminal Remote module resister Master board CC Link dedicated cable Simplified diagram Master board Q80BD J61BT11N Remote module Q81BD J61BT11 Local module DA d END Terminal m ta DA Terminal resistor DB resis
216. cted stations 1 to 32 100 328141 Number of connected Semen tlt D 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft i 39 cm 15 35 in stations 33 to 48 40 cm 15 75 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 39 cm 15 35 in amp 20 m 65 52 ft Number of connected stations 49 to 64 RA CILE 69 cm 27 17 in 30 m 98 43 ft 70 cm 27 56 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 3 The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above PECIFICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Example When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps and 43 remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using the CC Link dedicated high performance cable because the cable connecting the second and third stations is 35 cm 13 78 in the maximum overall cable distance will be 80 cm 31 5 in First Second Third 4th 43th Master station Remote I O station Remote device Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote device station station Xe PES JN P 20 1 3 28 ft 50 19 69 in 5 13 78 in 50 19 69 in 2 For a system consisting of remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent device stations Local station Local station or Intelligent or Intelligent device station device station Remote I O statio
217. ction Select Setting Device setting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box For batch monitoring For 16 point entry monitoring Device Setting Device Setting Des Device evice Type Device Type lt Device Type x npub Device Type Svv special register Block NetworkNo Block Network No DeviceNo v k 0000 24 DeviceNo gis ue o HEX C DEC C OCT 0000 E Register Device List Bit device Word device Sw 0000 Execute Set the type and block network number of the device to be monitored To monitor the own station device of the CC Link Ver 2 board set as shown below Own station device to be monitored Device type to be designated RX X RY Y 1 Device Type SB SW RWw RWr Random access buffer Buffer memory 2 Device No Set the head number of the device to be monitored HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 3 button 4 Register Device List 5 button 6 button The only devices that can be monitored by the 16 point entry monitoring are those that random access is performable If any device that does not allow random access is designated a device type error 3 will occur For whether or not each device allows random access refer to Chapter 10 Accessible Devices and Ranges 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 6 Changing word device values The designated word device data can be changed as follows 1 Me
218. ction describes the combinations of boards with existing software 1 When using the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N and other interface boards in the same PC SW1DNC CCBD2 B Software package Supported OS Has a E veda nT4o WP xppro XP Serer vista apad win7 2000 Home 2003 Q80BD J71LP21 25 SWODNC MNETH Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD J71BR11 08080 01 216 17 T 21X Q80BD J71LP21GE tet eels SWOIVDWT P PLE ATOBDE SW1IVDWT COM f fe fe fe fe A70BDE J71QBR13_ SW2DNF MNET10 oe ATOBDE71QLR23_ SWaDNF MNETIO o x x x x x x x Jswapnr counk x x x x x x x x ABOBDE J61BT11 SWSDNF CcLINK x x x x x x x x A80BDE J61BT13 SWADNF CCLINK x jwawrccuweB x x x x x x x x x Eo El ABOBDE AZUSHS1 SWoDNF ANUB o x x x x x x x SUNS opp SW1DNC CCBD2 B e qu x x x x x eee fe x x x x x x edt bb Fee be px px x x p px x x x x g Q80BD J71GP21 SX SW1DNC MNETG B m duh 1 11M NT 4 0 Windows NT Win 2000 Windows 2000 XP Pro Windows XP Professional XP Home Windows XP Home Edition Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Vista Windows Vista Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Win7 Windows 7 O Valid combination A Ope
219. ction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
220. cyclic AA Ver Remote 1 0 station single 1 station 305 Ver1 Remote 1 0 station 11 ue ono Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station 1 Remote 1 0 station 1 Remote 1 0 station 1 Remote 1 0 station 1 Device Monitor Loadfie New 13 14 15 16 17 18 PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC Table 6 1 Parameter setting items list Setting required X Setting not required Local station Setting it Description Master Standb Reference station a y section master station Sets a station No and a type of the own station Setting range 1 Sta No Type Sta No 0 1 to 64 Default 1 Section Type When Sta No is 0 Master station 4 3 4 When Sta No is 1 to 64 Local station Default Standby master station Set the transmission speed of the CC Link Ver 2 board 2 Transmission rate Setting item 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps Default Set the operation mode of the own station Setting item Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Default Offline Operational settings Make the expanded cyclic setting when increasing the number of cyclic points Can be set in remote net ver 2 4 Expanded cyclic mode or remote net additional mode Setting item single Default double quadruple octuple Set the occupied station count by the own station Setting item occupies 1 st
221. d cyclic setting and the occupied station count Table 6 3 Remote station points setting options Occupied station count Station type li Occupies 1 Occupies 2 Occupies 3 Occupies 4 cyclic No setting station stations stations stations 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points s d devi Single Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved device fixation station station station station station Ver 1 intelligent device 32 points 32 points 64 points 96 points 128 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved station station station station station 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Double station station station station station Ver 2 remote device 32 points 32 points 96 points 160 points 224 points Ver 2 intelligent device 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved station station station station station 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Octuple station station station station station 128 points 128 points 384 points 640 points 896 points Quadruple PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC 6 2 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility
222. dby master stations y Local station For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station Stores offset and size information of Slave station offset and RX RY RWw RWr for each remote station local Read onl size information station intelligent device station and standby master station Read write Link special relay SB Stores the data link status enabled write may be disabled depending special register Stores the data link status on the Appendix SW device 4 2 4 Appendix 4 2 3 Use prohibited 1 The specified data is stored and used by Read write Appendix Random access buffer transient transmission enabled 4 2 5 Use prohibited 1 Stores the automatic update data when Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read write Appendix buffer AJ65BT R2 communication using the enabled 4 2 6 automatic update buffer Use prohibited Available Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors x2 Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected App 16 App 16 APPENDIX a Hexadecimal Decimal Ver 2 compatible remote input RX 3 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY 3 17407 Ver 2 compatible remote register 17408 RWw Master station 19455 For sending Local station For sending receiving Ver 2 compatible remote registe
223. ded cable also increases noise resistance 1 Grounding of shielded of shield cable a Ground the shield of the shield cable as near the exit as possible from the control panel If the ground point is not near the outlet the cables after the ground point will cause electromagnetic induction and will generate a higher harmonic noise b Peel part of the shielded cable s sheath and ground a wide section of the exposed shielded section against the control panel Clamp fittings can be used as shown below Note that the painting on the inner side of the control panel against which the clamp fitting is contacted must be masked Screw Clamp fitting ra Shield section Paint mask Note The method of grounding by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Y Crimp terminal 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC 2 Grounding procedure for the CC Link dedicated cable a Always ground the CC Link dedicated cable connected to the CC Link system master station local station and remote station Since the CC Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable remove a part of the outer sheath Then ground the exposed part of the shield indicated in the figure below using as wide a surface area as possible Bg A Control panel CC Link dedicated All of this a
224. direction from the standby master station to the master station 4 62 switching and data link Off Not acknowledged startup On Direction acknowledged Complete status of Shows the complete status of the data link startup switching SBO0043 master station direction from the standby master station to the master station 5 4 03 switching and data link Off Not complete startup On Switching complete Shows the data link status Off Data link control by the master station On Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station Off No standby master station On Standby master station exists SB0070 Master station 5E7H b0 information SB0071 Standby master 5E7Tub1 station information b Special link registers SW The following explains the special link registers SW related to the standby master function The numeric values in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses Table 4 6 List of special link registers related to the standby master function Number Name Description Not applicable Master Standby master The execution result of the master station switching and data Result of master link startup direction by the SB0001 is stored SW0043 By 643 station switching and 0 Normal data link startup Other than 0 An error code is stored Refer to Section 17 3 5 SW0073 Standby maste
225. dom Own station random Batch access buffer Random Retentive timer Batch current value Random Own station link register Batch for sending Random Own station link register Batch for receiving Random S device of FXCPU Batch Random 1 Cannot be accessed with the A2ACPU S1 2 Cannot be accessed with the Q00JCPU 10 3 10 3 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES MELSEC Access destination A0J2H 2 51 A1S H 20 51 Device A1SJ H A2AS S1 QCPU Personal A2C J A2USH S1 ior Q mode computer A2N S1 Q02 H A A2S H Q06H A Batch Own station buffer memory x x x x x Random Q QnA SEND function Batch x x with arrival acknowledgment Random A A A Q QnA SEND function Batch x x without arrival acknowledgment Random s Batch x Direct link input P Random i Direct link output Baten x x x x x x Random Batch Random Batch Random Direct link special relay Batch network module side Random Direct link special register Batch network module side Random Batch Random Batch Random Other station random access Batch buffer 3 Random Batch Random Batch Random Batch Random Batch Random Batch Random Direct link relay Direct link register x x x x x Special direct buffer register
226. duct e When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring always attach the computer s main cover Failure to do so may cause an electric shock e When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached e Always ground the SLD terminal of the board and the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the board resulting in short circuits or malfunction e Prevent foreign matter such as swarf or wire chips from being attached onto the board Failure to do so may cause fires failure or malfunction e Be sure to fix the wires or cables connected to the board by placing them in a duct or clamping them If not fixed cables may be dangled and accidentally pulled causing damage to the board and cables and malfunction due to bad cable contacts e Do not install the control lines together with the communication cables or bring them close to each other Doing so may cause malfunctions due to noise e When removing the communication cable or power supply cables from the board do not pull the
227. e A 20 Remote I O station A 19 Remote I O station communication 1 3 Remote I O station points setting 4 38 Remote module A 20 Remote net A 20 Remote net additional mode A 20 4 39 Remote net ver 1 mode A 20 Remote net ver 2 mode A 20 4 40 Remote output sse A 20 Remote A 20 Remote station sss A 19 Replacing the CC Link Board App 5 Required Items when Making an Inquiry 17 50 Reserve station function 1 8 4 34 Reserved station specified status SB0074 ERE 17 32 Reserved station specified status SW0074 17 37 Restoring parameters App 11 20 RWW 20 lR EN A 20 RY tatit A 20 Sample Programs 11 15 SB 20 Setting App 46 Setting the input data status from a data link faulty station 4 24 Slave
228. e Manuals Product List Appendix 2 3 Appendix 7 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080526 N This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Precautions for use Operating environment of the personal computer used Refer to Section 2 2 Applicable Systems in this manual When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a standby master station Refer to Section 2 2 2 for combinations of modules when using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a standby master station When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station any of local modules cannot be used as a standby master station Restrictions on the CC Link Ver 2 board installation Installing the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link Ver 1 board to the same computer and using both of them is not allowed Multi thread communication The MELSEC data link library cannot be accessed from multiple threads within the same process Access the MELSEC data link library with a single thread Service applications The MELSEC data link library cannot be accessed from Windows Service applications Access the MELSEC data link library from a user application I
229. e master station in the initial status before parameter communication starts the switch to the standby master station will not be executed e When the master station becomes faulty the data link control will automatically be transferred to the standby master station but the cyclic transmission data will not be transferred Perform this transfer with a user program Once permitted the information before the detection of abnormality at the master station will be output to each station f The master station duplex function is not available The control is switched from the standby master station to the master station only once Therefore if the standby master station goes down after the control has been switched to the standby master station due to master station failure the CC Link system will stop the data link The control will not be switched even if the master station functions properly g When the master station goes down and the data link control right is switched to the standby master station the standby master station number is identified an error number Corresponding bits in SB0080 or SWO0080 to SW0083 turn ON Specifying a standby master station as an error invalid station prevents this kind of error detection h When the standby master station is controlling the data link parameters cannot be updated i If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its original position without
230. e parameter after all transient requests are completed or before any are requested Set a longer monitor time setting value If an error persists check the requesting station and cables Set the target station to a local station or intelligent device station Always turn RY off and then issue a request after the response is completed 17 44 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station Transient m The numbers for request data and communication number Check the line response data do not match mismatch error The same channel cannot be used at the same time Change The selected channel is already in use the channel number or try not to use the same channel at the same time Execute the mdSend instruction after a while Check to see if Receiving channel in The channel of the target station is more than one request is made use already in use to the channel of the target station from own station and or multiple stations Increase the arrival monitor time if this error occurred in the mdReceive instruction and when The arrival monitor time has exceeded another station was executing when the resend count is 0 or the the SEND instruction ndSend mdReceive instruction was executed instruction in case of the CC Link when the mdReceive instruction Ver 2 board execution request flag was not tu
231. e user accounts Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Customize colors Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and PE Region Change keyboards or other input methods m Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Additional Options settings Name Category Add Administrativ AutoPlay Backupand Color Dateand Default Hardware eTools Restore C Management Time Programs Device Manager Aaa 5 Game Indexing Interet Controllers Options Options p am iSCSlInitiator Keyboard Offline Files Penand People Near Performance Input Devices Me Informatio Phoneand Power Modem Options Printers Problem Programs Network and Reports a Features Sharing Ce e Regional and Scanners and Language Cameras q L TabletPC Taskbar and Settings Stat Menu Speech a Windows Windows Windows Defender Firewall Mobilit Speech Recogniti Welcome Accounts Center d Windows Windows Sidebar SideShow Syne Center System AE Windows Windows Anytim CardSpace 45 Windows Update i To next page App 42 1 Select Start Control Panel 2 Select Classic View 3 Select Administrative Tools App 42 APPENDIX From preceding page Date
232. ecial relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 5E0u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u DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 5 ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 EO SEFu FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO 5 10F 10E 10D 10C 10 10 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 5 1 11F 11 11D 11 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 5F2u 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 5F3u 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 5 4 14F 14 14D 14C 14B 14 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142
233. eck the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on 17 19 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot turn on off the remote output RY of a remote device station Data cannot be received by the remote register RWr of a remote device station 17 20 Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Is data read from the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the remote device station initialization procedure registration being executed Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the paramet
234. ed OS SuportedOS O name name Server SwibsECSKeE T c pee es sepes E xl secs jSwapsECSKPE x x x x x x x SW2D5F OLEX E x X x jewasExwoeE x x x x x x x Sw3D5F cskPE x x x x x x x Communication SW3DSFOLEXE x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x X px x x px px x x x x Support SW3D5F XMOP E SW2D5C ACT E x posee uet Lise se Pe rs 7 O 309K 3 14Q SW 1D5C SHEET E x A A O 08 4101 swaosEFGePWE x x x x x x x swscePWE x x x x x x x GX Developer SWSDSC ePPwWE x x x x x x x x x x px px x d E d x x x x x x X x x x x x Lo Eo E macom o gt Lo LL SW8D5C GPPW E A O amp 58 8 91V Win 2000 Windows 2000 XP Pro Windows XP Professional XP Home Windows XP Home Edition Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Vista Windows Vista Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 X x x x Win 7 Windows 7 Valid combination A Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later X Invalid combination App 48 App 48 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 9 External Dimensions Appendix 9 1 Q80BD J61BT11N 147 5 79 158 6 22 141 5 55 9
235. edged ON Stop instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Stop complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBOOOC signal can be executed or not OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgement status temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgement completion status temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station established Specified station number is invalid Indicates the acknowledgement status temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgement completion status temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged x1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only 17 30 17 30 17 TROUBLESHOOTING 580040 4 b13 SBO04E BE4u b14 SBOO4F BE4u b15 580050 5E5x SBO05A 5 5 b10 SB005B 5 b11 SB005C 5 5 b12 SB005D 5 5 b13 5 005 5 5 b14 SBOO5F 5 5 b15 SB0060 5E6x 60 SB0061 5E6 b1 SB0062 E
236. eeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeceaeeecaeeeceaeesaeeseaeescaeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeeceeseiseeseaeesentessieees 9 34 10 1 Accessible DEVICES urarena T tend esie eiu etie e POR e Da a 10 1 10 1 1 Own station personal computer 10 1 10 1 2 10 2 10 2 Accessible Ranges eet aii icd Loa v ca ic tea Ree io ta ee 10 4 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 11 1t0 11 18 11 1 Overview of the MELSEC Data Link Library seseeeeneeeeneneenn nennen 11 1 11 2 Functlon blst E E d pee e e eR eeu 11 2 11 3 Settings for Using amp 11 3 11 3 1 When using Visual Basic 5 0 and Visual Basic 6 0 11 3 11 3 2 When using Visual C 5 0 and Visual C 6 0 11 4 11 3 3 When using Visual Basic NET 2003 2005 2008 11 6 11 3 4 When using Visual C NET 2003 2005 2008 ssssssssssseeeeenennen nennen 11 7 14 4 Programmirig Precedure cer tren de e Dade est eg ertd 11 10 T 1 5 8 eie aditus 11 12 11 6 Station Number Settings enceinte t ee ce i Dee Dee oue e PR eeu 11 12 11 7 Network Number and Station Number Specification for Extended Functions
237. eeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeentenas 4 48 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIMES 5 1to 5 18 5 1 Link Sean Times c aa Lata td dud cde 5 1 5 2 Cyclic Transmission Processing Time sssssssseeeeeneeeennen nennen ener enne 5 3 5 2 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt remote I O 5 3 5 2 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board gt remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 5 5 5 2 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board local station programmable controller Ver 2 compatible slave station ssssseseeeeeeneeeneenenne nennen nnns 5 9 5 2 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device 5 13 5 3 Transient Transmission Processing Time sssssssssseseeeeeeneeeneen enne 5 14 5 3 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt local station programmable controller 5 14 5 3 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device 5 16 5 4 Station Status at EMOn nennen nennen nennen rnnt rris 5 17 5 4 1 Status of the master station and remote I O station at 5 17 5 4 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device Station at eror
238. efer to section 8 6 Turn ON the PC and insert the SWnDNC CCDB2 B into the CD ROM drive on the PC Refer to section 8 4 1 1 Refer to section 8 4 1 2 Install the software package for the CC Link Ver 2 board Test the CC Link Ver 2 board Refer to section 9 2 8 Restoring parameters Insert the SWnDNC CCDB2 B into the CD ROM drive on the PC Activate Parameter backup restore tool and restore the parameters Reading them from files and saving them to the board Refer to Appendix 3 1 1 1 5 Refer to Appendix 3 1 3 END SWnDNC CCBD2 B CC Link Ver 1 board 1 Insert 3 Remove J 2 Back up CC Link Ver 2 board 4 Mount H 5 Restore gt App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 2 2 Replacing a CC Link Ver 2 Board with a CC Link Ver 1 Board or a CC Link Board with Another of the Same Version The following describes how to replace a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board or a CC Link board with another of the same version 1 When replacing a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board change the terms shown in Appendix 2 1 as follows Changing a CC Link Ver 1 board to a CC Link Ver 2 board Changing a CC Link Ver 2 board to a CC Link Ver 1 board PM i When replacing a CC Link board with another of the same version the following steps shown in Appendix 2 1 are not required Backup and restoration of CC Link b
239. eing returned to the During Auto Returning network automatically During reset The CC Link Ver 2 board is being reset 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC Displays the status of the error currently detected 5 Error status An error was detected in the station No station type setting the llega An error arising from some other cause was detected 6 Board type Displays the model name of the CC Link Ver 2 board Product information Displays the product information serial No function version IRQ No Displays the IRQ No Displays the ROM version Displays the 2 port memory Displays the I O ports An error code of the error currently identified on the CC Link Ver 2 board is indicated in 12 Present Error hexadecimal notation When no error is currently detected No Error is displayed 13 Link scan time ms Displays the maximum minimum and current link scan times Displays the following LED states Flashing A WDT error has Green Operating normally occurred or the board is being reset No communication error There is a faulty All stations are faulty has occurred or the station or station No board is being reset is duplicated Due to cable disconnection or noise affecting the transmission path no responses are received from all stations 14 LED information MST G Operating as the master Operating as other than bud station the master station Switch setting error No switch se
240. en a problem occurs on the CC Link Ver 2 board check Table 17 1 to find the appropriate section to go to Table 17 1 Troubleshooting flow by the problem occurrence type Error detail Cause determination method Action The RUN LED on the CC Link 17 1 2 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 The system did not operate 3 Sue Ver 2 board is flashing board is flashing normally when the CC Link Ver 2 board was started The RUN LED on the CC Link 17 1 3 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 Ver 2 board is not flashing board is not flashing 2 The RUN LED is flashing after the CC Link Ver 2 board 17 1 2 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 startup board is flashing 17 1 4 List of messages of error events that may 3 Errors are displayed on event viewer p PR occur when starting the driver 1 Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct The software is not normally installed and install an appropriate display driver The setup screen remains even after selecting to restart the Or update the Windows operating system 17 system at the completion of the utility installation 2 Read the precautions described in Section 8 4 1 2 and perform the operations described in Section 8 4 1 3 c 1 Logon as a user with administrator authority and execute the uninstallation 2 Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are c
241. en nennen rennen nennen ens 13 1 193121 Configuring a System 1 2 nee ee added abeat dtesat beaten 13 1 13 1 2 Setting the master station AAE A EA EAA EE 13 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting 13 2 2 Parameter setting amp 13 3 13 1 3 Setting up the remote device station sssssssseeeenenennene nennen 13 4 19 14 Creating Program iet stie petet mit ie Ei cie td aid ire Ea ias 13 5 13 1 5 Executing the data lInk ciii eet eee editi tte ree tret et ine eal 13 7 1 Checking the data link status ssssssssseseeeeeneenen nennen enne nre 13 7 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sse 13 9 13 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional 13 10 13 2 1 Configuring the system needed ce cree teet eee ea ege ctetu ie Poe eee eu quan 13 10 13 2 2 Setting the master 5 55 13 11 1 Switch setting channel No setting 13 11 2 Parameter SettingSs 2 ede eedem atu ten ade hieme ten adden 13 12 13 2 3 Setting the remote device station 13 13 13 2 4 Creating prOOralm xni iet tiet inen im dine 13 14 13 2 5 Executing the data link
242. end transmission Transient mdReceive transmission Transient mdSend write transmission Transient B fe mermdiy i Read transmission mdReceive 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 4 Intelligent device station communication The communication between the master station and the intelligent device station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission a Cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with the intelligent device station positioning start positioning end etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using the remote registers RWw and RWr IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Program CC Link Ver 2 board Intelligent device station Read Remote input Link scan Remote input RX RX Write Remote output Link scan Remote output mdSend RY RY Write Remote Link scan Remote mdSend register register L RWw RWw Read Remote Link scan Remote mdReceive register register L RWr RWr b Transient transmission Read and write operations can be performed for the intelligent device station buffer memory at an arbitrary timing using the mdReceive and mdSend functions respectively IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Intelligent device station Program mdSend Transient transmission
243. ensation Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH No condensation Frequency 10 to 57 Hz 57 to 150 Hz 5 to9 Hz Acceleration 9 8 m s 9 8 m s 0 075 mm 3 5 mm Specifications 9 to 150 Hz When there is intermittent vibration Vibration resistance Amplitude Conforming to JIS B 3502 Sweep Count 10 times each in X Y and Z axis When there is Frequency 10 to 57 Hz 57 to 150 Hz 5 to 9 Hz 9 to 150 Hz Acceleration 4 9 m s 4 9 m s continuous vibration IEC 61131 2 0 035 mm 10 times each in X Y and Z axis Conforming to JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in 3 XYZ Operating environment environment No corrosive gas corrosive gas present Operating height 1 2000 m 6562 ft or less Installation area On the control board Over voltage category 2 Pollution rate 3 Amplitude 1 75 mm Sweep Count Shock resistance 1 The board cannot be used under the environment where the atmospheric pressure is higher than the one at the altitude of O m 2 Indicates the distribution area where the device is assumed to be connected from the public power distribution network to the local machine device Category II is applied to the devices to which the power is supplied from a fixed equipment The surge resistance voltage of a rated 300 V device is 2500 V 3 This is an index w
244. er RWr10 7 and the remote register RWw10 8 When a value is set to the remote register RWwO 10 the value is written to the remote registers RWr0 11 and 12 14 14 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC 1 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Receive 2 RX 3 4 IBM PC AT Gand 5 compatible PC RY 6 7 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Recoge m 9 Occupies 2 stations 10 Local station station No 5 Send 11 RWw IBM PC AT compatible PC 12 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 14 15 Master station RX80 Local station No RY80 Local station No RY80 Master station RYO Local station No RXO Local station No RXO Master station RWrO Local station No RWw10 Local station No RWw10 Master station RWwO Local station No RWrO Local station No RWrO MELSEC 5 5 m1 AAAAH 1 m2 5 m3 AAAAH 14 15 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC MEMO 14 16 14 16 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 This section gives f a system configuration example to
245. er information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check if the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the prodr remote register RWr buffer memory Quiche cc Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW007
246. er settings ai Operational settings 2 Sta No Type 1 24 Local station E3 mmm Retry count i Set 3 Transmission rate 156kbps 2 Occupied Sta Seerup statio cfa 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Input for Err Sta vid fies Automatic reconnection station count Station information settings Standby master station No Default All connect count Remote station No Sta No Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta ints Delay information setting 29 50 micro sec WDT setting 250 E ems Device Monitor Loadfie Savetie D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 14 3 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Ch IN hannel No 812 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type Master station T Local station P Standby master station 3 Transmission rate 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps Remote net Ver 1 mode gt Remote net Ver 2 mode Erste md Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Occupie ations settings Occupies 3 stations 4 Occupies 4 stations station count BJ WOT seti Station information 1 Set station No 5 to the Ver 2 I
247. er to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 1 When reading RX from the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors Refer to POINT in Section 5 2 for the processing time 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Remote device station RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote d
248. est flag RX18 is turned OFF on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 10 Turns OFF the initial data processing completion flag RY18 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 12 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY19 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 13 The initial data setting completion flag RX19 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV is turned ON 16 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY19 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 17 The initial data setting completion flag RX19 on the AJ6SVBTCU 68DAV is turned OFF and the remote READY RX1B is turned ON 20 Writes digital values to the CH1 digital value setting area RWw0 on the AJ6SVBTCU 68DAV Analog values are output from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 13 6 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 1 5 Executing the data link Turn ON the remote device stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote device stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station Check the status of the master station 1 Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows SI ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally gt eO lt No error has occurred Data are being transmitted
249. est signal ON the initialization request signal RY4 is turned RY4 8 The AJ65BT R2 turns OFF the initialization normal complete signal RX4 and the initialization error complete signal RX5 15 6 15 6 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 15 4 2 Data transmission MELSEC The following illustrates the relation between the intelligent device station s I O operations and the user program on the PC and their data transmission The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC User program t mdReceive 2 6 med x Remote outputs RY Intelligent device station station No 1 RXO transmission normal complete RX1 transmission error complete i3 7 RYO transmission request Buffer memory 200H transmission data size designation area 201H mdSend 1 to transmission data designation area 3FFH 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program 1 Writes the send data to the transmission area of the AJ65BT R2 buffer memory 2 Turn ON the transmission request signal RYO 5 Reads out the transmission normal complete signal and the transmissi
250. etely utilize the previous system YES Select the remote net ver 1 mode Is aver 2 compatible station added to the previous system Are the sequence programs for ver 1 stations utilized Are modules to be connected only local stations NO of points used per station 32 points for RX RY and 4 points for RWw RWr without lem NO Y Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 2 mode ver 1 mode Do the modules to be connected include a ver 2 compatible station YES 1 Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 2 mode additional mode App 34 Select the remote net ver 2 mode Will a ver 2 compatible station be connected in the future Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 1 mode ver 2 mode YES App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 6 Communication with the Redundant CPU This section explains communication with the Redundant CPU when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used 1 Incorporation into redundant system In a Redundant CPU system be sure to set the CC Link Ver 2 board to a local station Master station Standby master station Control system Standby system noe c a a Ss
251. eter file Parameter information Parameter backed up CC Link parameter Parameter file setting Set parameter file path File path C MELSEC PARAM Param bdp Browse Exit Parameter backup Parameter restore Read parameter settings from board driver and back up them to parameter file Parameter informatio Parameter backed Browse Backup Exit Parameter backup restore tool Parameter backup Parameter restore Read parameter settings from board driver and back up them to parameter file Parameter informatid Parameter backed p bdp Browse Backup 1 2 3 Activate the Parameter backup restore tool Refer to Appendix 3 1 1 Select the Parameter backup tab in the Parameter backup restore tool dialog box Enter the destination where the parameters are to be backed up in the Parameter file setting field You can also specify the backup destination in the Open File dialog box by clicking the button After specifying the backup destination click the button The confirmation dialog box is displayed Click the button The parameters are backed up to the specified file When the backup ends successfully the dialog box on the left is displayed Click the button to end the backup All of the CC Link board parameters currently stored in the PC are backed up App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix
252. eters in the standby master switching sample program They correspond to the path values obtained by mdOpen 4 33 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 Useful Functions This section explains some useful functions for the CC Link Ver 2 board 4 4 1 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future reserved station function This function prevents any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that is not actually connected but that will be connected in the future from being treated as a data link faulty station by the master and local stations When the master station is in the Remote net ver 2 mode the number of points for a reserved station can be set to 0 Station that will be connected in the future Reserved station Station number 4 eae 1 I 1 1 ee Master Local station Reserved station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Stationnumber8 Station number 10 Lo me ro Remote station Remote station 4 stations Remote station Remote station occupies occupies occupies 2 stations 1 station 2 stations 1 station If any of the connected remote stations local stations intelligent device stations or standby master station is designated as a reserved station the data link with that station will become disabled Setting method The setting
253. ethod with 30 to 300MHZ 2 Connection of power and ground cable The power supply cable and ground cable for a personal computer should be laid out as follows a Provide a grounding point near the power supply of personal computer Ground the FG frame ground terminal of the personal computer and the SLD shield terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board with the thickest and shortest grounding wire wire for grounding possible about 30 cm 11 81 in or less in length Since the FG and SLD terminals function to ground the noise generated in the personal computer it is necessary to ensure the lowest possible impedance As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself contains a large amount of noise and thus short wiring prevents from functioning as an antenna b Twist the ground cable leading to the ground point with the power supply cable By twisting it with the ground cable the noise leaking from the power supply cable may be grounded at a higher rate However twisting the power supply cable with the ground cable may not be necessary if a noise filter is installed on the power supply cable 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 7 1 3 Cables MELSEC The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise Use shielded cable for the to be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shiel
254. evice station output turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 2 2 2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 2 When writing RY to the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RWr lt Remote device station RWr The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote device station until RWr of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board is changed Formula Normal
255. ew amount of RAM and pracessor speed Check the Windows Experience Ind Appearance and ue Allow remotescces Seethename ofthis computer Bj Device Manager Personalization Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Porter Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Changewhatthe power buttonsdo Changewhen the computer sleeps Dia Backup and Restore Backup your computer from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade MEN Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 Administrative Tools NZE 4 Detragment your hare arve automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updstes Cresteanc format nard disk partitions 8 Vien event logs B Scheculetasks 5 setings Troubleshoot common computer problems Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer User Account Control helps prevent pctentialy harmful programs from making changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control settings Always notify Never notify me when Programs ty to install software or make changes to my computer Imake changesto Windows settings B Not recommended Choose this ony if you need to use programs that are not certified for Windows T amp because they do not support User Account Centro Nevernotify User Account Con
256. f repeat error 8254 203 The acquisition data selection error Exit the program and restart the PC Setup the package again 203 The number of SFC cycle error Consult with the dealer regarding the problem H 8258 2042 The scheduled time setting error eer Function count error 2043 8260 2044n System information error 8262 et 8263 2047 RAM operation error 8264 2048 Boot former ROM forwarding failure oo Boot former transfer mode specification error 2049 8266 204 Not enough memory Backup drive former boot drive ROM error 204 8268 Em 8269 2040 RUN time detaching error 8270 204 Module has already registered 8271 3 204 Password registration data full error 8272 2050 Password unregistration error 17 11 m 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Return value 8273 20514 Remote password error 8274 20524 IP address error 8275 Error argument when requesting outside time out value Exit the program and restart the PC 20534 range amp Setup the package again Ed Instruction cast undetection Consult with the dealer regarding the problem H RET Trace execution type error 20554 8278 20569 Version error 16384 to 20479 Refer to the user s manual of the access target CPU A request that could not be processed was received Change the request destination 16432 7 40309 The design
257. f the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws within a tightening torque range 0 59 to 0 88N m Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless Terminal Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed Do not disassemble or modify board Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 1 Tighten the terminal block mounting screws and terminal block terminal screws of the CC Link Ver 2 board using a torque within the following ranges Clamping torque range Terminal block terminal screws M3 5 screws 59 to 88 N cm Terminal block mounting screws M3 5 screws 59 to 88 N cm 2 Refer to the instruction manual provided with the personal computer for the clamping torque of the CC Link Ver 2 board mounting screws 3 As a countermeasure to power surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lighten
258. from the loop if SB43 is on break Sleep 100 Wait for 100ms 11 Confirm the time out if Counter gt 100 printf SB43 ON conformation timed out n 4 FUNCTIONS printf Press any key getch mdClose path exit 0 Set the station number Set the device type SB equivalent to special M Set the device number ret mdDevRst path StNo DevT ype DevNo on SB1 switching request StNo OxFF DevType 5 DevNo 0x1 if ret 0 printf SBI ON processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 1 Read SW equivalent to special SD 43 switching result MELSEC Size 2 1 Set the size of sending data StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 14 1 Set the device type SD equivalent to special D DevNo 43 Set the device number retzmdReceive path StNo DevType DevNo amp Size amp RecvBuf 0 if ret 0 printf mdReceive SW43 read processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 if RecvBuf 0 amp 0x0800 0 II Exit from the loop if SB43 is on break Sleep 100 I Wait for 100ms if RecvBuf 0 0 Exit when the switching result is abnormal printf Failed to switch to the standby master station Wn printf Press any getch mdClose path exit 0 Use the paths that are already obtained in other processing for the path param
259. g parameter 3 button Compares the parameters written to the Cenk Ver 2 T with those set in the utility When an error occurs the error location is displayed 1 No error details are displayed on the Online operation screen If one or more errors are detected the following dialog box appears CC Link Ver 2 utility 2 1 difference points were detected Do you save detailed information To check the error details click Yes and specify where the information is to be saved The detailed error information is saved in the text file so that it can be checked using Windows Notepad for example 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 5 Operating the Parameter Settings screen Various CC Link Ver 2 board parameters are set on this screen 1 Parameter Settings screen 8 7 6 F CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Onlinelopefation Parameter settings Target settirlas Memory 1 0 test Test 1 Use board setting Check all the Channel No thpt yoli use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 2 Channel No Channel No 81 3 Sta No Type m Master station 4 Transmission rate Channel No B4 Other settings 9 ccupied Sta Default 10 Input for Err Sta Hold Clear Check 11 All connect count 13 m pea Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station 5 Remote net Ver 2 mode 12 Station information settings Occupied Sta singe
260. gt RWrB0 to RWrB3 gt RX5A0 to RX5BF gt RY5A0 to RYSBF RWwB4 to RWwB7 gt RWIBA to RWrB7 gt RX5CO to RX5DF gt RXBEO to RX5FF gt RY5CO to RYSDF gt RWwB8 to RWwBB gt RWrB8 to RWrBB gt RYSEO to RYSFF gt RWWwBC to RWwBF gt RWrBC to RWrBF RX600 to RX61F gt RY600 to RY61F gt RWwCO0 to RWwC3 gt RWICO to RWrC3 gt RX620 to RX63F gt ad RX640 to RX65F gt o RY63F gt RWwCA to RWwC7 gt RWrC4 to RWrC7 gt RY640 to RY65F gt RWwCs to RWwCB gt RWrC8 to RWrCB gt 52 RX660to RX67F RY660 to RY67F gt RWwCC to RWwCF gt RWrCC to RWrCF gt RX680 to RX69F gt RX6A0 to RX6BF gt RY680 to RY69F gt RWwDO to RWwD3 gt RWIDO to RWrD3 gt RY6AO to RY6BF gt RWwDA to RWwD7 gt RWrD4 to RWrD7 gt RX6CO to RX6DF RY6CO to RY6DF gt RWwD68 to RWwDB gt RWrD8 to RWrDB gt RX6E0 to RX6FF IN RX700 to RX71F gt RX720 to RX73F gt RX740 to RX75F gt 60 RX760to RX77F RY6E0 to RY6FF RWwDC to RWwDF gt RWrDC to RWrDF RY700 to RY71F RWwEO to RWwE3 RWrE0 to RWrE3 gt RY720 to RY73F gt RWwEA to RWwE7 gt RY740 to RY75F gt RWweE8 to RWwEB gt RWrE8 to RWrEB gt RY760 to RY77F RWwEC to RWwEF gt RWrEC to RWrEF gt 61 RX780 to RX79F gt RY780 to RY79F RWwFO to RWwF3 gt RWrF0 to RWrF3 gt RX7A0 to RX7BF RX7C0 to RX7DF gt RY7AO to RY7BF gt RWwF4 to RWwF7 gt RWrF4 to RWrF7 gt RY7CO to RY7DF gt RWwF8 to RWwFB gt RWIF8 to RWr
261. he CC Link Ver 2 board and remote device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on remote device stations refer to the User s Manual for the remote device station 13 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 1 mode 13 1 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and only one remote I O station as shown below is used Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC EY Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV Remote device station station No 1 4 Occupies 3 stations 13 1 13 1 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 1 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF 2 OFF 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board infor
262. he functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 4 The functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board are described in Chapter 4 To learn about the data link processing time Chapter 5 The data link processing time is described in Chapter 5 To learn about how to set parameters Chapter 6 How to set parameters is described in Chapter 6 To learn about the conformation to the EMC Directive Chapter 7 Conformation to the EMC Directive is described in Chapter 7 To learn about the CC Link Ver 2 board settings Chapter 8 The CC Link Ver 2 board settings are described in Chapter 8 10 To learn about how to install and uninstall utility software Section 8 4 How to install and uninstall utility software is described in Section 8 4 11 To learn about the utility software operating procedures Chapter 9 The utility software operating procedures are described in Chapter 9 12 To learn about accessible devices and ranges Chapter 10 The device specifications and the contents of the information stored in the system area are described in Chapter 10 13 To learn about how to use the functions Chapter 11 How to use the functions is described in Chapter 11 14 To learn about how to communicate with each station Chapters 12 to 16 Some examples of communication between the master board and each station are described in Chapters 12 to 16 15 To learn about the actions to take when the system does not operate Chapter 17 The
263. he switch setting status SWO06A e Check the loading status SW0069 Check to see if the ERR LED on the master station is flashing Refer to Section 17 3 2 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote I O station performing remote I O station data link Check the communication status of the master Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal stations of the CC Link system Are the correct terminal resistors connected Has an error occurred in the master station station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default Check the parameter information SW0067 parameters being used Check the user program Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009
264. here are too many transient requests overload error to the corresponding station A transient transmission was B604 Line test in progress performed while a line test was in Wait a while and then resend progress B605 Cannot access the Access to the communication buffer Waita whiieand then resend communication buffer failed B607 Target station CPU error se is An emorin the targetstations Check the target CPU There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station when the Wait a while and then resend requesting station is the AJ65BT G4 transient transmission A8GT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 overloaded status board Transient request overload error 17 45 17 45 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code hexadecimal Error description Transient request error Response timeout Module mode setting error B780 B801 Access code error B803 Number of data points error Cause of error details The target station was not an intelligent device station when the requesting station is the ABSGT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 board A response was not received from the requested station when the requesting station is the ABGT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 board A transient transmission was executed even though the target station was set in the I O mode An access code that does not exist was used The number of data points is out of range Invalid attribute definition or transient the target st
265. hich indicates the occurrence rate of the conductive object in the environment where the device is used Pollution rate Il indicates that only non conductive pollution may occur with a possibility of generating temporary conductivity due to accidental condensation 2 General specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board or the personal computer whichever is lower must be satisfied after installation PECIFICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 Performance Specifications Table 3 1 shows the performance specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 Table 3 1 Performance specifications Item Specification Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Can select from 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps Overall cable distarice Varies according to the transmission rate Refer to Section 3 2 1 3 2 2 maximum transmission distance Maximum number stations 64 Refer to Section 2 1 for the conditions for the number of connected stations master station In remote net ver 1 mode Occupied station count 1 or 4 station s Can be changed by the utility parameter setting when mounted to local station In remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode 1 to 4 station s Can be changed by the utility parameter setting Remote I O RX RY 2048 points Remote register RWw 256 points master station remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote station local s
266. ication logo Specification Test details Standard value EN55011 Radiated noise EN55011 Conducted noise EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic immunity EN61000 4 4 Fast transient burst noise EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation EN61000 4 12 Damped oscillatory wave immunity Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product Immunity test in which a damped oscillatory wave is superimposed on the power line 30M 230MHz QP 30dB V m 30 m in measurement range 1 230M 1000MHz QP 37 dB u V m 30 m in measurement range 150k 500kHz QP 79 dB Mean 66 dB 1 500k 30MHz QP 73 dB Mean 60 dB 15kV Aerial discharge Power line 2kV Digital I O 24V or higher 1kV Digital I O 24V or less gt 250V Analog I O signal lines gt 250V 10V m 26 1000MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz Power line 1kV Digital I O 24V or higher 1kV 1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Mean value 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC 7 1 2 Installing devices in the control panel Installing devices in the control panel has a considerable effect not only securing safety but also shielding the noise generated fr
267. igent device station while executing a line test A station number other than the head station was designated by a temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request All stations were in data link error status when either of the following requests was made SB0000 data link restart SB0002 data link stop The station number of the slave station is outside of the range between 1 and 64 A duplicate station number was specified for the connected board module including the number of occupied stations However this excludes the duplicate head station numbers of other stations whether or not a temporary error invalid station is designated or if the own station is stopped Transient target station A transient request was issued to other 2 aot Check the target station error than the intelligent device station rocessing request error A line test request was issued while Perform a line test during link during link stop the link was stopped startup Designate a station number that is no greater than the maximum communication station number Set station numbers to designate SW0003 SW0004 to SW0007 Check whether the remote station and the intelligent device station are started and the cable is connected properly Designate the head station by a temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request Request again after the data link becomes normal Set the s
268. in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details on the setting refer to Section 9 2 5 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 3 3 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station setting the input data status from a data link faulty station This function sets the input reception data status from a data link faulty station 1 Target input reception data The following shows the target buffer memory areas Remote I O station Remote device station station number 1 Local station station number 2 station number 3 Local station Master station station number 4 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote ontput RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 1 eren number 1 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Remote input RX Remote output Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 Remate NE i M 1 Station number 3 Remote register RWw Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2
269. ing as shown below we oo E Personal i i computer AC E2 1 Surge absorber for lightening 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the personal computer E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 2 2 Installation environment Refer to the instruction manual provided with the personal computer for information on how to install the personal computer in which the CC Link Ver 2 board has been mounted NCAUTION e Always ground the SLD terminal of the board and the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction 8 2 3 Mounting and removing the terminal block Since a 2 piece type terminal block is used the CC Link Ver 2 board can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block The following shows how to mount and remove the terminal block _ Screwdriver thts pees i i EE E e Remove the two screws on both ends of the terminal block and pull the terminal block out 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 3 Component Names and Settings This section explains the component names and settings of the CC Link Ver 2
270. ing precautions of the CC Link Ver 2 board NCAUTION Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the board Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board While handling the board be sure to keep it free of static electricity Static electric charges may damage the board or result in malfunction Be careful not to let foreign objects such as swarf or wire chips get inside the personal computer They may cause fires failure or malfunction Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed Do not drop the board and the terminal block or subject it to any excessive shock It may damage the board and the terminal block or result in malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before performing work such as installing the board and wiring If all power is not turned off there is a risk of electric shock or damage to the product Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections o
271. ing status of each station when a communication problem occurs in the data link refer to Chapter 5 of this manual e If a cable dedicated to the CC Link is disconnected this may destabilize the line and a data link communication error may occur in multiple stations Make sure to create an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the system will operate safely even if the above error occurs Failure to do so may result in a serous accident due to faulty output or malfunctions e When performing the control of the personal computer in operation changing data configure an interlock circuit in a user program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained When performing other controls of the personal computer in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote personal computer from an external device problems that have occurred on the personal computer side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the personal computer for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the user program e Do not write any data from the user program into the system area of the board buffer memory Writing data into the system area may cause a CC Link system
272. ing time ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 1X 2X2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 2X 2X2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 4 When writing RWw to the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 2 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt local station programmable controller Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Local station programmable controller RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a local station s CPU device turns on off until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off
273. ink due to power off recovers and returns to the normal status it will join the data link automatically 7 Input data status setting from a data link faulty station The data entered received from a data link faulty station can be cleared or the status immediately before the error can be restored 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 8 Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station backup station for the master station if a malfunction occurs in the master station The personal computer can be set as a standby master station only when the master station is also a personal computer If the master station is a programmable controller CPU the personal computer cannot be set as a standby master station Data link control Standby master station by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 2 Station number 3 Data link control Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 in progress Standby Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Standby master station Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 2 Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied
274. ion Make the expanded cyclic setting of the relevant station Can be set in remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode Setting item single Default double quadruple octuple Set the number of stations occupied by the relevant station Setting item occupies 1 station Default occupies 2 stations occupies 3 stations occupies 4 stations Set the points of the relevant station Setting range 0 points Default 8 points 8 points 8 Refer to points 16 points 32 points Table 14 Expanded cyclic Section 4 4 7 15 Occupied Sta 16 Remote station points Section 4 4 6 6 2 17 Reserve Specify the reserved station or error invalid station ae Invalid Setting range No setting Default Reserved station x Section station select Invalid station 4 4 2 Assign the buffer memory size for transient transmission to the local station the intelligent device station and the standby master station Setting range Per station Send receive buffer size 0 64 to 4096 words Default 64 Note that when it is set to multiple stations the total send receive buffer size for all slave stations must be within 4096 words Automatic automatic update buffer size 0 64 to 4096 words Default 128 Note that when it is set to multiple stations the total automatic buffer size for all slave stations must be within 4096 words 18 Intelligent buffer select word x1 Select the intelligent device stati
275. ion designation error installation status Reserved station designation error parameter Standby master station setting error Parameter change error Response error Transient target station error RY simultaneous on error 17 44 Cause of error details The total size of the communication buffer set with a station information parameter addresses 20h to 5Fx exceeded 4 k words The total size of the automatic update buffer set with a station information parameter addresses 20h to 5 exceeded 4 k words The standby master station designation parameter address 4 was set to a value other than 1 to 64 The number of retries setting parameter address 2u was set to a value other than 1 to 7 The number of auto return stations setting parameter address 3 was set to a value other than 1 to 10 A duplicate station number was set with a station information parameter addresses 20H to 5 The station information parameter addresses 20 to 5 setting does not satisfy the following condition 16 4 54 B 88 lt 2304 A Number of remote I O stations B Number of remote device stations C Number of intelligent device stations including local stations The number of occupied stations in a station information parameter addresses 20 to 5 was set to a value other than 1 to 4 The number of connected modules parameter address 1 was set to a value other than 1 to 6
276. ion rate 156 kbps 625kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps Tt a2 te os NI The final station number among a b and c This value includes the number of occupied stations but excludes reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 5 a Total number of occupied stations for remote I O stations b Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations c Total number of occupied stations for local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations NW The final station number between b and c This value includes the number of occupied stations but excludes reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 nuw a tw z a2 o 48 so N Number of connected stations excluding reserved stations ni a b c excluding reserved stations nw b excluding reserved stations ST Constant Must be the largest value among 1 to 3 below However 2 is disregarded when b 0 and 3 is disregarded when c 0 1 800 a X 15 2 900 b X 50 3 When c 26 1200 c X 100 When c gt 26 3700 c 26 X 25 F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 48 X BT X retry count 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC Example Using the following system configuration example when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station or tra
277. ion station Stores the execution result of the data link stop instruction with SWO0045 Data link stop SB0002 6454 result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station Temporary error oe e ation with SB0004 invalid station 6494 0 Normal specinication result Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Temporary error Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station SW004B invalid station specification cancellation with SB0005 64 specification 0 Normal cancel result Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Indicates the execution result of the line test with SB0008 Line test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test with SWOOA4F Parameter setting SB0009 64Fn test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Automatic CC Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is SW0052 added to a system using an automatic CC Link startup 6524 nK startup 0 Normal executoniresult Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 SW004D 640 SW0058 Detailed LED display status Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting 0 Cancel 1 Set
278. ions By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as reserved stations these will not be treated as data link faulty tations Reserved station function OQ Section 4 4 1 The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points If any of the connected modules is designated as a reserved station it cannot perform data link Prevents modules that will be powered off in the system configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4 4 2 setting network parameters Data link stop restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed Section 4 4 3 Error invalid station setting function Station number duplicate Checks for duplicate modules having the same station Section 4 4 4 check function number in the system E Allows access to any CPU of a multiple CPU system via a Multiple CPU syst rt Section 4 4 5 ulipie OG Ver 2 board sige Allows the I O points of the remote I O stations to be selected from among 8 points 16 points and 32 points reducing the Section 4 4 6 number of reserved points Remote I O station point setting Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased from 128 points for RX RY and 16 points for RWr RWw in the ver 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX RY and 128 points for RWr RWw in the ver 2 mode Cyclic points increase Section 4 4 7 4 Table 4 4 lists the transient transmission function Table 4 4 List of the transient transmis
279. ions and initial setting of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board pra SE RX78 RX78 initial data processing request flag pea RX79 RX79 initial data setting complete flag i RX7A 18 Mt ot a EE EL RX7B RX7B remote station ready puro ner SE Remote outputs RY 3 7 P M i RY78 initial data processing complete flag RY79 initial data setting request flag 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 16 5 16 5 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX78 With the initial data processing request flag RX78 gt ON turns ON the initial data processing complete flag RY78 Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX78 With the initial data processing request flag RX78 r OFF turns OFF the initial data processing complete flag RY78 Turn ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 12 Reads out the initial data setti
280. irection 0 forward direction Zero point return acceleration time selection 0 Zero point address 0 Zero point return deceleration time selection 0 Zero point return speed 2000 Zero point shift amount 0 Creep speed 1000 Zero point return torque limit value 300 Zero point return retry 0 no retry Speed designation during zero point shift 0 Dwell time during zero point return retry O Zero point return method Zero point return dwell time 0 5 counting system 2 zero point signal is not used Displacement setting after near point dog 1000 Zero point return direction 0 forward direction Zero point return acceleration time selection 0 Zero point address 0 Zero point return deceleration time selection 0 Zero point return speed 2000 Zero point shift amount 0 Creep speed 1000 Zero point return torque limit value 300 Zero point return retry O no retry Speed designation during zero point shift 0 Dwell time during zero point return retry 0 16 8 16 8 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 4 3 Positioning control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and positioning control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 Dt eee User program CC Link Ver 2 boa
281. is turned off Continue Continue 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 4 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station at error Table 5 2 lists the status of the remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station at error Table 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station at error Local station standby master station intelligent device station When the local station s programmable controller CPU is stopped Data link status data link continues Remote device station Remote input RX Continue Remote output RY Continue Remote register RWw Continue Remote register RWr Continue When data link for the entire system is stopped Input data setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Master station Local station All points off Remote input RX Continue Remote output RY Treats the own station send area with all 0 s 1 When stopped all points of only the receive area from the local station are set to off Remote register RWw Continue Remote register RWr Continue Clears the receive areas from other stations Retains the receive areas from other stations Retains the receive areas from other stations When a
282. isual Basic 1 When setting an include file Window E Debug Ctrl Alt P 105 Connect to Device Connect to Database Connect to Server Add Remove Toolbox Items Add in Manager Build Comment Web Pages Macros ActiveX Control Test Container Create GUID Dotfuscator Community Edition Error Lookup ATL MFC Trace Tool OLE COM Object Viewer Spyt External Tools Customize C3 Environment C3 Source Control C3 Text Editor Database Tools Debugging Device Tools HTML Designer Projects VB Defaults VC Build VC Directories Web Settings Windows Forms Designer C3 XML Designer 11 7 Platform Win32 Show directories For fei x nstallDir include vCInstallbir atlmfctinclude vCInstallDir PlatformSDKlincludelprerelease vCInstallDir PlatFormSDKinclude FrameworkSDkDir include Include Directories Path to use when searching for include Files while building a VC project Corresponds to environment variable INCLUDE OK Cancel 1 Start Visual C NET 2003 2005 2008 and select Tools Options 2 In the folder area of the Options dialog box select Projects VC Directories Set the directory type to Include files and click ES 11 7 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRAR
283. ith the intelligent device station positioning complete positioning start etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using the remote register RWw and remote register RWr IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Intelligent device station 1 Network parameters Program 3 4 6 9 Buffer memory Remote input Remote output Remote register Remote register RWr Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as initial data processing request and positioning complete Remote input RY Handshaking signals such as initial data processing complete and positioning start Remote register RWw Numeric data such as positioning start number and speed change value Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value and send speed 4 FUNCTIONS Data link startup MELSEC 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system automatically starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility Remote input 2 The remote input RX of the intelligent device station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the inp
284. iver software Locate end matal derer softwere manuaBy l G 0 Update Driver Software Network Controller i Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location D Driver Win2000 Browse V Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device End MELSEC 1 Open the Windows Device Manager screen Right click on Network Controller and select Update Driver Software 2 Click Browse my computer for driver software 3 Specify Drivers Win2000 of the CD ROM drive to be used for Search for driver software in this location and click the Next button Example D Drivers Win2000 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC b When installation is completed normally When the installation is completed normally PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller is displayed on the Windows Device Manager screen For Windows 7 is displayed next to the icon however the CC LINK Ver 2 board is recognized normally Device Manager File Action View Help amp 89 488 Computer H Disk drives H A Display adapters G3 DVD CD ROM drives eil Floppy disk drives E ci Floppy drive controllers 9 IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 9 IEEE 1394 Bus host con
285. k dedicated cables Ver 1 00 and CC Link dedicated high performance cables cannot be used together If used together correct data transmission will not be guaranteed Also attach the terminating resister which matches the kind of the cable Refer to section 8 6 x3 Using the CC Link Ver 2 board and the CC Link Ver 1 board in the same computer is not allowed Table 3 2 Number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Specifications Remote I O RX RY 8192 points Remote register RWw 2048 points master station remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum No of link points per system station standby master station Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Expanded cyclic setting Quadruple Octuple 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points No of link points Remote I O RX RY 30 points for 30 points for 62 points for 126 points for per station local station local station local station local station Remote register RWw 16 points 32 points Remote register RWr 16 points 32 points Remote RX RY 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies Remote register station Remote register eee Remote RX RY nes pe 3 stations RWw prom 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points PECIF
286. k the button Copy manufacturer s files from JD ADriversswine nn kd Browse End 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 2 Using Windows XP Windows 2003 R2 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller 9 If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended litsiail irom a istor specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options S Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers win2000_ v Browse O search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware End 1 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click the button 2 Select Search for the best driver in these locations Check Include this
287. l computers and number of boards that can be installed 1 Applicable personal computers The following table shows the operating environment for the CC Link Ver 2 board For details on the personal computer and operating system refer to the instructions on the following pages Windows supported personal computer GPU Refer to a Applicable operating system and the corresponding required personal computer Required memory PCI bus For Q80BD J61BT11N specifications e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2 5V DC 32 bit bus Basic clock 33MHz PCI Express For Q81BD Je1BT11 bus e Compliant with PCI Express standard Rev 1 0a 3 3 V DC Link width 1lane Basic clock specifications 100MHz performance Personal computer Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Service Pack3 or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System
288. lare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products 1 Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below Name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer strase 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 7 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 7 1 1 through 7 1 4 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the CC Link Ver 2 Board The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the control requirements and the applicable standards However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The final decision on the method for the EMC Directive conformance and the application must be made by the manufacturer of the machinery 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 7 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive EN5008 1 2 1995 EN61131 2 1996 MELSEC The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below All test items were tested by installing each device on a personal computer bearing a CE certif
289. le origin Herd drive on this computer M Show details This screen appears when user account control is enabled Click Allow or the Yes button Program Compatibility Assistant This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows Program SETUP En Publisher Setup Location E Setup exe Reinstall using recommended settings This program installed correctly Cancel If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the installation completion click This program installed correctly If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted click the button and close the screen Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings An incorrect module may be installed a Windows Security Q windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software gt Dont install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device V See details Click Install this driver software anyway 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 8 4 2 Uninstallation MELSEC This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package 1 Uninstallation precautions The following are the precautions when uninstalling the software package Log on as a user having
290. location in the search and specify DriversWin2000 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers Win2000 3 Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 1 7 Found New Hardware Windows needs to install driver software for your Network Controller Locate and install driver software recommended Windows will guide you through the process of installing driver software for your device Ask me again later Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device or log on Don t show this message again for this device Your device will not function until you install driver software Cancel End 1 The Found New Hardware screen is displayed Select Locate and install driver software recommended 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 4 Using Windows 7 eh Device Manager File Action View Help 9 51 e RE 4 Other devices iy Network Controller 3 Update Driver Software Disable Uninstall Properties Scan for hardware changes 7 Updrte Driver Software Network Controller How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows wil search your computer and the Internet for the latest dver software for your device unless you ve duabled tha feature in your device matallabon settings gt Browse my computer for dr
291. m a data link faulty 1 6 8 2 Installation environment 8 4 Intelligent module esses A 20 Installing the software package 8 7 Intelligent device station A 19 Intelligent device station communication 1 5 Internal current consumption 3 2 Line status 5 0090 17 39 List of CC Link Ver 2 Utility Functions 9 9 Link Scan 5 1 Link special registers SWS 17 34 Link special relays 5 17 29 Line test hardware 9 21 Line test 9 23 Local board A 19 Local module sese A 20 Local station A 19 Local station communication 1 4 Manuals essen A 16 Master and local modules A 19 Master board A 19 Master module sess A 20 Master A 19 Master station information 5 0070 17 32 Master station transient transmission status
292. malfunction A failure in the board may cause remote 1 not to turn on or off correctly For critical I O signals that may cause a serious accident establish a circuit to externally monitor them DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 94 in or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this user s manual Using this board in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the board e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Under tightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Over tightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged the body e
293. mation Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 v Other settings Operational settings gt 2 Sta No Type oa Master station d ke Other settings p y Retry count 3 Transmission rate 156kbps 21 Occupied Sta iE 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v Input for Err Sta amp Automatic reconnection station count 12 poem Station information settings Standby master station No o Default 1 3 All connect count 1 x Clear Delay information setting 0 2 50 micro sec 14 WOT setting 250 24 8 ms Device Monitor Load file Save file D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 13 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Ch IN hannel No 812 Channel No 82 Ne Channet No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type Master station Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode
294. me refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 1 2 2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 2X 2X2 1 1 10 31 ms x4 When writing RWw to the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 2 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station CC Link Ver 2 board and the intelligent device station varies depending on the type of intelligent device station used Refer to the User s Manual for the intelligent device module to be used 1 When reading RX and RWr from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access
295. monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 5101 Channel No 81 LED information Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN ERR Data link status In data link Error status Normal Device Monitor D MELSEC CCBD2 PARAM Ver2 M cbd 2 The Save As dialog box is displayed Name and save the file Save in PARAM v fae 7 Param cbd File name Param cbd Save as type CC Link Parameter File cbd Cancel Parameters can be easily imported to other systems by saving them as a file and reading the file from another system 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 5 Reading the file The following describes how to read saved parameters with the utility 1 Click the Load file button on the utility screen 7 CC Link Ver 2 utility Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Slot Channel No 81 r LED information Sta No O Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN ERR Data link status In data link Error status Normal Device Monitor Load file Save file Help Exit D MELSEC CCBD2 PARAM Ver2 M cbd 2 The Open dialog box is displayed Select the file to be read Look in PARAM 1 e Ir Param cbd File name Param cbd Files of type CC Li
296. mprising a CC Link system must be of Ver 1 10 2 All the data link cables must be Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables POINT If stations of Ver 1 00 Ver 1 10 are mixed in a system the maximum total cable length and the cable length between stations will be as specified by Ver 1 00 For the maximum total cable length and the cable length between stations for the Ver 1 00 products refer to Section 3 2 1 2 Definition of Ver 2 The CC Link Ver 2 board is defined as the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 type CC Link system master local interface board supporting the extended cyclic points 3 How to check the version The following logo is not shown on the Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link board On the side of the Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link board the CC Link logo is marked The Ver 2 compatible CC Link board has CCuinkEZI logos in the positions shown below CCuink coool 11 DB ua PECIFICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board 3 1 General Specifications 1 The following table shows the general specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board Item Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 3 Storage ambient temperature 25 to 75 Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH No cond
297. mum working set obtained in step 3 and execute the SetProcessWorkingSetSize 5 Release the user program handle by the CloseHandle function b Sample program When a program is set by Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 2003 NET2005 NET2008 The following is a setting example using Visual Basic NET2003 NET2005 NET2008 Example of min working set size 1MB and max working set size 3MB When programming with Visual Basic 5 0 or 6 0 change the type definition of variables id ph wkmin wkmax from Integer to Long Dim id As Integer User program ID variable Dim ph As Integer User program handle variable Dim wkmin As Integer Minimum working set variable Dim wkmax As Integer Maximum working set variable Dim bret As Boolean Return value Obtain the user program ID id GetCurrentProcessld Open the user program handle PROCESS SET QUOTA 256 ePROCESS QUERY INFORMATION 1024 ph OpenProcess 256 1024 False id Obtain the maximum working set size and minimum working set size of the user program bret GetProcessWorkingSetSize ph wkmin wkmax Set the minimum working set size to 1MB 1 1024 1024 1048576 wkmin 1048576 Set the maximum working set size to 3MB 3 1024 1024 3145728 wkmax 3145728 Change the maximum working set size and minimum working set size of the user program bret SetProcessWorkingSetSize ph wkmin wkmax Close the user program handle bret CloseHandle ph The set sizes sho
298. n Are there any duplicate station numbers e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWOO09B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 17 21 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot communicate from a local station remote output RY to the master station remote input RX Cannot communicate from the master station remote register RWw to a local station remote register RWr 17 22 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding local station performing data local station link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of the remote output RY buffer memory
299. n Software package we SWI1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 004 CC Link 2 utility 2005 04 01 COPYRIGHT C 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 2 To verify the version of the Device Monitor Utility Click Help Version on the menu bar of the Device Monitor Utility screen H 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 CC Link Ver 2 Utility This section explains how to operate the CC Link Ver 2 Utility 9 2 1 List of CC Link Ver 2 Utility Functions The following describes the functions of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Displays the various information station No transmission rate data link status etc of the CC Link Ver 2 board Sertion 9 2 2 Board information Displays the status of other stations currently connected to the CC Link Section 9 2 3 system Performs read write and verification of parameters the CC Link Online operation Section 9 2 4 Ver 2 board Parameter settings Sets the parameters of the CC Link Ver 2 board Section 9 2 5 Target settings Performs setups for accessing a multiple CPU system Section 9 2 6 Memory I O Test Diagnoses the CC Link Ver 2 board memory Section 9 2 7 Hardware test Tests whether or not the CC Link Ver 2 board is operating correctly Checks whether or not CC Link cables are correctly connected to Line test Hardware enable the data link Test Checks whether or not parameters are correctly set to perform the data Section 9
300. n 2EDu number 4 2 2 2F0 For station 2F1u number 5 2F2u 2 to 3DC For station 3DD number 64 3DE Master station RWr remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Remote register RWr Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw Address 1EO 1E1 For station 1E2 number 1 1E3u 4 1 5 For station 1E6 number 2 1 7 1E8u 1E9x For station 1EA number 1 1ECu 1EDu For station 1EE number 4 1EFu 1F0u 1 1 For station 1F2 number 5 1F3u to 2 200 For station 2DE number 64 2DFu 2 23 MELSEC APPENDIX Station Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2E3H 2 4 to 2E7H 2 8 to 2EBH 2 to 2 2 0 to 2 2 4 2 7 2 8 to 2 2
301. n Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address is 1 1 For station YOF to Yoo 0 For station number 1 Y1F to Y10 E1 number1 For station E24 For station number 2 E34 number2 For station 4 For station number rt E54 number3 i For station E64 Forstation number 4 f E7 number4 For station 1 E84 For station number 5 i E9 number5 to For station 15C4 For station number 63 15p4 Number 63 gt 1 For station 15E4 For station number 64 10 RY7FF to RY7FO i 15F number 64 1 1 1 20 20 APPENDIX S number S t t CN 8 o ation Buffer memory address 160 to 161H 162u to 163H 164u to 165u 166u to 167H 168 to 169H 16Au to 16BH 16 to 16DH 16 to 16FH 170u to 171H 172u to 173H 174 to 175H 176uto 177H 178u to 179H N ation Buffer memory address EOn to E1H 2 to E3H 4 to E5H to E7H to E9H to EBH ECu to EDH to EFH FOH to F1H F2u to F4u to F5u to F7H F8u to F9u 2 App 21 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memor
302. n Procedure The following explains the operations of Parameter backup restore tool Appendix 3 1 1 Starting and exiting the tool 1 Starting the tool The following describes how to start Parameter backup restore tool a Insert SW1DNC CCBD2 B into the CD ROM drive b Click Start Run Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open G Tool US Prmbkup exe v OK Cancel Browse c Click the button in the Run dialog box and select the Parameter backup restore tool PrmBkup exe 5 x 1 PrmBkup exe is stored in the following folder CD ROM drive gt lt Tool gt lt US gt d Check the displayed path then click the button e The Parameter backup restore tool dialog box is displayed 2 Exiting the tool To exit the Parameter backup restoration tool click Close C in the system menu the button at the top right of the dialog box or button at the bottom of the screen App 9 App 9 APPENDIX Appendix 3 1 2 Backing up parameters MELSEC The following describes the procedure for backing up parameters Type the name of program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open G Tool US Prmbkup exe OK Cancel Browse RA Parameter backup restore tool Parameter backup Parameter restore Read parameter settings from board driver and back up them to param
303. n Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station Master station x2 x1 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations x2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Q Em 156 kbps 1200 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 5 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in to 39 cm 23 23 in 2 m 6 56 ft or more 110 m 360 9 ft 60 cm 23 62 in or more 150 m 492 15 ft 10 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in to 59 cm 23 23 in 50 m 164 1 ft R 60 cm 23 62 in to 99 cm 38 98 in 80 m 262 5 ft 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 See Ene 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 25 Mops 5 Mbps 2 m 6 56 ft or more 10 Mbps 80 m 262 5 ft 3 The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above PECIFICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when configuring the entire system with Version 1 10 modules and cable is shown below
304. n is operating as a local station the availability of the link s special relays is identical to that of a local station Table 17 6 List of link special relays SBs 1 5 Sonne x Not available Number Name Description Onie station station Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002 SB0000 5EOx Data link restart OFF Restart not instructed x ON Restart instructed Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is Refresh instruction SB0001 at standby master transferred to the standby master station 5E0n b1 switching OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stops the host data link SB0000 is used for restart However when the master station executes this the entire Data link stop system will stop OFF No stop instruction ON Stop instructed Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the SB0003 when changing RLPASET instruction 5E0u parameters by the OFF Not instructed stop refreshing dedicated instruction ON Instructed start continue refreshing Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as temporary error invalid stations The execution result of the request is stored to SW0049 OFF Not requested ON Requested Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by Temporary error SW0003 to SW0007 invalid canceling The execution result of the request is stored to SWO004B request OFF
305. n speed setting switch TEST EIN 0 OFF H 1 G BH o 8420 OFF 5 2 2 orr E 40 amp s orr V Station Elg number 1 loc amp g 4 OFF 6 22 0 1 on J B je 4 OFF gt g 2 OFF gt 156kbps m 1 OFF J 8 EN HM 7 MODE N Mode select switch J 3 Ver 2 mode Nomal mode CON A jo CON D MITSUBISHI __CCuink 13 13 13 13 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 13 2 4 Creating a program Create the digital value setting program for performing the initial setting and outputting analog values for remote device stations of station No 4 The programming procedure for station No 4 is the same as the one used in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 13 1 4 1 For the remote device station of station No 4 device Nos of the remote input RX and remote output RY and addresses of the remote register RWr RWw are changed Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Remote device station station No 1 Remote device station station No 4 Remote inputs RX X18 initial data processing request flag X19 initial data setting completion flag mdReceive 1 remote station ready ul Remote outputs i RY Y00 CH analog output enable signal flag
306. nd Solutions gt VC YB Defaults VCInstallDir PlatformSDk lib h VC Build FrameworkSDkDinib Directories C Directories Web Settings C3 Windows Forms Designer C XML Designer Set the directory type to Library files and Library Directories cl ic k Path to use when searching For library Files while building a C project 3 Corresponds to environment variable LIB OK Cancel Help 1 3 Reference the folder containing the library Look in fo ey amp X Ci E Toos file 3 Mdfunc32 lib has been saved in the bns following directory during installation ey User specified folder COMMON My Projects LIB V Favorites um Folder name Y My Network Places 11 9 11 9 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 11 4 Programming Procedure 11 10 MELSEC On a computer with the software package preinstalled the programming procedure using the MELSEC Data Link Library is shown below 1 Power on the IBM PC AT compatible PC and start Windows Has the utility been set up 2 Perform utility setup Refer to Chapter 9 for the setup procedure Change the settings 3 Perform the setup required for the MELSEC Data Link Library 4 Create a user program using the MELSEC Data Link Library Open the communication port mdOpen Use an appropriate function t
307. ng Negotiate signing No minimum No minimum Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Not Defined Disabled Enabled Enabled Posix Disabled Disabled User Account Control Detect application installations and prompt for elevation Enabled E User Account Control Only elevate executables that are signed and validated Disabled 3 User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications that are installed in secure locations Enabled User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode Enabled User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when prompting for elevation Enabled ul User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failures per user locations Enabled rife m D App 44 i User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for ad CBES Local Securty Setting Explain User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for credentials Prompt for consent Cx Cee Cor Setting completion MELSEC 7 Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent 8 Select Elevate without prompting on the Local Security Setting tab and click the OK button App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 8 Combinations of Boards with Existing Software This se
308. ng Software sssssssssssssseeene App 45 Appendix 9 Extemal Dimensions un ane nap ec te en quete dup e qua M e Gan App 49 Appendbc9 1 Q90BD J61BT41N nete Cererem emm Tee em a ede RO retenus App 49 Appendpbc9 2 991BD J61BT 11 nae aenea enadenattese onte App 50 Appendix 10 Setting Checklists sessssssssssssssssseseseen eene nnne enne nnn nnns App 51 Appendix 10 1 Parameter setting checklist App 51 Appendix 10 2 Station information setting checklist sssssssssssseeeeeenenee App 52 Appendix 10 3 Device assignment checklist ssssssssssssssseneeeeeeen App 54 INDEX Index 1 to Index Manuals The following table lists the manuals relevant to this product You can order them as necessary Relevant Manuals Manual Name Manual Number Model Code CC Link System Master Local Module type QJ61BT11N User s Manual This Manual explains the system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting for the QJ61BT11N Sold separately SH 080394 13JR64 CC Link System Master Local Module type AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 User s Manual This Manual explains the system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting for the AJ61BT11 and A1SJ61BT11 Sold separately IB 66721 13872 CC Link System Master Local Module type AJ6
309. ng complete flag RX79 13 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 ON turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY79 16 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag 18 Reads out the remote station READY flag RX7B 16 6 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board When the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is turned ON or reset by the reset switch the initial data processing request flag RX78 is turned ON Turns ON the initial data processing complete flag RY78 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data processing request flag RX78 Turns OFF the initial data processing complete flag RY78 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 10 Turn ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 11 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the initial data setting complete flag RX79 14 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY79 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 15 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data setting complete flag RX79 17 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the remote station READY flag RX7B 16 6 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 4 2 Zero point return control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and the zero point return control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Ma
310. ng manual for the details of and corrective action for the error code When a Redundant CPU error occurs e Error code returned to request source during communication with CPU module in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection When a CC Link Ver 2 board error or module error occurs e Section 17 3 5 in this manual Error codes stored in the link special registers x2 Perform retry processing as necessary according to the system specifications App 37 App 37 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning message As user account control function has been added to Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 a warning message appears when you run the CC Link Ver 2 utility or the Device monitor utility Refer to Section 9 1 lt Using Windows Vista lt Using Windows 7 gt Windows 2008 3 m User Account Control y User Account Control An unidentified program wants access to your computer D Do you want to allow the following program from an unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before CCBD2UTL exe Program name CCBD2UTL exe Unidentified Publisher Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this pr
311. ng switches Set the operation mode of the module Set according to the transmission specification of the external device 15 4 15 4 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 4 Creating a Program Create a program for making the following setting and data transfer to the AJ65BT R2 Initialization of the AJ65BT R2 Refer to Section 15 4 1 Data transmission Refer to Section 15 4 2 Data Refer to Section 15 4 3 15 4 1 Initialization of the AJ6E5BT R2 The following describes initialization of the AJ65BT R2 1 and shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used 1 In the AJ65BT R2 initialization default values are used for settings other than those indicated in the buffer memory section of the illustration below Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 User program QE EM RXA initialization normal completion mdReceive 5 RXG5 initialization abnormal completion 1 i Remote outputs RY masea RY4 initialization request Buffer memory OH transmission area head address designation 1H transmission area
312. ng system configuration For the sample program refer to Section 11 9 On the sample program setting a digital value of 300 enables analog voltages to be output from remote device stations Analogue output of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CH1 Digital output value Digital value 300 Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Pd AJ65VBTCU 68DAV L Ver 1 compatible remote device station station No 1 4 Occupies 3 stations 13 16 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 2 compatible remote device station station No 4 The analog voltage corresponding to digital value 300 is output Occupies 1 station 13 16 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and local station setting parameter setting programming and operation check 14 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 1 mode 14 1 1 Configuring the system In this system one local station shall be connected Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 4 stations Local station station No 1
313. nk Parameter File cbd m Cancel 2 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 6 Displaying the help screen The following explains how to display the Utility Help screen 1 To display the Help screen of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Click the button at the bottom right of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility screen 7 CC Link Ver 2 utility on Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Slot Channel No 81 LED information Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN ERR Data link status In data link Error status Normal Device Monitor D MELSEC CCBD2 PARAM Ver2 M cbd 2 To display the Help screen of the Device Monitor Utility Click Help Help on the menu bar of the Device Monitor Utility screen Option 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE When Help is run the following Windows Help and Support screen may appear and the Help screen is not displayed Perform the following procedure to install WinHlp32 exe which is needed to display the Help screen Note The personal computer needs to be connected to the internet Using Windows Vista Windows 2008 Using Windows 7 MELSEC m Windows and eie Windows Help and Support 9 Windows Help and Suppo hy umm a A e lt 2 M f Ask Options v XJ deos dy 8 Ax options
314. nk condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operation status of the master station a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows O OFF J RUN ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally gt Ot No error has occurred gt Data are being transmitted Sm Data are being received OS 5 Tn j8 ESen TCCunk DAA 1 12 6 12 6 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC b Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Save SB SW Channel No Sta No Transmission rate Data link status Error status Board type Product information IRQ No ROM version Memory 1 0 port Present Error Link scan time ms LED information 56kbps E BBOBDJ amp IBTTIN omo3100000008 FEASOO00 FEAFFFFFH DBODDEFFH 7 22 Min E Current E In data link Normal data link is being performed Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally OFF No error has occurred 24V DC is being supplied
315. nk ver information CC Link ver installation param eter matching status Parameter mode Host parameter mode Availability ie Available x Not available Description Online station station Stores the line test 1 result 0 Normal 1 Abnormal b14 b13 b12 to SW00B4 SW00B5 SWOOB6 SWO00B7 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the line test 1 line test 2 result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC Link Ver 2 0 Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 Ver 2 compatible slave station b14 b13 b12 SW0140 15 14 13 SWO0141 31 30 29 SWO0142 47 46 45 SWO0143 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the CC Link version matching status of the parameters and slave stations 0 Normal 1 Matching error Example of matching error Installation Parameter Ver 2compatible remote Ver 1compatible remote device station device station Ver 1compatible remote Ver 2compatible remote device station device station b14 b13 b12 15 14 13 31 30 29 47 46 45 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates in which mode the system is operating 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode Indicates in which mode the host is operating 0
316. nly file D WINDOWS System32 MdFunc32 dll was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click the Yes button otherwise click No Click the button Software Installation N The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo s testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway Security Alert Driver Installatio The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with amp uthenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The installed INF file does not contain digital signature information Do you still want to install this driver software More Info This screen is displayed at the first installation Click the Continue Anyway button The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi Problems do not occur after the installation The following screen may appear behind another screen Then press the
317. nput for En Sta Hotte Check 7 9 CoL Station information settings 10 Standby master station No o Default 13 All connect count 1 m Clear Delay information setting 0 50 mici No Sta No Station Expanded cyclic ccupied Sta 11 2 Eee 1 1 Intelligent device station single ccupies 4 stations 1 4 1 2 WDT setting 250 4 ms Device Monitor Loadfile Savefie D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 14 1 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Offline 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection Oth tt 9 station count 1 Modules 12 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms 13 All connect count 1 Modules Table 14 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station type Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word at yp cyclic Sta station points station select 14 1 Intelligent device station x i 128 points N
318. ns overall distance and distance between stations 17 27 17 27 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the L RUN LED lit NO MELSEC 3 Is the SD LED lit flashing Is the SD LED lit YES Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Are the station No switches set correctly Isnt the station No duplicated Corresponding module failure Station No switch y Is the transmission rate set correctly YES Set the correct transmission rate y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Is the communication cable wired correctly 1 YES Y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Set the correct station No y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Complete x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 17 28 17 28 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 3 3 List of link special relays SBs The data link status can be checked by the bit information link special relays SBs The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address When the standby master station is controlling the data link the availability of the link s special relays is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master statio
319. ns OFF the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 and Axis 2 start complete flag 15 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 For zero point return Positioning identifier setting 0x200 INC linear 1 M code setting 0 Dwell time 0 Command speed 0x30D40 20000 Positioning address 1000 Arc address 0 Positioning identifier setting 0 200 INC linear 1 M code setting 0 Dwell time 0 Command speed 0x30D40 20000 Positioning address 1000 Arc address 0 16 10 16 10 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 4 4 JOG operation control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and jog operation control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board 9 13 10 14 s RY16 RY16 axis 1 forward run JOG start flag 1015 mE Us y 1 17 i 2 18 Ee RY20 DRONGEN Em 4 20 RY18 axis 2 forward run JOG start flag mdSend RY20 axis 1 servo ON flag H RY40 axis 2 servo ON flag Remote registers E RWw axis 1 JOG speed axis 2 JOG speed 1 When the rem
320. ns are generated depending on the transmission rate 17 23 Is the corresponding local station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station Is data read from the correct address of the remote register RWr buffer memory of the master station Is the corresponding local station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the QJ61BT11 of function version A or the A80BD J61BT11 set to occupy 2 or 3 stations Is the data link stop SB0002 turned on Has an error occurred Is the data link restart SB0000 turned on Has an error occurred Is the corresponding station disconnected Do the parameters for the number of modules and station information match the settings of the modules that do not start up Has the parameter of the master station that will return to the system by the standby master function been rewritten Is the station set as an error invalid station Are there any duplicate station numbers Can the faulty station be identified using the communication status of other stations SWO0080 to SW0083 Can communication be performed normally if the transmission rate is reduced to a lower speed Such as 156 kbps Check the LED displays on the corresponding local station Check the communic
321. nsient error Eror Displays the value set in the expanded cyclic setting 12 Expanded cyclic setting 13 Remote station d points Displays the number of the remote station s points Information of other stations 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 4 Operating the Online operation screen The parameters are read from written to and verified with the CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link Ver 2 utility DiR Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Read parameter Read parameter and target settings from CC Link board driver to CC Link utility 1 Write parameter Write parameter and target settings from CC Link utility to CC Link board driver Reset operation after writing parameter Write 2 Reset CC Link boards that parameter was changed C Reset all CC Link boards regardless of parameter changes Verify parameter Compare parameter and target settings between CC Link utility and CC Link board driver Verify 3 Note Parameter includes Parameter settings and T arget settings Device Monitor Load file Save file Help Exit D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd 1 button Reads parameters from the CC Link Ver 2 board Writes parameters to the CC Link Ver 2 board 2 button After writing the parameters automatically resets the CC Link Ver 2 board selected in Reset operation after writin
322. nsient transmission Station 3 Station Station Station Station number 1 1 number 2 number 4 3 number 12 1 Master Local station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote I O station device station device station station 1 Occupies 1 station 2 Occupies 2 stations 3 Occupies 4 stations BT 0 8 ST 2000 NI 12 16 1 800 2 X 15 830 NW 1116 2 900 2 X 50 1000 N 5 3 1200 8 X 100 2000 ni 12 a 2 b 2 c 8 nw 10 LS 0 8 29 4 16 X 4 8 16 X 9 6 5 X 32 4 12 X 4 8 10 X 9 6 2000 2556 2 us 2 56 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 2 Cyclic Transmission Processing Time This section shows the transmission processing time taken when data of remote input RX remote output RY and remote register RWw RWr are transferred by cyclic transmission When calculating the transmission delay time the following processing time must be added to the cyclic transmission processing time shown in this section e The execution cycle time of reading writing e The own station access processing time by the md function Refer to POINT POINT The own station access processing time by the md function differs according to the performance loaded condition of the personal computer and the type of the CC Link Ver 2 board The following table shows the example of the processing time of the personal computer Use it as a guide 1024
323. nstallation When a CC Link Ver 2 board is used on a personal computer in which SWnDNF CCLINK has been installed uninstall SWnDNF CCLINK first then install the SW1DNC CCBD2 B that is provided with the CC Link Ver 2 board Overwrite installation When performing an overwrite installation install the program in the same folder in which the previous program is installed Start menu After the utility software is uninstalled the program name may still be displayed in the Start menu In this case restart the personal computer 10 Software versions of the CC Link system master and local modules When reading writing data from to other stations using the transient transmission function in the CC Link system use the following software version for the CC Link master and local modules to be accessed Model name Software version Remark QJ61BT11N Any of the versions of the QJ61BT11 module can be used AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 Not accessible if the software Version N or later EN AJ61BT11 version is M or earlier A1SJ61BT11 11 Multiprocessor based personal computers For details on the compatible operating system and driver software version when using multiprocessor based personal computers refer to Section 2 2 1 12 Compatibility with the hyper threading technology For details on the compatible operating system and driver software version when using the hyper threading technology on the personal computer refer to Section 2 2
324. ntelligent device station 2 Set Remote net Ver 2 mode to the Ver 2 intelligent device stations 3 Set double and occupied 2 stations to the Ver 2 intelligent device station 14 12 14 12 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 2 4 Creating a program Create a program for reading the remote input RX writing the remote output RY reading the remote registers RWr and writing the remote registers RWw for local stations of station 5 The programming procedure for station No 5 is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 14 1 4 1 For the local station of station No 5 device Nos of the remote input RX and remote output RY and addresses of the remote registers RWr RWw are changed IBM PC AT IBM PC AT IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station No 0 Local station No 1 compatible PC Local station No 5 compatible PC DERE MIO RACE UL E In ens CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link Ver 2 board User program CC Link Ver 2 board User program Remote inputs RX Remote outputs RY Remote outputs RY
325. ntrolling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC MEMO 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES MELSEC 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES This chapter explains the devices and ranges that can be accessed during CC Link communication 10 1 Accessible Devices The following lists the devices that can be accessed during CC Link communication The term Batch in the following tables indicates Batch Read mdReceive or Batch Write mdSend the term Random indicates Random Read mdRandR Random Write mdRandW Bit Set mdDevSet or Bit Reset mdDevRst 10 1 1 Own station personal computer Accessibility X RX REC Random Y RY Random Random Random Ww RWw Random Wr RWr een Bath Own station memory Own station mes access buffer 10 1 10 1 10 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES MELSEC 10 1 2 Other station fe Access destination OE destination a A2A S1 A1S H A2U S1 Device A1SJ H A2AS S1 E Personal A2C J A2USH S1 PAS EE computer A2N S1 Q02 H A A2S H QO6H A Random Random Random Random o eR eet ff Random Random
326. nts off When a communication error power off etc occurs ina remote I O station Input data Master Clears the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error setting ofthe Station CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Retains the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Continue Continue Continue Local station All points off When a communication error power off etc occurs in a remote device station Input data Master Clears the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error setting ofthe station CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Continue Continue Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Local station Continue Continue When a communication error power off etc occurs in a local station Master Input data Clears the receive area from the local station having a communication error station setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility at error Retains the receive area from the local station having a communication error Continue Continue Retains the receive area from the local station having a communication error Local station 1 This is because YnO refresh direction
327. nu selection Select Device Write Data Changing on the menu bar 2 Dialog box Data Changing Device Type Device Type register Block Network No DeviceNo HEX C DEC C OCT 0000 Setting Data C HEX DEC ss 1 Device Type Sets the type and block network number of the device for which data is to be changed Sets the number of the device for which data is to be changed 2 Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 3 Setting Data Sets the data to be changed HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 7 Changing word device values continuously The set values are written to all of the specified word device areas at a time 1 Menu selection Select Device Write Continuous change in data on the menu bar 2 Dialog box Continuous Change in Data Device Type Device Wwwtremote register Block Network No DeviceNo f HEX C DEC C OCT 0000 4 Setting Data C HEX DEC 123 Points C HEX DEC C OCT 5 1
328. number 3 occupying Remote station Remote station 4 stations Remote station Remote station 1 occupying occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station c pw sad 2 stations Te AE 11 Error invalid station setting function By setting network parameters a module that is powered off in the system configuration will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master station and local station However exercise caution since errors are no longer detected Stations to be set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Master Local station Local station occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station 2 stations This station does not become a data link faulty station Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station Master occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station 2 stations aF 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 12 Data link stop restart function The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used 13 Duplicate station n
329. o access the own station or other stations End the program Close the port that was opened by the mdOpen function mdClose 5 Start the created user program v 6 Access the own station and other stations v 7 End the user program Refer to Section 11 3 Refer to HELP for the MELSEC Data Link functions provided with the utility software 11 10 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 11 11 MELSEC 1 Perform the processing for opening and closing a communication line mdOpen mdClose only once at the beginning and end of a user program Repeatedly opening and closing a communication line for each transaction will degrade the communication performance In order to access the own station and other stations again by the created user program perform steps 5 to 7 only The functions get detailed programmable controller information at the initial execution when the corresponding devices are added Therefore the initial function execution time gets longer than usual When accessing multiple remote stations simultaneously from the same PC using the CC Link Ver 2 utility Device Monitor utility user program or Mitsubishi s software package such as MX Component limit the number of stations to be accessed to 256 or less If 257 or more remote stations are accessed simultaneously communication performance may deteriorate When creating a user program for debugging using
330. o setting _ Eoo Eo o EL LLL LLL eS eas ee e F e 1 For the local station select an intelligent device station 14 3 14 3 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 1 3 Setting the local station The following shows the local station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section For the setting refer to Section 14 1 2 1 2 Parameter settings The following shows the local station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 Other settings Operational settings 2 Sta No Type 1 5 Local station Ell imm 5 e 3 Transmission rate 156kbps Y Occupied Sta Occupier stations eta 6 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode z Input for Er Sta vk Ete 7 Automatic reconnection station count za Cancel Station information settings Sindy master dain Na Default All connect count Remote station Delay information setting B micro sec No Sta No Expanded c Occupied Sta ints 8 WD
331. oad file Save file New Select the test to be executed For details refer to 1 About tests Executes the selected test 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 1 About tests The following describes each of the tests a Hardware test This test is used to check the hardware operation before configuring the system or to check whether or not the CC Link Ver 2 board is operating properly when the data link is not performed correctly 1 Before starting the hardware test disconnect the CC Link cable Also connect a terminating resistor between terminals DA and DB 2 The transmission rate during the hardware test execution is equal to the current parameter setting value 3 The CC Link Ver 2 board is automatically reset before and after execution of the hardware test 4 WDT error message is registered to Event viewer to perform WDT test Operation Procedure After selecting Hardware test in the Test item click the Start button Test result will be displayed after hardware test execution Test result monitor at normal completed CC Link Ver 2 utility e 21 It completed successfully b Line test Hardware For slave stations connected to the master station this test is used to check whether or not all modules of station No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected Station is connected correctly with the CC Link cable s and the data link is enabled This test is effective when
332. oard parameters Uninstallation and reinstallation of software packages App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 2 3 Precautions This section provides the precautions for CC Link board replacement 1 When multiple CC Link boards are mounted on the same PC all the boards must be of the same version Example When replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 board Replace all CC Link Ver 1 boards currently mounted on the PC with CC Link Ver 2 boards 2 To re use the parameters back up them before uninstall the CC Link Utility Example When replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 board Back up the parameters of the CC Link Ver 1 board and then uninstall the CC Link Ver 1 Utility 3 Install only the software package of the same version as the CC Link board currently mounted Example When a CC Link Ver 2 board is mounted Uninstall the CC Link Ver 1 board software package and then install the CC Link Ver 2 board software package Compatibility between CC Link boards and software packages CC Link Ver 1 Board CC Link Ver 2 Board Software Package Software Package REPRE RENE ee eee CC Link Ver 1 board CClinkVer2board x Compatible x Not compatible 1 The following conditions are found when the installed software package is not compatible with the CC Link board currently mounted Conditions A parameter error occurs when the CC Link system is started up The informa
333. ocessing Any of the following errors will occur when the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching processing Examples of errors that will occur in redundant CPU e Asystem switching error Error code 4248H e CPU starting error Error code 4004 e Other system CPU module error Error code 4245n e Access destination illegal error Error code FFDFH Examples of errors that will occur in CC Link Ver 2 board or module e Response timeout Error code B778h e Corresponding station error during sending Error code B201h e Transient target station error Error code B205h When an error has occurred confirm the error code and create a user program for retry processing as necessary a The following indicates the functions that will result in error if executed during system switching Functions that will result in error by system switching n mdControl omdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW MELSEC data link library mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC b The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write START Write processing mdSend instruction etc Has error occurred NO 1 Error code is checked Does the error require retry processing NO Normal processing is executed Error handling is executed Walt processing is executed END YES Retry processing 1 Refer to the followi
334. ode settings are specified with the CC Link Ver 2 Utility For details on the transmission rate mode settings refer to Section 9 2 5 The transmission rates that can be set vary depending on the overall distance For more details refer to Section 3 2 Use the same transmission rate for the master station remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station If any of the settings for at least one station is different data link cannot be established normally 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC MEMO 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE 9 1 Operations Common to All Utility Software This section explains the operations common to all utility software Logon as a user who has administrator authority x1 1 When a utility is run while user account control UAC is available the following warning screen appears Select Allow to run the utility Using Windows Vista Using Windows 7 ANindows 2008 User Account Control y User Account Control ex O An unidentified program wants access to your computer D Do you want to allow the following program from an unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name CCBD2UTL exe mi CEDUTE Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Hard drive on this comp
335. of the local station Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory of the master Check the user program station e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers I Js corresponding local station performing data Check the LED displays on the corresponding local station Do the number of occupied stations set for the Check the communication status of the master local station match the station information of the station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 master station Is data written to the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master Check the user program station Is data read from the correct address of the remote register R
336. ogical Sta No Enter the logical station number to be set or modified 9 Setting range 65 to 239 Enter the station No of the CC Link module that is controlled by the multiple CPU system 3 Sta No eee CCC range 0 to 63 4 Target CPU CPU Select the Select tne target muli CPU to be accessed multi CPU to be accessed Set button Registers the settings and or their changes into the Target Setting List 6 Target setting list Displays the setting details of the selected target channel No as a list Selecting the row to be changed in the Target Setting List and clicking this button changes the 7 Change button registered data Double clicking the row makes the same result 8 button en E in N Target Setting List and clicking this button deletes the data of the registered ogical station No 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 7 Operating the Memory I O test screen The Memory I O test screen diagnoses the dual port memory and I O port used by the CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Before starting a diagnostic operation be sure to disconnect the external cable 2 To switch windows during a diagnostic operation click the button to stop the diagnosis and then switch screens CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target setting Channel No Channel No 81 Diagnoses 4 Ades Bothoa Memory FEA80000 FEAFFFFFH 1 0 port
337. ogram I know where it s from orT ve used it before Change when these notifications appear Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer App 38 App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 2 Methods for preventing the warning message The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of start up of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message 1 Disabling the user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function a Using Windows Vista Windows 2008 127 1 Select Start Control Panel amp internet Explorer E mail L Windows Mail Documents Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration Windows Media Player p Small Business Resources Windows Fax and Scan g Windows Meeting Space ag Windows Photo Gallery Pictures Music Search Recent Items Computer Network amp Windows Live Messenger Download Control Panel Y Paint Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support C 0 7 2 Select User Accounts Clock Language and Region TYP change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Hardware and Sound QE
338. ogram uses the mdSend function to write data from the master station to the designated buffer memory of the local station and a CPU device 2 When writing is completed 0 is stored as return values IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station mdSend 1 Program CC Link Ver 2 board Local station Programmable controller CPU 2 Return value 2 Return value mdSend 4 Buffer memory When reading data from the buffer memory and CPU device in a local station using the mdReceive function 1 The program uses the mdReceive function to read data from the designated buffer memory of the local station and the CPU device to the variables of the program in the master station 2 When reading is completed 0 is stored as return values IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Program CC Link Ver 2 board mdReceive 1 Local station Programmable controller CPU Value gt j return value mdReceive 1 Value return value 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device station MELSEC The following explains an overview of the communication between the master station and the intelligent device station 1 Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station by cyclic transmission Handshaking signals w
339. om the personal computer in the control panel Also each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel However the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel 1 Control panel a Use a conductive control panel b When attaching the control panel s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the panel and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control panel so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area d Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies e Holes made in the control panel must be 10 cm 3 94 in diameter or less If the holes are 10 cm 3 94 in or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface Series type KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO LTD ZIPPERTUBING JAPAN LTD 71TS series SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG CO LTD Eo2sO OLA Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max and 30 dB mean measured by 3 m m
340. on SW0067 parameters being used Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station Check the maximum communication station number recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match 51 0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding local station performing data local station link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of the remote prodr output RY buffer memory of the master station program Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory of the local Check the user program station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved statio
341. on slot and occupied slots refer to Section 3 2 2 The functions being added 3 The functions cannot be used The hyper threading technology is not supported by Windows NT and Windows 2000 Disable the hyper threading technology in the BIOS settings of PC c Instructions for operating system 1 Supported version SW1DNC CCBD2 B Operating system Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT1 1 Windows All versions x Windows 2000 Windows XP All versions Version 1 06G or later Windows Vista Version 1 04E or later Version 1 06G or later Windows J Server 2003 R2 Version 1 06G or later Windows Server 2008 Version 1 08J or later Windows 7 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority Installation uninstallation and usage of utilities are available only by the administrator s authority 3 The functions cannot be used When the sta The following functions of operating system cannot be used If an attempt is made to use any of the following functions this product may not operate normally Activating the application with Windows compatible mode Simplified user switch over Remote desktop Large font size Advanced setting of screen property DPI setting other than the normal size Advanced setting of screen property 64 bit version Standby Hibernate mode sleep mode The language switching function
342. on 8 4 4 Section 8 6 Section 8 7 2 Section 9 1 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 11 3 Section 12 1 Section 12 5 2 Section 13 1 1 Section 13 1 5 Section 13 2 1 Section 13 2 5 Section 14 1 1 Section 14 1 5 Section 14 2 1 Section 14 2 5 Section 15 1 Section 15 5 2 Section 16 1 Section 16 5 2 Section 17 1 3 Section 17 3 1 Section 17 3 2 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 3 Appendix 3 2 Addition Appendix 8 1 Appendix 8 2 Sep 2008 SH NA 080527ENG H Section 3 2 Oct 2008 SH NA 080527ENG Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 3 3 Section 10 1 2 Jul 2009 SH NA 080527 ENG J Chapter 7 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 8 2 SH Oct 2009 NA 080527ENG K Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 11 4 Section 17 1 1 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 3 1 Appendix 4 1 Appendix 4 2 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number May 2010 SH NA 080527ENG L SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 Section 8 6 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 9 Appendix 7 Section 1 3 changed to Appendix 8 Appendix 8 to 9 changed to Appendix 9 to 10 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Section 11 3 5 Section 11 3 6 Dec 2010 SH NA 080527ENG M Section 2 2 1 May 2011 SH NA 080527ENG N Precautions for us
343. on error complete signal RX1 6 Turns OFF the transmission request signal 15 7 CC Link Ver 2 Board 3 Turn ON the transmission request signal RYO of the AJ65BT R2 4 The AJ65BT R2 sends data to external equipment and if the transmission is normal it turns ON the transmission normal complete signal RXO If an error is identified in the transmission the AJ65BT R2 turns ON the transmission error complete signal 7 Turns OFF the transmission request signal RYO of the AJ65BT R2 8 The AJ65BT R2 turns OFF the transmission normal complete signal RXO or transmission error complete signal RX1 15 7 15 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 15 4 3 Data reception The following illustrates the relation between the intelligent device station s I O operations and the user program on the PC in data reception The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board DR RX2 reception normal read request 1 6 RX2 dRecei 2 7 mdReceive SE RX3 reception error read request 4 5 i mdSend RY2 RY2 reception read complete d Buffer memory i 400H reception data size designation area 3 to reception data designation area
344. on when using the local station When changing parameters and or settings of the master station or slave station perform the operation after stopping the data link at the master station PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC Table 6 2 Availability of station information setting only when selecting the master station Setting required X Setting not required Reserve Intelligent Expanded Occupied Remote station invalid buffer points station select Setting item Number of connected Station type modules Mode setting count x 0 points Reserved station 8 points Ver 1 Remote I O station x 8 points x Remote net ver 2 8 empty points 16 points NS 32 points G Vert Renciedevcestaion x o o x _ o Vert iictigent device station x o o7 o o _ Ver2 Remote device sation o o o7 o Vezmelendeesaim o o o7 o o Lo wem eo eo gt oJ 1 ENA SS o Ver2 device sation o o x o x1 Set smaller station numbers to the remote net ver 1 mode stations and larger station numbers to the remote net ver 2 mode stations System configuration with remote net ver 1 mode stations only is available while system configuration with remote net ver 2 mode stations only is not allowed 2 The following table shows the remote station points setting options available for the expande
345. ood ea diee te ee nde hale ain ete alm sia 5 18 6 1 Parameter Setting Hems n ee ei ee te te iia a e a e d de d 6 1 6 2 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 6 5 6 2 1 Master station network parameter settings 6 5 6 2 2 Local station network parameter settings sssssseeeneeeeneeen enn 6 6 6 3 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 6 7 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings ssssssssseeeneeenem emen 6 7 6 3 2 Local station network parameter settings sssssssseseeneenenneneenenennnes 6 8 6 4 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Additional 6 9 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssssseeeeeeenene nenne 6 9 6 4 2 Local station network parameter settings ssssssseseeeneeneeeeneen nennen 6 10 A2 A 12 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 7 1to7 6 7 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive c ccccccceesceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeecaeeeteneeseaeesseeteaes 7 1 7 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive ssssssssssssesssseseeeeeeenne nennen 7 2 7 1 2 Installing devices in the control panel 7 3 MNES Gables eetiadoenanb Oen a eene 7 4 7 1 4 Noise filter
346. or the number of automatic return stations during one link scan 665 return stations 1 to 10 stations Stores the parameter information area to be used Ou CPU built in parameters P0067 Parameter 3 Dedicated instruction parameter setting with the RLPASET 6674 information instruction and data link startup Du Default parameters automatically starts CC Link SWO068 Host parameter Stores the parameter setting status 6681 status Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 2 Can be used for the master station only 17 36 17 36 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 4 7 ie x Not available Number Name Description Online station station Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of each station SW0069 Loading status 0 Normal 6694 9 Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SW009C to 9F Stores the switch setting status SWO006A Switch setting 0 S Riera 66 status SV DPOD Stores the maximum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units 66D time Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 SINDUDE Current Stores the current value of the link scan time in 1 ms units x 66 time pn Min link scan time St
347. ores the minimum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units SW0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter 6701 stations 1 to 64 stations SW0071 6714 Hu ME station number Number of connected modules SW0072 6724 swo074 6740 SW0075 6750 SW0076 6760 SW0077 6774 Reserved station SW0078 678 swo079 6794 SWO007A 67 SW007B 67 Error invalid station specified status specified status Stores the maximum station number that is performing data link 1 to 64 stations Stores the reserved station setting status 0 Not reserved station 1 Reserved station b15 b14 SW0074 16 15 SW0075 32 31 SWO0076 SW0077 b13 b12 to Stores the error invalid station setting status 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 SWO0078 16 4 5 0079 32 SW007A SW007B Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers x1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on X4 This register checks and stores the status only at link startup 17 37 17 37 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 5 7 Availability Available x Not available Nambr Description Master Local Offline station station Indicates the temporary error invalid status SW007C 0 Normal statu
348. ormal Occupies 2 station Normal 4 4 m 1 9 10 11 No Sta No Transient error Expanded cyclic setting Remote station points 1 1 single B4points 2 3 single B4points 12 13 1 Channel No Select the target CC Link Ver 2 board to be monitored Displays the station No station type and operation mode of the selected CC Link 2 Self station information Ver board 4 All stations view Each station information hef fe Displays the communications 3 LAII stations view button states of other stations Normal station Error station Error invalid station Reserved station Temporary error invalid station 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC Displays the number of modules currently connected to the CC Link system 5 Sta No Displays the station No set to each station Displays whether or not the station is set as a reserved station 6 Reserved station Display information Reserved station Set as a reserved station gt No setting Displays whether or not the station is set as an error invalid station 7 Error invalid Display station Error invalid station Set as an error invalid station a Displays the set station type 8 Station type 9 Occupied station Displays the number of occupied stations Displays the status of each station TAO Displays the transient error status 11 Tra
349. orrect and install an appropriate display driver Or update the Windows operating system 3 Read the precautions described in Section 8 4 2 2 and perform the operations described in Section 8 4 2 4 Logon as a user with administrator authority and execute utility Refer to POINT in Chapter 9 or reinstall the operating system Uninstallation is not executed normally Although the message SWLIDNC CCBD2 B has been successfully uninstalled from your machine is displayed on the screen the uninstallation is not complete Error message An error occurred in writing is displayed in utility 17 1 17 1 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error detail Cause determination method Action The password is requested on the User Account Control screen when the utility is activated lt Using Windows Vista Windows 2008 gt User Account Control Ea A An unidentified program wants access your computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before i CCBD2UTL exe Unidentified Publisher To continue type an administrator password and then click OK x AdministratorA PAN Password Caps Lock is on v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer lt Using Windows 7 gt j User Account Control r D Do you want to allow the following program from an 7 unknown publisher
350. oses the line test result screen 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC d Network test This is used to test the start or stop of the data link after connecting CC Link cables or after establishing the data link 1 When the data link of the master station is stopped the data link of the entire CC Link system is stopped 2 The Network test is executable only when the Data link status of the CC Link Ver 2 board is In data link Suspend data link or During Auto Returning Operation Procedure After selecting Network test in the Test item click the Start button The Network test screen appears Network test C Stop data link Cancel 1 Start data link Starts the data link 2 Stop data link Stops the data link 3 button Starts the test 4 button Cancels the test 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 Device Monitor Utility This section explains how to set up and operate the Device Monitor Utility In the Device Monitor Utility the identical data are displayed for SB link special relay and SM special relay when accessing the own station Also the identical data are displayed for SW link special register and SD special register 9 3 1 Operating procedure The following explains the operating procedure of the Device Monitor Utility Click Setting Network Setting andsetthechanneltobeused Refer to Section 9 3 4 Set the device to
351. ote device station the handshaking signals with the remote device station initial data processing request flag error reset request flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data averaging processing specification digital output values etc is communicated using the remote register RWw and remote register RWr IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Remote device station Network parameters Program 3 Buffer memory Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register Remote register Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote input RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote register RWw Numeric data such as for averaging processing setting and A D conversion enable disable setting Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values and detected temperature value 4 FUNCTIONS Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility Remote input IBM PC AT compatible PC Program 3 MELSEC 2 The remote input RX of each of the remote device stations is automatically stored for
352. ote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 16 11 16 11 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 1 JOG speed setting area RWw6 RWw7 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 2 JOG speed setting area RWw14 RWw15 Turns ON the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 11 Turns ON the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY18 13 To stop JOG operation of Axis 1 turn OFF the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY 16 15 To stop JOG operation of Axis 2 turn OFF the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY 18 17 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 19 Turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 16 12 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board 2 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Turns ON the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 1 JOG speed setting area RWw6 RWw7 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 2 JOG speed setting area RWw14 RWw15 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 10 Turns ON the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 and starts JOG operation 12 Turns ON the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY18 of the AJ65BT D75
353. ote registers RWw Remote registers RWw RWO RWwO RWwO RWr1 RWw1 RWw1 RWr2 RWw2 RWw2 RWr3 RWw3 i i RWw3 i 1 i 1 RWIC RWwC RWwC RWrD RWwD RWwD RWrE RWwE RWwE RWF RWwF RWWF RWr10 RWw10 RWw10 RWr11 RWw11 RWw11 RWr12 RWw12 RWw12 RWr13 RWw13 5 RWw13 LmdReceive kK B r mdSend RWr1C RWw1C RWw1C RWriD RWw1D RWwID RWr1E RWw1E RWwiE RWAF RWwiF RWwiF i RWr20 i RWw20 i RWw20 i d i Remote registers RWw Remote registers RWr Remote registers RWr RWwO RWO i RWrO i RWw1 RWr1 RWr1 RWw2 Rwr2 RWr2 RWw3 RWr3 RWr3 i f i i RWwC RWC i RWIC 1 RWwD RWrD RWID 1 i RWwE RWrE RWrE RWwE RWrF RWF RWw10 RWr10 i RWr10 i RWw11 RWr11 RWr11 f RWw12 RWr12 i RWr12 7 RWw13 i RWr13 8 RWr13 l mdSend 3 ELEME K m B 7 mdReceive n RWw1C RWr1C RWr1C RWw1D RWr1D RWr1D RWwiE RWr1E RWr1E RWAF
354. ovides an overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used a Master station output while the master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remate Remote Remote Remote Remote 1 0 station o input RX output RY input RX output RY Station number 2 RX00 to RXOF RYOO to RYOF C Je Peer Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station RX10 to RX1F RY10 to Heed Station number 3 X00 to XOF to YOF pestes deeem 9i5 Number of occupied stations 1 1 Yo0 to Y10toYiF The master station data sent to the remote input RX in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as the output information when the master station becomes faulty thus it should be transferred to another device using a sequence program In addition when the master station becomes faulty the transferred data is transferred to the remote output RY of the standby master station using a sequence program b Master station input while the master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote 1 0 station
355. pe Q80BD J61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Quantity Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Type Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Terminal resistor 1100 1 2 W brown brown brown Terminal resistor 1300 1 2 W brown orange brown Type SW1DNC CCBD2 B CC Link Utility Software Package CD ROM 1 Before Using the Product Software License Agreement x1 The CD ROM contains the User s Manual in PDF format MEMO 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 OVERVIEW The CC Link system connects distributed modules such as an I O module and a special functional module using CC Link dedicated cables so that these modules can be controlled by the programmable controller CPU 1 By distributing each module to facility equipment such as a conveyor line and a machine device the entire system can be connected in the most efficient manner 2 The on off information of input output and numeric data handled by modules can easily be sent and received at high speed 3 A simple distributed system can be configured by connecting multiple personal computers and programmable controller CPUs 4 By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi s partner manufacturers the System that can provide flexible solutions to meet a wide range of user needs may be configured Master station PRR See atus ciu 3 Device manufactured by a partner manufacturer 1
356. pies occupies 4 stations occupies 1 station 1 station 1 station Sta No o0 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Operational settings t 0 x 50 micro sec settings Station information setting items evice station station device station station Remote station points 128 points 32 points 224 points 32 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting Send Intelligent buffer Reeve eceive select word poco Ss Setting not required 6 7 6 7 PARAMETER SETTIN i gt MELSEC 6 3 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 9 2 Station numbers Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station Remote I O Q80BD Remote I O station J61BT11N station occupies occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations 1 station Master station QJ61BT11N Ver 2 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station Type Local station Occupied Sta Input for Err Sta Operational Retry count settings din Automatic reconnection station count Se a er Standby master station No IEEE gt y O settings Delay information setting Po WDT setting 250 x 8 ms Station information All connect count aaa eee settings Station information
357. pies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Ver 2 Station number 1 Output compatible remote Station number 2 output RY Remote output Station number 3 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY to MERE quadruple MEL double X octuple Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for setting details 1 In the remote net ver 2 mode 0 points can be set for a reserved station 2 In the remote net ver 2 mode RWw and RWr of the remote I O station are set to O points Care must be taken to calculate the word points for the programmable controller CPU side 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 2 Remote net additional mode This mode is designed to be used when a CC Link Ver 2 compatible slave station is added to the existing CC Link Ver 1 system The program of the existing system can be used as is Remote device station Local station Remote device station f Remote station Ver 1 compatible additional mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 additional mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Remote input RX Station number 1 compatible Station number 2 Station number 2 remote Station number
358. ple CPU system in which a QJ61BT11 N is installed can be accessed by a personal computer in which a CC Link Ver 2 board is installed Access example Using logical station number 65 an access can be made from a personal computer in which a CC Link Ver 2 board is installed to the CPU No 4 via a QJ61BT11 N the control CPU is the CPU No 2 Local station Station number 5 CPU No 2 is the control CPU Multiple CPU system Master station CC Link Ver 2 board CPU CPU CPU CPU QJ6e1 No 2 No 3 Terminal resistor Setting the logical station number Set the logical station number in the Target of the CC Link Ver 2 utility For details on the Target refer to Section 9 2 6 CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 0 test Test Channel No Channel No 81 Logical Sta No 65 m Sta No 5 zi Target CPU PLC No 4 X CC Link Target setting list me Delete Load file Save file Help Exit Use a QJ61BT11 N of functional version B or later in order to access a multiple CPU system A QJ61BT11 N of functional version A cannot be used 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 4 4 6 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting The points of each remote I O station can be set to 8 16 or 32 points Therefore only the points
359. power supply line filter 7 6 7 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive sssseenene 7 6 8 1 Procedures Before Operating the CC Link Ver 2 Board 8 1 Lo PR 8 2 8 2 1 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 22 8 2 8 2 2 Installation environment enn innen nennen 8 4 8 2 3 Mounting and removing the terminal block 8 4 8 3 Component Names and Settings sse nennen nnnm 8 5 8 4 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Package esee nenne 8 7 944 Installatiori s o term tti unice hae eae Gia deir inte ts 8 7 9 4 2 Uninstallatiori z 2 ete o o eet notte ee ote piene te NEED emus 8 16 8 5 Checking the Board Status Hardware Test enne 8 17 8 6 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cable 8 18 8 7 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable 8 20 8 7 1 T Branch system configuration EARE AEE ren rennen nnns 8 20 8 7 2 T Branch communication specifications list sesssssssssssseseeeeeenenne nnns 8 21 8 8 Utility Software Setting
360. processing time of the md function 2 When writing RY and RWw to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function POINT The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors Refer to POINT in Section 5 2 for the processing time 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 3 Transient Transmission Processing Time This indicates the transient transmission processing time the time required to execute an instruction and receive the processing result The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with Pentium II 233MHz Own station access processing time personal computer with Pentium II 233MHz Batch read mdReceive 12ms 2ms Batch write mdSend 5 3 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt local station programmable controller 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station programmable controller The following formula indicates the time taken from instruction execution at the master station CC Link Ver 2 board to receive processing result from the local station programmable controller Formula Maximum value a Read LS X BC
361. pulsorily STOP Indicates the communication status between SB0080 Other station data remote local intelligent device standby master stations OFF All stations normal O x ilink status ON Faulty station exists information is stored SW0080 to SW0083 Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other Other station stations watchdog timer error SW0084 to SW0087 status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations SB0082 Other station fuse SW0088 to SWO008B 5 8 62 blown status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data linking SWO08C to SWO008F OFF No change ON Change detected Indicates the line status of the host Host line status OFF Normal ON Abnormal line disconnection Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error 580094 Transient 51 0094 to 510097 9 b4 transmission status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station transient OFF Normal transmission status ON Abnormal SB00B4 Standby master Stores the test result of Line test 1 Line test 2 OFF Normal 5 b4 station test result ON Abnormal 580081 E84 b1 SB0083 Other station switch 5E8n change status SB0090 E94 SB0095 E94 b5 17 33 17 33 17 TRO
362. put RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x0 4 Reads out the remote input RXO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 5 Writes 0x5555 to the remote register RWwO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station with the read out remote input register RXO ON Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x24 own station RWw Device No 0x0 8 Reads out the remote register RWr0 of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x25 own station RWr Device No 0x0 14 6 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 1 5 Executing the data link Turn ON the local stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and local stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station and local stations Check the status of the master station and local stations 1 Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows
363. put RX buffer memory Remote I O station Remote I O station IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 f CC Link Ver 2 board E i occupies 1 station occupies 1 station i Program 59 pea ee E 2 c c cuc E Remote input RX 3 RX1F to RX10 mdReceive RX2F to RX20 XOF to X00 X1F to X10 to RX7FF to RX7FO i i 16 point module i 32 point module Remote output 4 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is output automatically for each link scan to the remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station IBM PC AT tible PC i mu mau b eae P EE m Station number 3 Station number 4 CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 1 station occupies 1 station pr 444 MM eee erect LLL pee eee eee bee ee eee ener Program RY2F to RY20 4 i RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 5 YOF to YOO CN E 5 YOF to YOO to Y10 RY7FF to RY7FO 16 point module i 32 point module D ML T M HMI SSI eee ata aie aide a ae t 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations MELSEC This section explains an overview of the communication between the master station and the remote device station In the communication with the rem
364. r Rwr Master station For receiving Local station For receiving 21504 Use prohibited 1 32767 4400 4BFFu MELSEC Buffer memory list 3 3 Description For the master station For the local station For the master station For the local station For the master station For the local station For the master station For the local station O Available Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent Write only device standby master stations Availability Master Local Read write Reference possibility Read only section station station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby master stations Stores the input status from the master station Appendix 4 2 7 Stores the output status from the master station Also stores the receive data from the remote other local intelligent Read write enabled device standby master stations Stores the send data to the remote device all local Write only intelligent device standby master stations Stores the send data to the master other local intelligent device standby master stations Also stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Read write enabled Appendix 4 2 8 Stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Stores
365. r 1 board can also be used for the CC Link Ver 2 board Parameters set for the CC Link Ver 1 board can be reused for the CC Link Ver 2 board Refer to Appendix 3 Using the PCI bus eliminates troublesome switch settings Simply installing the CC Link board on the PCI bus automatically executes the initial settings Parameters can easily be set The parameters necessary for the operation of the CC Link system can easily be set with a CC Link Ver 2 utility program thus programming is simplified Test and monitoring information related to the CC Link system can be displayed The test and monitoring states in the CC Link system can be easily displayed on a personal computer Support for QCPUs Q mode of a multiple CPU system By specifying the station number of the logical station number via the CC Link Ver 2 utility communication with each QCPU Q mode of a multiple CPU system can be performed It provides the functions that support user programming It is possible to perform the remote control of remote I O stations remote device stations intelligent device stations and local stations as well as reading and writing of devices using the functions that support Microsoft Visual C and Microsoft Visual Basic Thus user program can easily be created Example Control of the input signal X and output signal Y of a remote I O station Analogue voltage output control of a remote device station analogue module Communication cont
366. r Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 station number 1 to 64 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 5 Program example when the standby master function is used The following shows a program example when the standby master function is used void Change_StanbyMaster short Counter General counter short StNo Station number unsigned short DevType II Device type short DevNo Device number short Size 11 Sending data size short RecvBuf 10 1 Buffer for receiving unsigned short ret Return value on SB1 switching request StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 5 Set the device type SB equivalent to special M DevNo 0x1 Set the device number mdDevSet path StNo DevType DevNo if ret 0 printf SBI ON processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key getch mdcClose path exit 0 for Counter 0 Counter lt 100 Counter 1 Confirm completion of switching Read SB equivalent to special SM 43 Size 2 1 Set the size of sending data StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 5 11 Set the device type SB equivalent to special M DevNo 0x20 Set the device number ret mdReceive path StNo DevType DevNo amp Size amp RecvBuf 0 if ret 0 printf mdReceive SB43 read processing failed error code xYn ret printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 if RecvBuf 0 amp 0x0800 0 1 Exit
367. r modules such as the AJ65BT R2 that can perform transient transmission Cyclic transmission Function that periodically updates the contents of the remote I O and remote register Transient transmission Function by which data communications are available between 1 1stations at any given timing by specifying a target station Remote net mode Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC Link remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station The remote net mode has three different modes remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Mode in which compatibility with the CC Link Ver 1 board is achieved Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used to replace the CC Link Ver 1 board as a maintenance product Remote net ver 2 mode Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points Special link relay Special link register Remote input Remote output Remote register write area Remote register read area Product List The following shows the product list of the CC Link Ver 2 board Item name Ty
368. r settings A matching error occurs in any of the following cases 1 Station type mismatch 2 Number of occupied stations mismatch 3 Expanded cyclic setting mismatch 4 CC Link compatible version mismatch A matching error will not occur when installation lt parameter For example a matching error will not occur when a remote device station is installed and the parameter setting is an SWOO9C intelligent device station 69 0 Normal SWO009D 1 Matching error 69D Loading paramete Example of matching error r consistency SWOOSE status Installation Parameter 69 SWO09F Remote device station Remote station 69 Remote station Intelligent device station Remote device station device station b15 b14 b13 5 009 SWO009D SWOO9E SWOO9F 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on X6 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 17 39 17 39 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Number SWO0B4 6B4x SW00B5 6B5x SWOOB6 6B6x SWO0B7 6 7 SWO0B8 6B8x SW0140 740 SW0141 7411 SW0142 7421 SW0143 743 swo144 7449 SWO0145 7459 SWO0146 7460 SWO0147 7479 SW0148 7484 SWO0149 7490 MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 7 7 Line test 1 result 5 Line test result Compatible CC Li
369. r the input module changes from on to off When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I O modules select the proper type of cable and perform wiring by considering the voltage drop Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I O module is within the specified range of the remote I O module to be used Stabilized power supply Remote module Remote module 4 Access to slave station No 64 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used transient transmission to slave station No 64 is not allowed 1 Access to slave station No 64 is not possible even from GX Developer or GOT on any other station 2 Cyclic transmission can be normally performed with slave station No 64 2 8 2 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 2 3 Equipment list Table 2 1 lists the equipment that configures the CC Link system Table 2 1 Equipment list For a local station SBUBDUSTBETIN CC Link master local interface board for 1 to 4 stations ersonal computer for PCI bus slot i Master local board for A80BDE J61BT11 P puter i T Master station personal computer SIESAQUONTS or local station CC Link master local interface board for Q81BD J61BT11 personal computer for PCI Express bus slot For a local station 1 to 4 stations Local board for personal A80BDE J61BT13 CC Link interface board for personal For a local station l scalstation computer computer for PCI
370. rable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later X Invalid combination 1 The user program EXE file using the MD function library must be re linked to the MD function library supplied with the SW1DNC CCBD2 B App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 When using the CC Link Ver 2 board Q81BD J61BT11 and other interface boards in the same PC SW1DNC CCBD2 B Board model name Supported OS i Server Serer x x x Q80BD J71LP21 25 SWODNC MNETH Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD J71BR11 Q80BD J71LP21G SWODNC MNETH B Q80BD J71LP21GE Q81BD J71LP21 25 SWODNF CCLINK SW1DNF CCLINK A80BD J61BT1 1 SW2DNF CCLINK SWODNF ANU ABOBD A2USH S1 A80BD J61BT13 SW3DNF CCLINK X px px px px px x x px px px x x x Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SW1DNC MNETG B 1 02C 1 14M 1 11M SX Win 2000 Windows 2000 XP Pro Windows XP Professional XP Home Windows XP Home Edition Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Vista Windows Vista Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Win 7 Windows 7 Valid combination A Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later X Invalid combination App 46 App 46 APPENDIX MELSEC 3 When using the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N and communication support software tools or GX Developer in the same PC SW1DNC CCBD2 B Board model Software package Supported OS E memo
371. rd x11 i Remote inputs RX 219 i RX01 axis 1 start complete flag a RX02 axis 2 start complete flag mdReceive 9 N RX04 axis 1 BUSY flag amp lt 9 gt oa RX05 axis 2 BUSY flag xi Remote outputs 5 10 es RY10 axis 1 positioning start flag 5 10 219 t RY11 RY11 axis 2 positioning start flag P ers 1 14 i 2 15 Bie RY20 RY20 axis 1 servo flag gt LM 1 14 2 1 RY40 15 RY40 axis 2 servo ON flag E Remote registers RWw RWwO axis 1 positioning start No RWw8 axis 2 positioning start No 3 E N pP 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 16 9 16 9 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program 1 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 3 Writes start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw amp 5 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 9 Reads out the Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 and Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 10 With the Axis
372. rd is changed Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2xXn 1 1 SL ms LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 1X 2X2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 2 2 2 1 1 10 31 ms 3 When reading RWr from the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RWw Local station programmable controller RWr The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RWw of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board is changed until the data is stored in the local station s CPU device Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 4 LS Link scan ti
373. rea should be grounded bl wmm Always use the designated cable for Shield this cable Remote station Local station Remote station Control panel Furthermore the grounding should be made within 30 cm 11 81 in of the CC Link Ver 2 board terminal area and at the position closest to the exit of the control panel b Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable c Do not use ferrite core for the CC Link dedicated cable coming from each module and the CC Link Ver 2 board d Ground the SLD terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board Ground the FG terminal of each module Master board Remote module Local module Terminal resister Terminal resister CC Link CC Link dedicated cable dedicated cable 7 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC 7 1 4 Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise It is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line but fitting it can further suppress noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10MHz or less The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below 1 Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When they are bundled the output side noise will induct into the input side wires Input side Input side power supply side power supply side
374. reserved points for the remote I O stations can be reduced This enables the minimum remote device allocation in the CC Link system Refer to Section 4 4 6 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC MEMO 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the CC Link 2 1 Overall Configuration A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the following conditions must be satisfied 1 Remote net ver 1 mode a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations d Number of modules occupying 4 stations A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 Condition 1 1 2 X b 3 4 X d x 64 Condition 2 16 x A 54 x B 88 x lt 2304 Master station IBM compatible Maximum 26 a Local station Local station Local station S Local station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 QU61BT11 N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 ABOBDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT 11 AJ61QBT11 AJ
375. responding station larger than the transient data length Check the cable and the corresponding station 17 46 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station BA1B All stations error Al rations stopped communications Check the cables during line test BBC1 Mode setting error The mode setting of a local station is Set 0 not set to 1 BBC2 Station number setting The station number setting is set to a Set the value within the range error value other than 0 to 64 from 0 to 64 e Transmission rate The transmission rate setting is set to a Set the value within the range BBC3 i i setting error value other than 0 to 4 from 0 to 4 5 Master station duplicate A master station already exists Review the station number error setting switch BBC7 The module is faulty Replace the module E 17 47 17 47 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 17 4 Measures for WDT error occurrence 17 48 The following explains the causes of WDT error occurrence in CC Link Ver 2 board and measures for them 1 Cause of WDT error occurrence The WDT error occurs in CC Link Ver 2 board as follows 1 CC Link Ver 2 driver cannot operate because the PC or OS is hang up 2 The CPU cannot start to control the CC Link Ver 2 driver within the WDT time as the other drive has occupied the CPU processing In ca
376. response is displayed and the board does not start Manufacturer type and model name of your personal computer Main memory capacity hard disk capacity and CPU model name Operating system name Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Professional or other The slot position where the board is installed and the number of installed boards Presence of resource conflict PC device conflict Memory address head address and occupied size O address head address and occupied size IRQ number and DMA number Whether or not you have checked the faulty board with another personal computer Switch settings The detailed error descriptions of the CC Link Ver 2 driver registered in Event Viewer 17 50 APPENDIX APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 1 Comparisons with CC Link Ver 1 board and CC Link module Differences between the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link Ver 1 board and functional comparisons between the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link module are shown here Appendix 1 1 Differences from the CC Link Ver 1 Board The following describes the main differences between the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 and the CC Link Ver 1 board A80BDE J61BT11 ABOBDE J61BT13 For details other than those shown below refer to Chapter 3 1 General Specifications iiei CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link Ver 1 board A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 Storage ambient temperature 25
377. rk refer to Section 9 3 4 Shows the data format and the type of the device being displayed word device and bit device 3 Data Format To change the device type refer to Section 9 3 5 To change the data format refer to section 9 3 9 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination This section describes how to set up the network to be used when performing device monitoring The destination should be specified when starting the Device Monitor Utility 1 Menu selection Select Setting Network Setting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box Network Setting Channel 84 CC Link 1 slot M Network Setting C Own Sta Channel Set the channel to be used 2 Network Setting Set the own and other stations as well as the network number and station number 1 To access a multiple CPU system select other station then enter the value of the logical station number set with the CC Link Ver 2 utility for the station number 2 Do not designate a remote I O station or an intelligent device station connected to the CC Link as the monitor destination If designated an error will occur 3 When own station is selected in the network setting network No 0 and station No 255 are displayed as the network status 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored This section describes how to set up the device to be monitored 1 Menu sele
378. rned Increase the arrival monitor time on when own station was executing an instruction If the error persists check the network and target station Number of retries The number of retries exceeded the Merea nene monitor ume B513 If the error persists check the exceeded set number network and target station A channel number is out of the setting Set the channel of own station B515 Channel number error a range and target station to 1 or 2 The number of resends is out of the Set a value in the range from B519 Resend count error setting range to 15 times 51 Aniv l monitor ne error The arrival monitor time is out of the Set a value in the range from setting range to 32767 seconds 520 Target station number Other than 0 is set for the target Set the target station number to error station number 0 B524 Target station CPU error The target station s CPU is faulty Check the target station s CPU O Access code setting Nonexistent access code attribute was Set the correct access B601 set code attribute Wait a while and then send the requests transient transmission overload status Wait a while and then send the requests transient transmission overload status Sending channel in use own station Arrival wait timeout Transient request There are too many transient requests B602 overload error to the corresponding station Transient request T
379. rol of an intelligent device station RS 232C module It provides the drivers for various operating systems Various drivers are provided for easy system configuration according to the user environment For details on the compatible operating system refer to Section 2 2 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 2 Features of the CC Link System This section explains the features of the CC Link System 1 Remote I O station communication The on off status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Remote station Program CC Link Ver 2 board Read i Link scan mdReceive 4 Remoteinput Input oto RX Write Link scan a mdSend gt E TERR gt Output 2 Remote device station communication IBM PC AT compatible PC Program mdReceive mdSend mdSend mdReceive Handshaking signals with the remote device station initial request error occurred flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using the remote registers RWw and RWr Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Remote device station Link scan Remote input RX Remote input RX Link scan Remote output RY Remote output RY Remote register RWw
380. ror The device type designated for the request destination station is invalid This is checked by the request destination s link module Processing code error A processing code that could not be processed by the request destination station was set This is checked by the request destination s link module Board reset error Another process that used the same channel executed a board reset while accessing other station Check the size Check the device number Check the device type Check the request destination station number and processing codes 26336 Request error for another loop Change the routing request destination to an ANUCPU 9920n Routing to another loop was performed or QnACPU 28141 92134 28150 920 System sleep error Shift to the sleep or the hibernate was detected Device access error of the data link interrupted station Attempt was made to access the device ranges of a data link interrupted station of the own station devices RX RY RWw and RWr as well as a reserved station Reboot the system Change the setting of Power Options to prevent the system from transitioning to sleep or hibernate Data can be read and written but the validity of the data is not guaranteed 28151 APS NO error 92099 Invalid response data was received Change the device that requested the processing 128199 Dual port memory handshake error Remove other option boards 92044 17 15 Reset the
381. rray variables is FFF5u size too small Block error de The block number of the designated extension file register is Check the block number device ype t the extension FFF4n invalid file register Write protect error Check the block number device type of the extension 13 The block number of the designated extension file register file register FFF3n duplicates with the write protect area of the memory Check the write protection DIP switch of the access cassette destination s memory cassette 14 Memory cassette error FFF 2x No memory cassette is installed in the accessed CPU or an Check the memory cassette of the access destination incorrect memory cassette is loaded Read area length error j The read area size for read data storage array variables is horoadsize andread daa storage destination too small 16 Station number network number error FFFOH The station number network number is out of range Check the designated station number network number All station group number designation anor Check if the function supports all station group number All station group number was designated for a function that designation 17 does not support all station group number designation Set no arrival acknowledament for the device type FFEFn Arrival acknowledgment was specified for the device type 9 when using the SEND function with all station specification when ae ine END pe von
382. rrective action Retry with a user program 41H An unregistered channel number was designated 42H The designated channel has already been open y 43H The designated channel has already been closed 44H A path other than for an open line was set line Unsupported function execution error Check the channel number network number and 69 2 e is 7 station number 45x A function which is not supported by the specified station Check if the function is supported by the specified was executed station Station number designation error The designated station number is incorrect 70 A process that should have been requested to other station Correct the designation of the station numbers in a user 46x was requested to own station Or the station number program corresponds to own station OxFF but the network number is not 0 71 Receiving data error when RECV is requested f 47H Data has not been received Gala Is received End all other application programs that are currently running 77 Memory allocation error s 4Du Sufficient memory could not be allocated Check i the system normally Restart the system Increase the minimum working set area of the PC 78 Timeout error during mode setting Make sure that the dual port memory is not used by 4 Mode setting was attempted but failed due to timeout another Board and restart Hardware failure 79 SoftWare
383. rred during the receive process Check the programs of the personal computer and 565 programmable controller that requested the processing to this 10D An error occurred during transmission processing personal computer 1 This error occurs when the CC Link Ver 2 board driver is installed first An error occurred when Registry Database wrote out Install SW1DNC CCBD2 B then restart the PC to confirm that this error does not occur 2 Increase the system memory and disk capacities Check the programs of the personal computer and programmable controller that requested the processing to this personal computer No corrective action for this error Owing to the event viewer that is generated when data are transmitted to other stations Failed to map the I O port The I O port is also used by another resource Remove other T option boards The Dual Port Memory Area of the I F board conflicts with Remove Otharobton Bssrds 1 Ts the other Hardware s one P i 284 The IRQ of the I F board conflicts with the other Hardware s Remove other option boards 11 286 ME Failed to allocate the Memory Area Increase the system memory H 287 s 11 Link Parameter is nothing or has abnormal data Reset the parameter Remove other option boards A WDT error occurred Take the measures for WDT error occurrence Refer to ea Section 17 4 22 The board number of the I F board conflicts Do not use duplicate board numbers H 291
384. rresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote input RX Remote output RY Address MELSEC Dow notation 4000 RX F to RX 0 3 1 RY F to RV o 4200 eor 1 40014 RX1F to RX 10 RY 1 to RY10 4201 40024 2F to RX 20 MEE MEE RY 2F to RY20 4202 40034 RX3F to RX 30 i RY to RY30 4203 40044 RX 4F to 0 ME ME RY 4F to RY40 4204 40051 5F to RX 50 ME TE RY 5F to RY 50 4205 i 40061 RX6F to RX 60 RY 6F to RY60 4206 Station 4007 RXTF to X70 o RY 7F to RY70 4207 Station number 2 4008 RX 8F to RX 80 RY 8F to RY 80 42084 number 2 40094
385. s ssssssssseseeeeneeenennneennen nennen nennen rnnt 8 22 8 8 1 Station number setting i intei ita 8 22 8 8 2 Transmission rate and mode settings sssssssssssseeeeeneeeneen en eene 8 23 9 1 Operations Common to All Utility Software ssseeeeneneenennn emnes 9 1 91 1 Startirig a utility za t oer m o mem e P OR UR E CI RA n 9 1 9 1 2 Starting the device monitor utility 9 2 9 1 3 Quittinigsa Utility x Maia em oic eatem em eua temet item eu ite ice 9 3 9 1 4 Saving parameters into file sssssssssesseeeeeeeneeeneneneee nennen nnne nnne enne 9 4 9 1 5 ecce t iot eite eite le ite die te gira 9 5 9 1 6 Displaying the help screen tnnt nennt nennt tnnt nnn nnnc nnn 9 6 91 7 Veritying the Verslon a em pde DEG pde eed et pd ep 9 8 9 2 GC Link Ver 2 Utility 2 2 ete de e Ee e HU e e 9 9 9 2 1 List of CC Link Ver 2 Utility Functions ssssseeeeneeneenneenneeneneeenene nennen enne 9 9 9 2 2 Operating the Board Information screen 9 10 9 2 3 Operating the Other station monitor screen sssssssssseeeeeeeneeneeeneeeeee nene 9 13 9 2 4 Operating the Online operation screen sssssssssssssseeeneeeeeeeren nennen 9 15 9 2 5 Operating the Parameter Settings screen 9 16 9 2
386. s return ERROR Close the user program handle CloseHandle hProcess Normal return return 0 The set sizes shown here are reference sizes Adjust the sizes according to your system 17 17 17 17 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 3 CC Link System Troubleshooting This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System It presents a list of check items and procedures for possible problems 17 3 1 Verification of problem occurrence The following shows the details of check items and procedures for possible problems Table 17 5 List of check items when a problem occurs Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the cable connection visually or with a line Are there any disconnected cables test e Check the line status SW0090 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the terminal stations at both ends of the CC Link system Connect the terminal resistors that match the cable type used to the terminal stations located at both ends of the CC Link system Refer to The entire system cannot Section 3 3 perform data link an error occurred in the Ver 2 board Check the error code of the CC Link Ver 2 board and take a necessary corrective action Are the CC Link parameters set for the CC Link Check the contents of the parameters for the CC Ver 2 board Link Ver 2 board Check the own station parameter status SW0068 e Check t
387. s 67 1 Temporary error invalid status SWO007D b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bO 670 Temporary error SWO007C 15 14 1 3 to 4 3 2 SWOO7E invalid status swoo7p 32 29 0760 swoo7e 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 62 61 to 52 51 SWOO7F swoo7F 64 63 67 Numbers 1 to 64 the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the data link status of each station SW0080 0 Normal 680v 1 Data link error occurrence SW0081 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bO 6814 Other station data swooso 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 oos suos 50 0083 swoos3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 6834 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the watchdog timer error status on each station 51 0084 0 No watchdog timer error 6841 1 Watchdog timer error occurrence SW0085 Other station b15 b14 b13 to 685 watchdog timer swoos4 16 to SWO086 error occurrence swooss 32 to 6864 status swoose 48 to SW0087 Bree 6874 Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station SW0088 0 Normal 688v 1 Abnormal SW0089 b15 b14 b13 b12 6894 Other station fuse SWO088 SW008A blown status 5 SW0089 68 SWO008A SWOO08B em 68 Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data SWwo00sc link 68
388. s Automatic reconnection station count Station information settings Standby master station No o Default 1 3 All connect count d 2 Delay information settin 0 21 5n No Sta No Occupied Sta g 50 micro si 1 4 1 Remote device station single Occupies 3 stations 1 5 Ver 2 Remote device station v single 7 Occupies 1 station x WOT setting 250 4 8 ms Device Monitor Load file Save file ID MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 13 3 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 2 sia noys Neo _ Ror sao Local station Standby master staton emote net Additional mode 7 Off tine veda 12 WDT setting 250 x 8 ms All connect count 2 Modules x1 To set the CC Link system to the remote net Additional mode select Remote net Additional mode Other settings Table 13 4 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station type Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word meee yp cyclic Sta station points station select 14 1 Ver 1 Remote device station single Occupies 96 points No setting 3 stations 15 4 Ver 2 Remote device station quadruple 2 64 points No setting 13 12 13 12 13 COMMUN
389. s being executed normally Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to Section 11 9 With the sample program the initialization Zero point return positioning and jog operation can be performed Program execution Initialization Zero point return Positioning JOG operation station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Initialization operation Occupies 4 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJ65BT D75P2 S3 000 E Servo amplifier YN Zero point return operation Positioning operation JOG operation Positioning module Terminal resistor i amplifier 16 15 16 15 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC MEMO 16 16 16 16 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 17 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System It presents a list of check items and corrective actions to take for possible problems 17 1 Hardware Troubleshooting The following shows how to remedy errors that may occur on the CC Link Ver 2 board hardware 17 1 1 Verification of problem occurrence Wh
390. s designated DEBIDO a for bit device designation This is checked by the request destination s link module FFFFu The designated bus is invalid function Device number error The designated device number is out of range Check the head device number for the designated FFFEn When a bit device was designated the device number was device not a multiple of 8 a is type is invalid Check if the device type used is found in the device list 4 CPU error Check the status of the communication station invalid station was designated Check the designated station number Size error The device number and size exceeded the device range Access was attempted using an odd numbered device The device number and size exceeded the range for the same block Check the device type Check the device number 2 5 Check the designated device size Check the device number and size 17 12 17 12 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Return value 6 Number of blocks error FFFAn The number of blocks designated in dev 0 for device Check the number of blocks designated in dev 0 i random read write is out of range 8 Channel number error FFF8x The channel number designated in the mdOpen function is Check the designated channel number invalid Insufficient buffer area gt 11 Check the read size and read data storage destination The read area size for read data storage a
391. s from board driver and E Parameter information Version information Parameter backed up CC Link parameter Parameter file setting Set parameter file path File path D Tool US Param bdp Backup Exit Click 3 The version of the Parameter backup restore tool is displayed Parameter backup restore tool Mie Parameter backup restore tool Version 1 00 A Copyright C 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 3 2 Precautions When Using Parameter backup restoration tool The following are the precautions for using the Parameter backup restoration tool 1 Precautions when activating Parameter backup restoration tool Back up or restore parameters with the CC Link Utility already installed 2 Restrictions on restoration The following table shows whether backed up parameters can be restored or not for each case l Windows Server 2003 Windows NT Backed up parameters CC Link Ver 1 board SWnDNF CCLINK B Restored to Master standby master station parameters Windows95 Windows98 Windows 2000 Windows XP R2 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 CC Link Ver 1 board SWnDNF CCLINK B CC Link Ver 1 board SW1DNF CCLINK B CC Link Ver 2 board SW1DNC CCBD2 B CC Link Ver 2 board SW1DNC CCBD2 B Local station parameters Master standby master station parameters
392. sconnecting a data link faulty station and continuing the data link with only normal stations slave station disconnect function This function disconnects any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station if it has become data link faulty due to power off or other cause and continues the data link among normal remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station no setting is required Master Down Local Local station station station Remote station Remote station Terminal Terminal Lb resistor resistor Continues data link excluding faulty station In the event of a cable breakdown the data link cannot be performed because there is no terminal resistor Master Local Local station station station Remote station Remote station a p AA Ag Terminal Breakdown Terminal resistor resistor 4 FUNCTION se MELSEC 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal auto return function This function allows any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that has been disconnected from the data link due to power off or other cause to automatically reconnect to the data link when it returns to the normal status Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings gt gt
393. se 2 the WDT time has to be adjusted as affected by the operation of the PC or other driver For details refer to 2 2 Adjusting WDT Time Adjust the watchdog timer surveillance time setting value by the Other settings button on lt Parameter settings gt tab in the CC Link Ver 2 Utility For details on the Other settings screen refer to Section 9 2 5 2 17 48 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 17 5 Precautions for installing other optional board Executing user program including the device monitor utility for each board simultaneously under the following condition may cause an error When an error occurs in the user program take the action shown below lt Condition gt A personal computer into which the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board are installed and where the resources were allocated automatically by Plug and Play is used lt Action gt 1 Change the positions where the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board are installed 2 Inthe BIOS setup exchange the IRQs between the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board or change their IRQs 17 49 17 49 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 17 6 Required Items when Making an Inquiry When making an inquiry after determining that the board is faulty please provide us with the following information 1 Trouble description in specific 2 6 7 9 17 50 Example When starting up after powering on the message board Not
394. selling Gala error Check the contents of the argument parameters in the Argument parameters were not set correctly during software g P 4 software setting data setting 81 Startup source channel response error when SEND is Retry 51H requested Check if the system is operating normally A response error when SEND is requested is abnormal Restart the system Channel number error when RECV is requested Check the channel number used when RECV is Channel number error requested Accessing own station board or requesting SEND An access request was issued to the own station board Retry while accessing the own station board 101 Routing parameter error Correct the routing parameters 65u The routing parameters are not set 9 17 8 17 8 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Return value Retry Check if the system is operating normally Restart the system Retry n d Check if the system is operating normally i 9 Restart the system 129 Device type error 81 The designated device type is invalid Check the device type Device number error 130 The designated device number is out of range 82H A device number other than a multiple of 8 was designated for bit device designation Number of device points error 131 The designated number of points is out of device range 83H A device number other than a multiple of 8 was designated for bit device designation Number of
395. setting 01 to 64 Specified station only Default value 0 Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used 90 0009 Monitoring time Defautvelues 10 seconds 6094 settin Setting range 0 to 360 seconds 9 The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed with a dedicated instruction SWO000A CPU monitoring Default value 90 seconds 60 time setting Setting range 0 to 3600 seconds The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified SW0020 Indicates the module status 6204 Module status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with SWO0041 Data link restart SB0000 6411 result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 Refresh Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby SW0043 instruction at master switching 6434 standby master 0 Normal Switching result Other than O Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 17 34 17 34 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC Table 17 7 List of link special registers SWs 2 7 MEI ERE x Not available Number Description Online stat
396. settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No No 81 Other settings perational settings Oth ti s Other settings 2 Sta No Type 0 5 Master station ZI Expanded cyclic f es x g Retry count 3 Transmission rate 156kbps xi Occupied Sta Jessie m Default 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 7 Input for En Sta lt Hol Eteer Automatic reconnection station count z Conal Station information settings Standby master station No o Default 1 3 All connect count 1 B Clear 2 Delay information settin 0 5 50 ec No Sta No Station Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta v 2 EE 14 1 1 Intelligent device station single v Occupies 1 station WDT setting 250 2 8 ms Device Monitor Loadfie Savetie D MELSEC CCBD2 Param Param cbd 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 15 1 Parameter Setting Check List annel No 83 Channel No 84 2 SmNompe noo sesi Local station Standby m
397. shi representative 1 error frequency may depend on the condition of the computer or OS 17 3 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 17 1 3 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is not flashing The following is a flowchart showing how to do when the CC Link Ver 2 board does not start up properly with the RUN LED not flashing and the error cannot be identified START Is the RUN LED on the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 lit NO Has the operating system started up normally NO YES Isa driver message displayed on event viewer of the management tool NO Consult your local Mitsubishi YES representative NO Did a WDT error occur Consult your local YES Mitsubishi representative Start the CC Link Ver 2 utility On the Memory I O Test screen press the Board Reset button to reset the board Refer to Section 17 4 YES Did a WDT error occur Consult your local Mitsubishi representative operating system started up normally whether or not the operation is stopped or a system error is displayed in the blue colored monitor NO Remove all Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 boards YES operating system started up normally whether or not the operation is stopped or a system error is displayed in the blue colored monitor Are other optional board s installed
398. sion function Designates an opposite station and communicates at an Transient transmission 510 UE pee i isi Section 4 5 1 arbitrary timing Refer to Section 4 4 7 3 b Whether send receive is enabled or not for the availability of cyclic data communication with the CC Link Ver 2 compatible stations 4 FUNCTION es MELSEC 4 2 Basic Functions This section explains the basic functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board 4 2 1 Communication with remote I O stations The following explains an overview of the communication between the master station and a remote I O station In the communication with the remote I O station the on off information of the switches and indicator lamps are communicated via the remote input RX and remote output RY IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Remote I O station CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Network parameters Program 4 Remote input dR mdReceive Read RX 5 Wi e Output Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Remote input 2 The input status of each of the remote I O stations is automatically stored for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote in
399. station Master station Local station Additional mode Ver 2 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible area i area area i area Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible Cyclic transmission enabled X Cyclic transmission disabled Prohibited 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 Mismatch between parameter settings and points for the stations actually mounted If the extended cyclic parameter setting on the master station is not consistent with the link points for each station that is actually connected an error code is stored into SW0069 of the Q8OBD J61T11N at the master station Also consistency status of each station is stored into SWOO9C When an error code is stored into SW0069 reexamine the parameter settings 5 Precautions for modes between the master and local standby master stations At any of the following settings an error error code B3A0 will occur at the local station standby master station The mode set at the master station differs from the mode set at the standby master station When the master station is in the remote net ver 1 mode the local station setting is the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode the local station is in the remote net additional mode If an error has occurred correct the mode parameter of the master station local s
400. station can be increased as indicated in the following table Table 4 7 ug CN Expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple octuple Remote I O RX RY 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Remote register RWw RWr 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points Remote I O RX RY 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points Remote register RWw RWr 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Remote register RWw RWr 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points Remote RX RY 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points Occupies 4 stations 2 4 Remote register RWw RWr 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Coase Remote I O RX RY 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points In the remote net ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points cannot be increased 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 1 Remote net ver 2 mode This mode is designed to configure a new system The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below Per station Max RX RY 128 points RWw RWr 32 points In the case of 1 station occupied with octuple setting Per CC Link system Max RX RY 8192 points RWw RWr 2048 points Remote device station Local station Remote device station z Remote station Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occu
401. stations 1 Data link control in progress Cyclic comsecinication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 9 Mode selection according to the system The CC Link system has 3 types of modes applicable to various systems Select one of the modes in the parameter setting of the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Appendix 5 for the mode selection Each of the modes is described below Connectable station The compatibility mode with the CC Link Ver 1 board Select this mode when the cyclic points increasing is not required or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as Remote station substitute for the CC Link Ver 1 board Remote device station Remote net Ver 1 mode Select this mode when configuring a new system with the Intelligent device station Remote net Ver 2 mode cyclic points increasing Local station Select this mode when adding a Ver 2 compatible slave Standby master station Remote net additional mode station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 10 Reserve station function Stations that are not actually connected stations to be connected in the future will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserve stations Stations that will be connected in the future Reserve station Station number 4 pu eee Reserve station Station number 8 Station number 10 Master Local station station Station number 1 Station
402. ster station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board NE 77 Remote inputs RX 19 RX79 initial data setting complete flag 10 SE RX7B remote station ready flag ae i Remote outputs RY d M FE RY10 axis 1 positioning start flag 13 saa a et KO NERIS RY11 axis 2 positioning start flag 11 I RY20 axis 1 servo ON falg 11 73 RY40 axis 2 servo ON flag 1 7 a RY 79 initial data setting request flag 1 Remote registers RWw 5 6 RWw0 axis 1 positioning start No a o e moe 6 P38 7 axis 2 positioning start No 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 16 7 16 7 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 RY79 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the initial data RX79 setting complete flag RX79 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 Writes the start No to
403. t device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 switches are shown below Transmission speed setting switch 0 156 kbps Station No setting switch Module x10 x1 Awserpreezss o 1 STATION NO xi x MITSUBISHI MELSEC eser orsez ss kd xu ud PW 2 28 2 c oO OVO RNO eya 654 654 c LRUN c sD C AX1 RDO MODE RESET c AGO LER a C RS422 1 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 16 4 Creating a Program Create the program for the following setting and controls of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Initial setting Refer to Section 16 4 1 Zero point return control Refer to Section 16 4 2 Positioning control Refer to Section 16 4 3 JOG operation control Refer to Section 16 4 4 Set parameters and perform positioning settings in advance with the AD75 software package If a user program is used to perform reading and writing from to the buffer memory the communication time delay may occur and the user program becomes complicated 16 4 1 Initial setting The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operat
404. t to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by
405. tab set General as the Category then type mdfunc32 lib in the Object library modules field 11 5 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 3 3 When using Visual Basic NET 2003 2005 2008 The following describes the setting operation when using Visual Basic NET 2003 2005 2008 The screens of Visual Basic NET 2003 are used for the explanation in this section These screens are slightly different from other Visual Basic 22 WindowsApplication1 Microsoft Vis 1 Start Visual Basic NET 2003 2005 2008 Ho Edt yew Project Guid Debug and select File Add Existing Item New EJ Add New Item Ctrl Shift 4 Ej Add Existing Item Shift Alt A Add Project fe Open Solution fee Close Solution cdd Eats deu dos ple ila 2 In the Add Existing Item dialog box select See Eee Mdfunc vb 59 Mdfunc vb has been saved the following directory during installation e User specified folder COMMON 5 lt INCLUDE gt Places Files of type Code Files vbj resx xsd wsdl Cancel p 11 6 11 6 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 3 4 When using Visual NET 2003 2005 2008 The following describes the setting operation when using Visual C NET 2003 2005 2008 The screens of Visual Basic NET 2003 are used for the explanation in this section These screens are slightly different from other V
406. tation setting the input data status from a data link faulty 4 24 4 3 4 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty standby master function 4 25 4 4 05 FONCIONS s ii etie re Not e oia fot o P ran 4 34 4 4 1 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future reserved station stent etnies 4 34 4 4 2 Powering off a station in operation without detecting an error error invalid station setting function ee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeteeesaeseneseeeseeeseaeteneteaeeaneeaes 4 35 4 4 3 Checking operations for each station data link stop restart 4 36 4 4 4 Station number duplicate check ccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeceaeeeeaeeecaneesaeeseaeesceeeseeessaeseeeseaees 4 36 4 4 5 5 5 4 37 4 4 6 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting 4 38 4 4 7 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode 4 39 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions Eai 4 48 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission FUNCTIONS ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea
407. tation intelligent device station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points local station is 30 points Remote station local station intelligent Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station device station standby master station Number of link points per link Remote register RWr 4 points remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 2 Auto return function RAS function Slave station disconnect function Error detection by the link special relay register one system Loading slot PC PCI bus slot half size PC PCI Express X1 X2 X4 X8 X16 slot half size PCI bus PCI Express Bus width 32 bits Link width 1 lane Bus performance Bus clock frequency 0 to 33MHz Transmission speed 2 5Gb s 5V DC 5 3 3V DC 9 PCI standard Rev 2 2 PCI Express standard Rev 1 0a 3 3 V DC Internal current consumption m o Waon Maximum number of link points per system Connection cable PECIFICATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 1 The link points shown above apply to the use in the remote net ver 1 mode Refer to Table 3 2 for those in the remote net ver 2 mode remote additional mode x2 Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables CC Lin
408. tation and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote output RY Remote input RX Address Station Station number 14200 RY F to RY 0 H XOF to X00 RX F to RX 0 4000 J ber 1 RX1FDF to RX1FDO 41FD RX1FEF to RX1FEO 41FEx 43FE4 RYTFEF to RY1FEO 43FFu RY1FFF to RY1FFO 42014 1 to RY 10 ME og RX4F to RX 10 4001 42024 RY 2F to RY 20 ME MEE RX2F to RX20 40029 42034 RY 3F to RY 30 i i RX to RX30 40034 i 42044 to RY 40 ME EE RX4F to RX40 40044 4205 RY 5F to RY 50 E d RX 5F to RX50 4005 42061 RY 6F to RY 60 MEE i RX 6F to RX60 40064 i Station 4207 RYTF to RY7O EE RX 7F to RX70 4007 Station number 2 4208 RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX80 40084 number 2 4209 RY 9F to RY 90 RX 9F to RX90 40094 420 RY AF to RY AO ME ME RX AF to RXAO 400A 420B4 RY BF to RY BO MEE TEE RX BF to RXBO 400B 420 RY CF to RY CO CF to 400 i 420D to RY DO ME RX DF to RXDO 400D 420Eu RYED to RYEO 1 to RXE0 400Ex to to to to
409. tation number of the slave station within the range between 1 and 64 Check the board module station number Checkthelne Check the communication status 17 42 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station The station types of the module are different from the parameter settings Example insisto Connected Parameter B30A area module setting Set the correct parameters mismatching error Remote device Intelligent Remote I O device Remote device device Match the contents of the Installation parameter The contents of the installation status B30B installation status and network mismatching error and network parameters do not match parameters Standby master station Station switening was directed Designate the station number of B30C gt a station other than the standby designation error the standby master station master station B30D Temporary error invalid A temporary error invalid station was Designate a temporary error station designation error designated before the link was started invalid station during data link The station number including the Station number setting number Coupled stations was So Set the station number within the B384 to a value other than 1 to 40 with a a
410. tation standby master station 4 FUNCTION bii MELSEC 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions The following explains the transient transmission functions 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission functions The following functions can be used for transient transmission Target station Reads data from the buffer memory of the designated mdReceive station or the programmable controller CPU device of the Master station local station intelligent device station designated station Writes data to the buffer memory of the designated mdSend station or the programmable controller CPU device of the designated station mdRandR Reads date Om Ne randomly specified CPU device of the specified station mdRandW Writes data to the randomly designated CPU device of the designated station Local station Sets the CPU device bit device of the designated mdDevSet device mdDevRst the CPU device bit device of the designated Transient transmission is performed only when these functions are executed to other stations 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIMES This chapter explains the data link processing times such as the link scan time and transmission delay time 5 1 Link Scan Time This section shows the CC Link scan time calculation method Link scan time LS LS BT 29 4 NI X 4 8 NW X 9 6 N X 32 4 ni X 4 8 nw X 9 6 ST us BT Constant transmiss
411. tc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board If all power is not turned off not doing so may cause damage to the product e Securely mount the board to the PCI bus slot of the mounting device If the board is not mounted correctly this may lead to malfunctioning failure or cause the board to fall e When mounting the board take care not to become injured by the components that are installed or surrounding materials e When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards e While handling the board be sure to keep it free of static electricity Static electric charges may damage the board or result in malfunction e Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed e Do not drop the board and the terminal block or subject it to any excessive shock It may damage the board and the terminal block or result in malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board and wiring Not doing so may cause damage to the pro
412. te output RY Address For station FO RY F to RY 0 1604 For station number 1 1 RY 1 to RY10 1614 number 1 RY 2 to RY20 1624 For station XOF to X00 X1F to X10 For station 2 number 2 RY to RY 30 1634 number 2 For station 4 RY 4F to RY 40 1644 For station number 3 5 RY 5F to RY50 165 number 3 RY 6F to RY60 1664 For station RY7F to RY7O 167 number4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 ji 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For station E6 number 4 E7u 1 1 1 Ji 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For station RY 8F to RY 80 1684 For station number 5 RY 9D to RY 90 1694 number 5 to to For station _RY7CF to RY7CO_ J1DC For station number 63 RY7DF to RY7DO number 63 For station RY7EF to RY7EO For station RY7FF to RY7FO 1DF4 number 64 number 64 15Fu RX7FF to RX7FO App 18 App 18 APPENDIX Station Buffer memory address EOn to E1H 2 to E3H 4 to E5H to E7H E8x to 9 to EBH ECu to EDH to EFH FOH to F1H F2u to F3u 4 to F5u F6H to F7H F8u to 9 number N Station Buffer memory address 160 to 161H 162u to 163H 164 to 165 166 to 167 168 169 16 to 16BH 16 to 16DH 16 to 16FH 170H to 171H 172u to 173H 174 to 175
413. te station 1 station Remote station 4 stations Station number 7 Local station occupies 4 stations If any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations or standby master station that has been specified as an error invalid station is also specified as a reserved station the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting function Setting method The setting is performed at lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 9 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 3 Checking operations for each station data link stop restart The circuit test Hardware circuit test Software and a Network test can be performed in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details refer to Section 9 2 8 4 4 4 Station number duplicate check This function checks whether or not multiple modules with the same station number exist in the system when the master station is started up 1 When there is a duplicate station number the ERR LED is lit an error code is stored the SWO06A switch setting status and the SBOOGA turns 2 By correcting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link the ERR LED can be turned off and the data in the SWOO6A can be cleared 4 FUNCTION xiii MELSEC 4 4 5 Multiple CPU system support By setting the logical station number using the CC Link Ver 2 utility any CPU of a multi
414. that is currently set 2 Network Status To set up the network refer to Section 9 3 4 Shows the data format and the type of the device being displayed word device and bit device 3 Data Format To change the device type refer to Section 9 3 5 To change the data format refer to section 9 3 9 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 3 Setting the 16 point register monitor Set the Device Monitor Utility so that it monitors up to five bit devices and one word device simultaneously 1 Menu selection Select Menu 16 point register monitor on the menu bar Selectable for batch monitoring only 2 Display screen Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help Sw 0000 Sw 0001 Sw 0002 Sw 0003 Sw 0004 Sw 0005 Sw 0006 Sw 0007 Sw 0008 Sw 0009 SW 0004 Sw 000 Sw 000C Sw 0000 Sw 000 Sw O00F coccococococoocoococococoscosoc cocococooococoocococococoscosoco ccoccoc ocooocoocococococoscosoc 81 CC Link 1 slot Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Network No 0 Station No 255 Word device HEX 16 bit Displays the current device status 1 Device Information To change the data format refer to Section 9 3 9 Displays the status of the network that is currently set 2 Network Status To set up the netwo
415. the Axis 1 positioning start ON writes start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw8 of the AJ65BT start No setting area RWw8 D75P2 S3 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data RY79 setting request flag RY79 10 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data RX79 and the remote station READY flag setting complete flag RX79 and turns ON the RX7B remote station READY flag RX7B 11 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 12 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and OFF and the remote station READY flag RX7B Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 of the AJ65BT D75P2 ON turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 13 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 14 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts the zero point return operation Parameters set in the sample program For zero point return Basic parameters Extended parameters Zero point return method Zero point return dwell time O 5 counting system 2 zero point signal is not used Displacement setting after near point dog 1000 Zero point return d
416. the data link is not available due to an error for example 1 Executing this test during data link stops the data link 2 Use Selected Station on the Line test screen for any of the error stations detected in the All stations 1 to 64 test 3 The CC Link Ver 2 board is automatically reset before and after execution of the hardware test 4 Specifying All stations 1 to 64 with not all of 64 stations connected to the CC Link system and executing this test will cause unconnected stations to be detected as error stations 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC Operation Procedure After selecting Line test Hardware in the Test item click the Start button The line test screen appears Line test screen Line test C Selected station feof Lo Wem scription o Line test result screen For All stations 1 64 only Result 5 Each station information DP NEEEEBENEEEEENE ggBHEHEBHEEEEEEHNE BEHEEEBHBEHEERHEEEHH HEHEEHEHEBEEBEBEEHEHNHH 6 gt Test result It completed successfully Error code 0x0 Eror 7 Display when 4 stations are connected pte scription ooo Displays the information of each station 5 Each station information White Normal station Red Error station Displays the status of each station 6 Test result icu In the event of an error the error code is displayed 7 button Closes the line test result screen 9 OPERATING THE
417. the memory address to an area that is not affected by Own board memory access error other board Change the memory access setting to 16 bits if it is set to 8 bits Check the I O port address setting Cannot access the I O port Perform a self loopback test of the board and check hardware 1281 5014 20 8204 8205 Exit the program and restart the PC Consult with the dealer regarding the problem 200 17 9 17 9 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Return value Sd File name error 20104 8209 5 2011 Registering release set status error 8210 20124 Detailed condition division error 8211 2013 Step condition error 8212 f 20144 Bit device condition error ies Parameter setting error 201 Setup the package again ee Consult with the dealer regarding the problem ii 17 10 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Return value Eu iust 8240 File type error 20314 yp 8242 2032 Specified module error 8243 20334 Error check flag error 8244 20344 Step RUN operation error Step RUN data error 8246 2036 Step RUN time error 8247 2 20374 Program RUN inside writing error to EFROM 8248 2038 Clock data read write error 9249 Trace non completion 20394 8250 203 Registration clearness flag error ek Operation error 203 8252 203 The number of station error 8253 203Dx The number o
418. the receive data from the master station Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors 3 Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 4 2 Buffer memory details The following describes the details of the items shown in the buffer memory list in Appendix 4 1 1 Remote input RX and remote output RY When the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of points indicated below is used a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored Two words 32 points are used per station 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored Two words 32 points are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote input RX Remo
419. the station number described above then specify the logical station number to the lower byte station number The range of the logical station number specification is from 65 41 to 239 EFu 2 Station number 64 cannot be designated in the CC Link communication 11 7 Network Number and Station Number Specification for Extended Functions The following table shows the network numbers used for extended functions Network number specification CC Link 0 Fixed The following table shows the station numbers used for extended functions Station number specification Own station 255 FFH CC Link Other station 0 0 to 63 11 12 11 12 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 8 Device Types A device type can be specified in the functions either by a code number or device name 1 Device types when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used The following table shows the CC Link dedicated device types when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used to access devices Device type Code designation Device name Device Decimal Hexadecimal designation DevX Own station RX DevY Own station RY DevSM Own station SB link special B for CC Link DevSD Own station SW link special W for CC Link DevMRB Own station random access buffer DevWw Own station link register for sending DevWr Own station link register for receiving DevSPB Own station buffer memory DevRBM Other station buffer memory DevRAB Other station random access buffer
420. ting an include file Build Tools Window Help x Visual Component Manager Register Control Error Lookup Activex Control Test Container OLEJCOM Object Viewer Soy e MFC Tracer Customize aw Macro Record Quick Macro Ctrl Shift R Play Quick Macro Ctri Shift P Editor Tabs Debug Compatibility Build Directories 1 Show directories for Choose Directory Directory name C MELSEC COMMONSINCLUDE Cancel Ger Network 25 MELSEC Common gt INCLUDE 1 Start Visual C 5 0 or Visual C 6 0 and select Tools Options menu 2 Select the Directories tab and set the directory type to Include files 3 Double click the item to be set and reference the folder containing the include file MDFUNC H has been saved in the following directory during installation lt User specified folder COMMON INCLUDE 4 Add include lt mdfunc h gt at the beginning of your program 11 4 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 2 When setting a library file Build Tools Window Help Visual Component Manager Register Control Error Lookup Activex Control Test Container OLEJCOM Object Viewer Spy MFC Tracer Customize Macro Options Record Quick Macro Ctrl Shift R Play Quick Macro Ctri Shift P Editor Tabs Debug Compatibility
421. tion 2 Installation precautions The following are the precautions when installing the software package e Log on as a user having administrator authority e Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation e The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically e Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display driver Or update the Windows operating system e The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 3 Installing utility This section explains a procedure for installing the CC Link Ver 2 board utility a Installation 1 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Setup exe file on the CD ROM 3 By following the on screen instructions select or enter the necessary information For instructions which are difficult to determine refer to 5
422. tion of the CC Link Ver 2 board is displayed on the CC Link Ver 1 Utility A parameter read error occurs when the CC Link Ver 1 Utility is started up The CC Link Ver 1 Utility does not run correctly An error such as a display error or an application error occurs The message An attempt to link a device name has failed is displayed in the event viewer App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 Prevent different versions of software packages from being installed together The following describes how to check the utilities and drivers for coexistence of different version software packages a How to check the utility version The version can be checked by Start Settings Control Panel Adding Deleting Applications 1 When using Windows XP and Windows 7 select Add Remove Programs When using Windows Vista select Uninstall a program Utility names displayed CC Link Ver 1 Utility SWnDNF CCLINK B CC Link Ver 2 Utility SW1DNC CCBD2 B When the name of the utility that is not compatible with the mounted CC Link board is displayed perform the following Uninstall the utility that is not compatible with the CC Link board Refer to section 8 4 4 b How to check the driver version The version can be checked by Start Settings Control Panel System lt lt Hardware gt gt tab button Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 only Driver names displayed CC Link Ver 1 driver PCI
423. tion with SBOOOB 65 procedure 0 Normal registration Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Section 17 3 5 instruction result Stores the mode setting status 0 Online with automatic return SWO0060 Mode setting 2 Offline 6601 status 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test swo061 Host station Stores station number of the host that is currently in operation 0 Master station 6611 number 1 to 64 Local station Stores the operation setting status of the CC Link Ver 2 board b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o LI lolol TJ To T Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function invalid 1 Master station duplex function valid L Input status from the data link faulty station 0 50 0062 Module operating d Hold 6624 status L Number of occupied stations 00 Occupies 1 station 10 Occupies 2 stations 11 Occupies 3 stations 01 Occupies 4 stations Slave station refresh forced clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily 1 Expanded cyclic setting 00 single 01 double 10 quadruple 11 octuple SWO064 No of retries E the retry count setting information when there is an error 6644 information 1 to 7 times SWO065 of automatic Indicates the setting information f
424. to 42 stations or less addresses 20H to 5 The number of intelligent device stations including local stations was Set the number of intelligent Intelligent device station Wi 6 B38C 1 set to 27 stations or more with a device stations to 26 stations or O x setting error parameter MATE station information parameter less addresses 20 to 5 The invalid station designation parameter addresses 14H to 17H was set to a value other than board module s head station number or Set the head station number of Invalid station station number not specified in the the target station B38D designation error parameter Do not designate any of the x parameter lt Example of other than head station stations not specified with a number gt parameter A bit other than for station number 5 was on for a module occupying 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 17 43 17 43 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code hexadecimal Error description Communication buffer assignment error Automatic update buffer assignment error Standby master station designation error parameter Number of retries setting error parameter Number of auto return stations setting error parameter Station number duplicate error parameter Station data setting error parameter Number of occupied stations setting error parameter Number of connected modules setting error parameter Standby master stat
425. to Octuple A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 e Condition 4 16 X A 54 X 88 X C lt 2304 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Master station IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 MELSEC Maximum 26 A Local station Local station Local station QJ61BT11 N J A1SJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61QBT11 Terminal resistor required Maximum 26 a Intelligent device station Maximum 42 A Remote device station CC Link dedicated cable Maximum 64 A Local station Remote I O station 00 OOO RS 232 interface module AJ65BT R2 00 OOO oooa Analog digital converter AJ65BT 64AD oooa OO Remote I O module AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTC1 32D Te IBM PC AT compatible PC Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 p Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 2 Applicable Systems This section describes applicable personal computers and provides some precautions on the system configuration 2 2 1 Applicable persona
426. to 18BH 18 to 18DH 18 to 18FH 190H to 191H 192u to 193H Station Buffer memory address 194 to 195H 196 to 197H 198 to 199H 19 to 19BH 19 19DH 19 to 19 1 0 to 1A1H 1 2 to 1A3H 1 4 to 1 5 1 to 1A7H 1A8H to 1A9H 1 to 1ABH 1 to 1ADH Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AFH 1 to 1B1H 1B2u to 1B3H 1 4 to 1B5H 1B6u to 1B7H 1 8 to 1B9H 1 to 1BBH 1 1BDu 1 to 1 1C0H to 1C1H 1 2 to 1C3H 1 4 to 1 5 1C6H to 1C7H Station Buffer memory address 1C8H to 1 9 1 to 1CBH 1CCu to 1CDH 1 to 1CFH 100 to 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 to 109 1DAu to 10 1DCu to 1DDH 1DEu to 1 number App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored Two words 32points are used per station 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored Two words 32points are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local statio
427. to 75 C 20 to 75 C Operating ambient temperature 5 to 95 RH No condensation 10 to 90 RH No condensation Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance 5 to 95 RH No condensation Conforming to JIS B 3502 2000 IEC 61131 2 10 times each in X Y and Z axis 80 minutes When there is Sweep intermittent Vibration Count When there is Sweep continuous Vibration Count Shock resistance 10 times each in X Y and Z axis 80 minutes Conforming to JIS B 3502 2000 IEC 61131 2 147m s 15g 3 times each in 3 directions XYZ The general specifications of the CC Link Ver 1 board and CC Link Ver 2 board are the same as that of the A series module and the Q series module respectively App 1 10 to 9096RH No condensation Conforming to JIS B 3501 IEC 1131 2 10 times each in X Y and Z axis 80 minutes 10 times each in X Y and Z axis 80 minutes Conforming to JIS B 3501 IEC 1131 2 147m s 15g 3 times each in 3 directions XYZ APP App 1 APPENDIX 2 Performance Specifications CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 MELSEC CC Link Ver 1 board A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 Remote I O RX RY 8192points 2048points Max No of P points Remote register RWw 2048points 256points Remote register RWr 2048points 256points Expanded cyclic setting 1 time setup 2 time setup 4 time setup 8 time setup
428. to link special registers SW0000 to SWOTFF For more details on the link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF refer to Section 17 3 4 5 Slave station offset and size information For the remote net ver 2 mode and the remote net additional mode RX RY RWw RWr assignment to station numbers varies depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the remote I O station points setting a Offset Head buffer memory addresses of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station are stored When two or more stations are occupied values are stored to the head buffer memory address of the station only When the station No 1 occupies 2 stations values are stored to RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 1 only RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 2 are remained as default App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC b Size Sizes of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station are stored in word data When a size is less than 1 word it is rounded up and 1 is stored When 8 point setting is set for I O station points setting 1 is stored For the I O station points setting refer to Section 4 4 6 For a reserved station 0000H is stored Buffer memory address Default Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Station No 1 RX offset Station No 1 RX size to Station No 64 RX offset Station No 64 RX size Station No 1 RY offset Station No 1 RY size to Station No 64 RY offset Station No 64 RY size Station No 1 RWw offset Station No 1 R
429. to make changes to this computer Program name CCBD2UTL exe Verified publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer To continue type an administrator password and then click Yes Admin Password Show details System standby error is displayed System Standby Failed N The device driver For the PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller device is preventing the M machine from entering standby Please close all applications and try again If the problem persists you may need to update this driver When the utility is activated and if the User Account Control screen is displayed requesting a selection of user with administrator authority and password entry 1 the user who is logging on to the system does not have an administrator authority Log off the system and login again as a user with administrator authority and activate the utility Standby mode of operating system is not supported for CC Link Ver 2 board Depending on a personal computer standby mode may be set by the power switch operation setting or the uninterruptible power system UPS setting Disable the standby mode on the Control Panel of the operating system 1 If only one user account with administrator authority is available the User Account Control screen requests the password entry of its user only 2 details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 5 17 2 17 2 17 TROU
430. to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subjec
431. tor Each module has a different terminal block layout Exercise caution when wiring the system 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 8 7 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable This section explains how to perform a T branch connection using the CC Link dedicated cable 8 7 1 T Branch system configuration The following shows a system configuration using T branch connection T branch terminal block connector Local station intelligent device station Main line Remote station remote device station Remote I O station Master remote device station station Branch line Branch line Branch Branch line Terminal resistor line Terminal resistor between DA and DB between DA and DB Remote I O station Remote I O station remote device station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station Remote station remote device station Remote I O station Local station Remote I O station x remote device station intelligent device remote device station A maximum of 6 stations can be connected station M A E A maximum of 6 stations can be connected x The number of branch lines is determined bythe branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STA
432. trol Settings Sr l Setting completion App 41 MELSEC b Using Windows 7 1 Select Start Control Panel 2 Select System and Security 3 Select Change User Account Control settings 4 Set the slide bar Never notify me when and click the button App 41 APPENDIX 2 Internet Internet Explorer E mail Windows Mail Welcome Center E Backup Status and Configuration gt Windows Media Player Small Business Resources a Windows Fax and Scan Windows Meeting Space iu Windows Photo Gallery a Windows Live Messenger Download Y Paint gt All Programs Allowing the warning message without showing it MELSEC The following shows a procedure for allowing a warning message without showing it Documents Pictures Music Search ent Items Computer 0 E Control Panel Home System and Maintenance Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security Check for updates Firewall Network and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Set up file sharing Hardware and Sound Printer Mouse Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility Check this computer s security status gy Allow a program through Windows e prog g f Play CDs or other media automatically User Accounts Add or remov
433. trollers H A Jungo amp H Keyboards te MELSEC CC Link Device Status aiterihainelaiiationok T atus after the installati PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller lt the CC Link Ver 2 board c When the installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or the CC LINK Ver 2 board is not recognized reinstall the driver by the following procedure 1 Delete PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller on the Windows Device Manager screen 2 Restart the personal computer 3 Install the driver by following the installation procedure If the driver cannot be installed confirm the following settings For Windows XP If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel System Hardware Driver Signing the driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and install the driver 8 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 The screens displayed during installation and the procedure For the screens displayed during the installation follow the procedures as instructed below a Using Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Screens Procedure ReadOnly File Detected An option you selected requires that files be installed to your system or files be uninstalled from your system or both read o
434. troubleshooting procedures are described in Chapter 17 16 To learn about the error descriptions Sections 17 2 1 and 17 3 5 The descriptions of errors are described in Sections 17 2 1 and 17 3 5 17 To learn about combination with existing software Appendix 8 Combination with existing software is described in Appendix 8 Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Model Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board unless otherwise specified Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation CC Link Ver 1 board Generic term for the Type ASOBDE J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board and the Type A80BDE J61BT13 Control amp Communication Link System Local Interface Board CC Link Ver 2 board Abbreviation for the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Master board Abbreviation for the CC Link board when used as a master station Local board Abbreviation for the CC Link board when used as a local station QJ61BT11 N Generic term for QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module and QJ61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Module Personal computer PC AT compatible computer Windows NT Abbreviation for Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Operating System Windows 2000 Abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating
435. tting error EN LL UNE Red Cable disconnection error ewe disconnection pre eee Sa e ee d Responses received from all stations S Operating as other than S MST Green Operating a standby the standby master master station station MS Red Station duplicated error Station not duplicated L PRI OCAL Green Operating as a local Operating as other than station the local station PRM Red Parameter error No parameter error 15 button Closes the Board detail information screen 16 Save SB SW button Rus the ED of all the CC Link Ver 2 board SB SW areas selected on this screen in ormat 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 2 3 Operating the Other station monitor screen This screen shows the line status of other stations all stations that are currently connected to the CC Link system Other station monitor screen CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 1 ChannelNo Channel No 81 _ 2 Self station information Sta No 0 Master station Ver 2 mode All stations view 3 Sta No Reserved station information Error invalid station information Station type Ver 1 Remote device Ver 1 Remote device Load file Transient error 1 1 Occupies 2 station N
436. tus to the remote local intelligent Appendix device standby master 4 2 1 stations 2 For the local station Stores the output status to the master station Remote output RY Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other enabled local intelligent device standby master stations O Available Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors x2 Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected App 15 App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Buffer memory list 2 3 Availabilit rens fin Read write 2286 Reference Item Description Master Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section station station For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local intelligent device standby Remote register master stations RWw 2 For the local station Stores the send data to Master station the master other local Appendix For sending intelligent device standby 4 2 2 master stations Local station Read write t Also stores the receive For sending receiving data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Write only enabled Remote register For the master station Stores the receive data RWr from the remote device Master station local intelligent device Appendix Read onl For receiving stan
437. tween stations 17 26 17 26 17 TROUBLESHOOTIN OU SHOOTING MELSEC 2 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as a local board The ERR LED of the master station is flashing Do the parameter settings and installed system configuration match correctly NO Correct the parameter settings or installed system configuration Are the master station link special registers 0080 to SW0083 data link status of other stations turned on NO Master station failure station link special registers 51 0098 to SWO009B duplicate station number status YES Check the master station side Check the module for which Check the module for which SW0098 to SWO009B are on SW0098 to SWO009B on Check the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 side Are the station numbers i e Is the power on set correctly YES Set the station numbers correctly Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Y Reset the master station Turn the power NO Is the RD LED lit YES NO Is the NO Doesn t it work normally communication cable wired correctly YES Correct the communication cable wiring Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure failure Y 1 2 3 1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connectio
438. ty Master Local station station B110 Cannot receive A line error has occurred Check the line messages B111 Message data receiving A line error has occurred Check the line order error Message data length error B112 Message data ID error A line error has occurred A line error has occurred or an instantaneous power failure has occurred in the send station Check the line Check the line power supply for the send station or power supply module B114 A line error has occurred Check the line lo o B115 A line error has occurred Check the line EE B116 Corresponding station error during sending B205 B301 Designated station number setting error Designated station number not set error Line test error station detected Designated station number setting error All stations data link error Station number setting error installation status Duplicate station number error 17 42 Abnormal head bit A line error has occurred A data link error occurred in the corresponding station during transient transmission The designated station number exceeded the maximum communication station number during temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request The designated station numbers were not set during temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request An error was detected in a remote station or an intell
439. uence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 9 3 9 Switching the data format The device monitoring display can be changed to the selected data format The batch monitoring and 16 point entry monitoring have different sets of selectable menus 1 Menu selection Select Data Format Word Bit Device on the menu bar 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 10 Numerical pad The Numerical Pad can be used to set device values and other numeric values To display the Numerical Pad select Options Numerical Pad on the menu bar 1 Click the numeric value input field Data Changing r Device Ww 0000 C HEX DEC o 2 The Numerical Pad is displayed Enter a desired value by pressing the corresponding buttons and then click the button Numerical Pad Data Changing Device Vw 0000 C HEX c DEC 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 3 11 Other operations By double clicking a device number on the Device Monitor Utility window the word device data can be changed or the bit device can be switched between on and off 1 Word device The following explains how to change the word device 1 Double click the number of
440. ules 1 To set the CC Link system to the remote net Additional mode select Remote net Additional mode Table 14 5 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cyclic station points station select 14 1 EE Occupies Ver 1 Intelligent device station single 4 stations 128 points No setting MERC Occupies 15 4 Ver 2 Intelligent device station double 2 stations 96 points No setting 2 For the local station select an intelligent device station 14 11 14 11 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 14 2 3 Setting the local station The following shows the local station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section For the setting refer to Section 14 2 2 1 2 Parameter settings The following shows the local station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 1 Channel No Channel No 81 Oth
441. umber check function This is a transmission method by which data communications are available between 1 1stations at any given timing by specifying a target station 14 Transient transmission In this method of transmission a counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is performed at an arbitrary timing IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Local station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Program Write gt Buffer memory t mdSend mdReceive 15 Backward compatibility By setting the Remote net ver 1 mode the user program of the CC Link Ver 1 board can be used on the CC Link Ver 2 board Select the remote net ver 1 mode when the cyclic points increasing is not required or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as substitute for the CC Link Ver 1 board 16 Cyclic points increase function When the Remote net ver 2 mode or Remote net additional mode is selected the number of cyclic points can be increased up to 8192 points for RX RY and up to 2048 words for RWr RWw per network by the expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple or octuple Also it can be increased up to 224 points for RX RY and up to 32 words for RWr RWw per station Refer to Section 4 4 7 17 Remote I O station points setting I O points are set for remote I O stations Since only the points used in remote input RX and remote output RY need to be set for remote I O stations the
442. unctions For the combination of operating system and programming language refer to the Microsoft technical information 11 3 1 When using Visual Basic 5 0 and Visual Basic 6 0 The following describes the setting operation when using Visual Basic 5 0 and Visual Basic 6 0 1 Start Visual Basic 5 0 or Visual Basic 6 0 Project Format Debug Run Query and select Project Add Module menu 4 Add Form 153 Add MDI Form Paana i2 Add Class Module Bf Add User Control 1 amp 8 Add Property Page Add Module 2 Select the Existing tab and select New Existing MDFUNC BAS Lookin O INCLUDE s efarkEM MDFUNC BAS has been saved in the following directory during installation lt User specified folder COMMON INCLUDE File name Mdfunc bas Files of type Basic Files Cancel show this dialog in the future 11 3 11 3 11 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 11 3 2 When using Visual 5 0 and Visual 6 0 Options Platform Win32 Include files Directories D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio VC98 INCLUDE D Program Files Microsoft Visual StudioS C98 MFCAINCLUDE D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio VC9844TLAINCLUDE D Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 SDK v1 1 include 11 4 The following describes the setting operation when using Visual C 5 0 and Visual C 6 0 1 When set
443. used for I O need to be allocated for the remote devices in the CC Link system and unused points can be reduced It is effective for saving device points The remote I O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver 2 mode only Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote station Remote I O station IBM PC AT Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 d DE Master station _ Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Program Station ___ number 4 1 i R i mdSend i 32 point output module 1 heehee 4 L L Device area when remote I O points setting is made L Device area when remote I O points setting is not made 1 Set points to even numbered 8 point setting remote I O stations consecutively If points are set to odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations select 8 points 8 points reserved in the remote station points setting of the last of the consecutive remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station reserved __ Station ___ number 4 8points8points reserved to Odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations
444. ut status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory IBM PC AT compatible PC Program Remote input RX Intelligent device station Master station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX such as positioning Handshaking signals complete ee RXOF to RX00 RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20 3 RX3F to RX30 i 2 J RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 to RX7FF to RX7FO Remote input RX when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name RX00 RX01 RX02 RX03 RX04 RX05 RX06 RX07 RX08 to to D75P2 ready complete Single axis start complete Dual axes start complete Use prohibited Single axis BUSY Dual axis BUSY Use prohibited Single axis positioning complete Dual axis positioning complete 4 FUNCTION Ss aA MELSEC Remote output 4 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory IBM PC AT compatible PC Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board
445. uter db Car Cancel V Show details Yes lo I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Change when these notifications appear gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 7 9 1 1 Starting a utility Start a utility by clicking one of the following menus under the Start All Programs x1 IMELSEC menus i MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Utility MELSEC Data Link Function HELP Starts the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Starts the Help for the communications functions E Device Monitor Utility Starts the Device Monitor Utility 1 When Windows NT or Windows 2000 is used Programs is displayed 9 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 9 1 2 Starting the device monitor utility The following explains how to start the Device Monitor Utility from the CC Link Ver 2 Utility The Device Monitor Utility can be started by clicking the button at the bottom of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility screen CC Link Ver 2 utility Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 5101 Channel No 81 LED information Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUN ERR Data link status In data link Error status Norm
446. utton to restore the parameters To the next page App 11 App 11 APPENDIX From the previous page 1 is Parameter backup restore tool Parameter backup Parameter restore Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them p Parameter file setting TIT TT EC Set parameter file p 7 Parameter backup restore tool Parameter backup Parameter restore Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them Parameter file Set paramete File path Board reset is necessary to validate parameter 3 Do you reset board Parameter backup restore tool Parameter fil CC Link End App 12 Restore MELSEC 5 When the restoration ends successfully the dialog box on the left is displayed Click the button to end the restoration 6 The CC Link board reset request is displayed To make restored parameters effective click the button The CC Link board is reset App 12 APPENDIX Appendix 3 1 4 How to check the version MELSEC The following shows how to check the version of the Parameter backup restore tool 1 Right click the title bar of the Parameter backup restore tool screen or click the icon f 2 Click Version information in the system menu Parameter backup restore tool Move Minimize Parameter backup Parameter restore E X Close Alt F4 Read parameter setting
447. value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 LS Link scan time refer to Section 5 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 2X 2X2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 3 When reading RWr from the CC Link board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIMES MELSEC 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RWw Remote device station RWw The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RWw of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board is changed until the data of the remote device station is changed Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station process
448. wn here are reference sizes Adjust the sizes in accordance with your system 17 16 17 16 17 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC c Sample program When setting by Visual C 5 0 6 0 NET2003 NET2005 NET2008 Example of min working set size 1MB and max working set size 3MB define ERROR 1 short ChangeWorkingSetSize DWORD dwProcessld User program ID variable HANDLE hProcess User program handle variable DWORD dwMinimumWorkingSetSize X Minimum working set variable DWORD dwMaximumWorkingSetSize Maximum working set variable Obtain the user program ID dwProcessld GetCurrentProcessld Open the user program handle hProcess OpenProcess PROCESS SET QUOTA PROCESS QUERY INFORMATION FALSE dwProcessld if hProcess NULL Error end return ERROR Obtain the maximum working set size and minimum working set size of the user program if GetProcessWorkingSetSize hProcess amp dwMinimumW orkingSetSize amp dwMaximumWorkingSetSize 0 Error end CloseHandle hProcess return ERROR Set the minimum working set size to 1MB dwMinimumWorkingSetSize 1 1024 1024 Set the maximum working set size to 3MB dwMaximumWorkingSetSize 3 1024 1024 Change the maximum working set size and minimum working set size of the user program if SetProcessWorkingSetSize hProcess dwMinimumWorkingSetSize dwMaximumWorkingSetSize 0 Error end CloseHandle hProces
449. y addresses Station Buffer memory address 17Au to 17BH 17 to 17DH 17 to 17FH 180u to 181H 182 to 183H 184 to 185H 186u to 187H 188 to 189H 18Au to 18BH 18 to 18DH 18 to 18FH 190H to 191H 192u to 193H Local station Station Buffer memory address 194 to 195u 196 to 197H 198 to 199H 19 to 19BH 19 to 19DH 19 to 19FH 1A0H to 1A1H 1 2 to 1A3H 1 4 to 1A5H 1 to 1A7H 1 8 to 1A9H 1 to 1ABH 1 to 1ADH number Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AFH 1BOu to 1B1H 1B2u to 1B3H 1 4 to 1B5u 1B6u to 1B7H 1 8 to 1B9H 1BAu to 1BBH 1 1BDH 1 to 1 1C0H to 1C1H 1C2u to 1C3H 1 4 to 1 5 1C6H to 1C7H number Station Buffer memory address 1C8H to 1 9 1 to 1CBH 1CCu to 1CDH 1 to 1 100 to 101 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 to 1D7H 108 to 1D9H 1DAu to 1DBH 1DCu to 1DDH 1DEu to 1DFH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address to FBH to FDH FEn to FFH 100 to 101H 102 to 103H 104 to 105u 106 to 107H 108 to 109H 10 to 10BH 10Cu to 100 10 to10FH 110 to 111 112 to 113H Station Buffer memory address 114 to 115u 116 to 117H 118 to 119H 11 to 11BH 11 to 11DH 11 to 11FH 120 to 121H 122 to 123H 124 to 125 126
450. y master station 4 The remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with the QJ61BT11 4 FUNCTION Ss aA MELSEC b Whether send receive is enabled or not The following table indicates whether send receive of cyclic data is enabled or not Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N Master station Additional mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 mode 2 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible i compatible compatible compatible area area Receive station Send station Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 Master Additional compatible area station Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 Local Additional compatible area station mode Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 Master QJ61BT11 station ver 1 compatible A80BDE J61BT11 Local A80BDE J61BT13 Ver 1 compatible QJ61BT11 station Intelligent device station o o Remote device station verte o _ Remote station Ver 1 compatible 4 FUNCTION Se MELSEC Q80BD J61BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11 ABOBDE J61BT13 Intelligent device Remote device Remote QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 station station I O station Local
451. y master station number as the one set in the master station to Sta No in lt lt Parameter settings gt gt and set Standby master station for Type For Mode setting select the same mode as the one set in Mode setting of the master station CC Link Ver 2 utility Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 Operational settings 2 Other settings Sta No Type 12d Standby master station vf Expanded cyclic Transmission rate 10Mbps Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station v Default Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Input for Er Sta Hold Clear Check Station information settings All connect count Device Monitor Load file Save file New 4 FUNCTION MELSEC 3 Notes on using the standby master function a Only one standby master station is allowed in a single data link system b The total number of stations can be no more than 64 including the standby master station The number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is one or four c Do not specify station number 64 for a system in which a standby master station exists If it is specified station number 64 cannot communicate normally d If any abnormality is detected at th

Type Q80BD-J61BT11N/Q81BD-J61BT11 CC-Link

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents